R-81-381 - 5/14/19811
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Haynie & Kallman Inc.
CONSULTING ENGINEERS
1,
1
1.
�1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
i
t
1
1
Haynie & Kallman Inc.
CONSULTING ENGINEERS
CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS
WATER TREATMENT PLANT - 1981
SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Bids will be received at City Hall, 214 E. Main Street, Round
Rock, Texas 78664, at 10 :00 o'clock A.M., on April 23, 1981.
5
Specification No.
Haynie & Mailman, Inc.
CONSULTING ENGINEERS
2115 North Mays
Round Rock, Texas 78664
(512) 255 -4564, 255 -7861
Timothy E. Haynie, P.E.
Steven D. Kallman, P.E.
April 24, 1981
ASSO(,Ii1tL
AURT,N,
ADDENDUM NO. 2 r 1 " '° 0
WATER TREATMENT PLANT - 1981
Addendum No. 2 to the Plans, Specifications and Contract
Documents for the "Water Treatment Plant - 1981" project for
the City of Round Rock, Texas.
1. The bid opening time shall be 10:00 a.m. Advertisement
and Instruction to Bidders were incorrectly printed with
2:00 p.m.
2. Plans, Sheet 8, Detail d -8. The profile elevation stub
from the wet well drain shall be changed from 776.00 to
774.00
3. Plans, Sheet 34, Detail b-34. The wet well depth shall
be changed from 16.8 ft. to 10.00 ft.
4. Plans, Sheet 34, Sign Detail. The concrete sign shall
include 2 mates of #3 bars at 8" on center with stirrups
at 8 ".
5. The sludge lagoons, bridges, piping, pump station and
related items of work shall be included in Bid Item No.
20 of the Proposal.
6. Section 16 - Fork Lift. The box scraper attachment shall
be changed to loader bucket.
7. Section 04- 08.10.5 - Instrument Air Compressor. The
compressor is a twin motor and compressor unit requiring
two separate conductors and controls from motor control
center per Plans.
8. Plans, piping and couplings in plant such as influent
pipe, effluent pipe shall be steel H.D.G. after fabrica-
tion.
9. Bid Proposal, Page 9 of 10. The Bidder may lump sum
Items 1 thru 25 except Items 23 and 24. On revised
Bidding Sheet 9 of 10 (enclosed), the total bid shown
ADDENDUM NO. 2 - 1/3
CIVIL ENGINEERING • LAND PLANNING • MUNICIPAL CONSULTANTS • SURVEYING
after Bid Item No. 25 shall reflect the lump sum bid
except for Items 23 and 24. The total bid for all of
Items 1 thru 25 shall then follow. Add revised Bidding
Sheet 9 of 10.
A break down on the Bid Items as presented in the Bid
Proposal will be required within two weeks after bid
opening upon request by the Engineer.
10. Plans, Sheet 37; the asphalt access road shall also
extend to the Booster Pump Station building. Plan/
Profile shall be provided after contract award.
11. Plans, Sheet 38; two railroad tracks shall be crossed
with the access road.
12. Specification Section 06 -11.2, Page 20 of 21. Delete
the two Bristol Series 4330 Dynamaster Servo Recorders
or approved equal in the Water Treatment Plant building
and substitute with two Bristol Series 1M1M 500 Receiv-
ers and two Bristol 9J1 Power Supply Instruments.
13. Each Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of this Addendum
on Page 2 of the "Proposal ".
ADDENDUM NO. 2 - 2/3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bid Item Description
Item Quantity Unit and Written Unit Price
25 1 L.S. Supply and install one (1) graphic
display control board in plant
control building, including elec-
trical wiring, lights, and graphics,
complete in place, per lump sum
*Revised 4/24/81 Addendum No. 2 - 3/3
for Dollars
and Cents $ $
*LUMP SUM TOTAL BID (ITEM 1 THRU 25,
EXCEPT ITEMS 23 & 24) $
TOTAL BID (ITEMS 1 THRU 25) $
ALTERNATE
26 1 L.S. Install approx. 800 L.F. of 30"
D.I., Cl. 50 raw water and
treated water lines, also 16"
D.I., Cl. 50 and 24" D.I., Cl.
50 into the plant, including
pipe, fittings, trench, backfill,
and flush valves, complete in
place, per lump sum
for Dollars
Unit
Price Amount
and Cents $ $
27 1 L.S. Install approx. 100 L.F. of 30"
C.S.C., C -301, 700 L.F. of 27"
C.S.C., C -301, raw water and
treated water lines, also 16"
C.S.C., C - 301, and 24" C.S.C.
C -301 into the plant, including
pipe, fittings, trench, backfill,
and flush valves, complete in
place, per lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents $ $
28 1 L.S. Install approx. 100 L.F. of 30"
0.I., Cl. 150, 700 L.F. of 27"
D.I., Cl. 50 raw water and
treated water lines, also 16"
D.I., Cl. 50 and 24" D.I. Cl.
50 into the plant, including
Page 9 of 10
Haynie & Kallman, Inc.
CONSULTING ENGINEERS
2115 North Mays
Round Rock, Texas 78664
(512) 255 -4564, 255 -7861
April 16, 1981
ADDENDUM NO. 1
WATER TREATMENT PLANT - 1981
ADDENDUM NO. 1 - 1/3
CIVIL ENGINEERING • LAND PLANNING • MUNICIPAL CONSULTANTS • SURVEYING
Timothy E. Haynie, P.E.
Steven D. Kallman, P E.
Addendum No. 1 to the Plans, Specifications and Contract
Documents for the "Water Treatment Plant - 1981" prdject for
the City of Round Rock, Texas.
1. The bid opening date of Thursday, April 23, 1981, has
been changed to Thursday, April 30, 1981. The times dur-
ing the day for the bid openings on all contracts will
remain the same as shown in the "Notice to Contractors"
in the contract documents.
2. Plans, Sheet 6, call out for 18" x 24" reducer at raw
water meter shall be revised to 16" x 24" reducer.
3. Plans, Sheet 7, call out in plan view for 0 +79.5 raw
water line 30" x 30" x 18" tee, 30" plug shall be revised
to 0+79.5 raw water line 30" x 30" x 16" tee, 30" plug.
Call out in profile for 0 +67 18" meter, 0 +76.5 18" but-
terfly valve and 0 +79.5 30" x 30" x 18" tees shall be
revised to 0+67 16" meter, 0+76.5 16" butterfly valve and
0 +79.5 30" x 30" x 16" tee.
4. Plans, Sheet 10, call out for 8" >x telescoping type fil-
ter inlet control valve w /pneumatic operator (typ) shall
be revised by deleting w /pneumatic operator.
5. Plans, Sheet 14, reinforcing at intersection of filter
wall and clarifier floor shall be revised per attached
sketch.
6. Plans, Sheet 30, laboratory includes note locating raw
water flow recorder; this note shall be disregarded as to
location.
7. Bid Item 28, Page 9 of 10 of the Proposal shall be elimi-
nated from the Proposal.
8. Technical Specification Section 08 -02.9 Butterfly Valves
and Section 08 -02.13 Pneumatic Operators; reference is
made to DeZurik which is not AWWA approved. The intent
is to provide an AWWA approved valve w /compatible opera-
tor, such as Dresser or Pratt.
9. Each Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on
Page 2 of the "Proposal ".
ADDENDUM NO. 1 - 2/3
Haynie & Kal !man, Inc. PROJECT LOCATION NORTH FORK CAC() BY DATE 4/ 16/81
AND
CIVIL ENGINEERING TREATMENT PLANT
IIL LAND SURVEYING PROJI DESCRIN CHKG BY DATE •
ION
_ADDENDUMNO. 1 _ _ JOB NO
Round
Rock, Texas 78664
—CLARIFIER-
CLARIFIER FLOOR
ADDENDUM NO. 1 — 3/3
FILTER WALL
FILTER CELL
1, 't
- 4---- HOOK CLARIFIER
FLOOR STEEL AT WALL
ADD II 4 0 HORIZ.
-AROUND LEDGE
SHEET OF
-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TITLE SHEET
TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS (ADVERTISEMENT)
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
PROPOSAL AND BIDDING SHEET
AGREEMENT
BID BOND
PERFORMANCE BOND
PAYMENT BOND
INSURANCE CERTIFICATE
INFORMATION REQUIRED OF LOW BIDDER
CONTRACTOR'S ACT OF ASSURANCE
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
FROM THE CITY COUNCIL OF
THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS
WATER TREATMENT PLANT - 1981
Sealed bids, in envelopes addressed to The City of Round
Rock, 214 East Main Street, Round Rock, Texas 78664, will be
received at the above mentioned address until 10:00 a.m.,
April 23, 1981 and then publicly opened and read, for fur-
nishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and perform-
ing all work required for the construction of a Water Treat-
ment Plant, located in Round Rock, Williamson County, Texas.
Bids will be submitted in sealed envelopes for each Con-
tract on the proposal furnished, and marked in the upper left
hand corner "BID FOR WATER TREATMENT PLANT - 1981 to be open-
ed at 10:00 a.m., April 23, 1981."
All proposals shall be accompanied by a cashier's certi-
fied check upon a national or state bank in the amount of
five (5) percent of the total maximum bid price payable with-
out recourse to The City of Round Rock, or a bid bond in the
same amount from a reliable surety company, as a guarantee
that bidder will enter into a contract and execute perform-
ance bond within ten (10) days after notice of award of con-
tract to him. The notice of award of contract shall be given
by the Owner within sixty (60) days after the bid opening.
The bid security must be enclosed in the same envelope with
the bid. Bids without check or bid bond will not be consid-
ered. All bid securities will be returned to the respective
bidders within twenty - five (25) days after bids are opened,
except those which the Owner elects to hold until the suc-
cessful bidder has executed the contract. Thereafter all
remaining securities, including security of the successful
bidder, will be returned within sixty (60) days. The suc-
cessful bidder must furnish performance bond and payment bond
upon the forms which are available in the office of The City
of Round Rock in the amount of one hundred (100) percent of
the contract price from an approved surety company holding a
permit from the State of Texas to act as surety (and accept-
able according to the latest list of companies holding certi-
ficates of authority from the Secretary of the Treasury of
the United States) or other surety or sureties acceptable to
the Owner, with approval prior to bid opening.
Page 1 of 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
The right is reserved, •as the interest of the Owner may
require, to reject any and all bids, and to waive any infor-
mality in bids received.
Plans, specifications and bidding documents may be se-
cured from the office of the Engineer, Haynie & Kallman,
Inc., on deposit of one - hundred dollars ($100.00) per set,
which sum so deposited will be refunded provided: (1) All
documents are returned in good condition to the Engineer not
later than forty -eight (48) hours prior to the time for
receiving bids; or (2) The Contractor submits a bid and all
documents are returned in good condition to the Engineer not
later than five (5) days after the time that bids are receiv-
ed.
Plans and specifications may be examined at the office
of the Engineer, Haynie & Kallman, Inc., 2115 North Mays,
Round Rock, Texas. Bidders should carefully examine the
Plans, Specifications and other documents, visit the site of
work, and fully inform themselves as to all conditions and
matters which can in any way effect the work or the cost
hereof. Should a bidder find discrepancies in, or omissions
from the Plans, Specifications or other documents, or should
be in doubt as to their meaning, he should notify the Engi-
neer; Haynie & Kallman, Inc. and obtain clarification prior
to submitting any bid. Prequalification Requirements: The
bidder is to submit information regarding his qualifications
with this bid in accordance with instructions contained in
the Bid Form. Minimum Wage Scale: As specified and regulat-
ed by the State of Texas and the Federal Government.
The improvements shall be completed within the number of
calendar days bid on Page 3 of the Bid Proposal after notice
to proceed from the Owner.
Page 2 of 2
ADVERTISEMENT
PROJECT TITLE: City of Round Rock -•
Water Treatment Plant - 1981
OWNER: The City of Round Rock, Texas
LOCATION: Round Rock, Texas
TYPE: Water Treatment Plant
BID BOND: 5%
PERFORMANCE BOND: 100%
PAYMENT BOND: 100%
PLANS AVAILABLE: March 26, 1981
OPENING TIME: 2 ":00 P.M., Thursday, April 23, 1981
OPENING PLACE: City Hall
City of Round Rock
214 East Main Street
Round Rock, Texas 78664
PLANS AVAILABLE: Haynie & Hallman, Inc.
2115 North Mays
Round Rock, Texas 78664
Telephone - (512) 255 -7861
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
PROPOSAL
The proposal shall be submitted on the bidding forms which
are included herein, and shall be enclosed in a sealed enve-
lope addressed to:
The City of Round Rock
c/o Haynie & Kaliman, Inc.
2115 North Mays
Round Rock, Texas 78664
and shall be identified as follows:
"BID FOR WATER TREATMENT PLANT to be opened at 2:00 p.m.,
Thursday, April 23, 1981."
A proposal will not be accepted unless prepared on the bid-
ding form provided. The sealed proposals will be publicly
opened and read at the time and place stated in the Notice.
Inviting Bids.. Bidders or their authorized agents are invit-
ed to be present. Unauthorized conditions, limitations or .
provisions attached to a proposal will render it informal and
may cause its reflection. The complete proposal forms shall
be without addition, alterations or erasures. Alternative
proposals will not be considered unless called for. No oral,
telegraphic or telephonic proposals or modifications will be
considered. The proposal may be withdrawn upon request by
the bidder without prejudice to himself prior to, but not
after, the time fixed for opening of bids, provided that the
request is in writing, has been executed by the bidder or his
duly authorized representative, and is filed with the Owner.
DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
More than one proposal from an individual, firm, partnership,
corporation or association under the same or different names,
will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing
that any bidder is interested in more than one proposal for
the work contemplated will cause the rejection of all propo-
sals in which such bidder is interested. If there is reason
for believing that collusion exists among bidders, all bids
will be rejected and none of the participants in such collu-
sion will be considered in future proposals.
1 of 3
RETURN OF PROPOSAL GUARANTEES
Within twenty-five- (25) days after an award of the Contract,
the Owner will return the proposal guarantees accompanying
each of the proposals as are not considered in making the
award. All other proposal guarantees will be held until the
Contract has been finally executed. They will then be re-
turned to the respective bidders whose proposals they accom-
pany.
AWARD OF CONTRACT - RESERVATION OF RIGHTS
Contracts, if awarded, will be awarded to responsible bidders
whose proposals comply with alL the requirements prescribed.
Awards., if made, will be made within sixty (60) calendar days
after the opening of the proposals. The Owner reserves the
right to reject.any or all bid proposals, to accept the low-
est responsible bidder's proposal, and to waive any informal-
ity in any proposal.
EXECUTION OF CONTRACT
A bidder to whom award is made shall execute a written con-
tract with the Owner on the form of agreement provided.
Failure or refusal to enter into a contract as herein provid-
ed, or to conform to any of the stipulated requirements in
connection therewith shall be a just cause for the annulment
of the award. If the successful bidder refuses or fails to
execute the Contract, the Owner may award the Contract to
second lowest responsible bidder. If the second lowest re-
sponsible bidder refuses or fails to execute the Contract,
the Owner may award the Contract to the third lowest respon-
sible bidder. On the failure or refusal of such second and
third lowest responsible bidder to execute the Contract, the
work may be re- advertised.
PROPOSAL GUARANTEE
Each proposal shall be accompanied by a certified or cash-
ier's check or bid bond in the amount of not less than 5% of
the amount named in the proposal. Said check or bond shall
be made payable to the Owner and shall be given as a guaran-
tee that the bidder, if awarded the work, will enter into a
contract within ten (10) days after the award and will fur-
nish the necessary bonds as hereinafter provided. In case of
refusal or failure to enter into said contract, the check or
bond as the case may be, shall be forfeited to the Owner. No
bidder's bond will be accepted unless it conforms substan-
tially to the form furnished by the Owner, which is bound
herein, and is properly filled out and executed.
2 of 3
PROPOSAL SIGNATURE
If the proposal is made by an individual, it shall be signed
and his full name and his address shall be given; if it is
made by a firm it shall be signed with the co-partnership
by a member of the firm, who shall sign his own name,
and the name and address of each member shall be given; and
if it is made by a corporation the name of the corporation
shall be signed by its duly authorized officer or officers
attested by the corporate seal, and the names and titles of
all officers of the corporation shall be given.
COMPETENCY OF BIDDERS
In selecting the lowest responsible bidder, consideration
will be given not only to the financial standing, but also to
the general competency. of the bidder for the performance of
the work covered by the proposal. To this end each proposal
shall be supported by a statement of the bidder's experience,
on the form entitle "Information Required of.Bidder ", bound
herein.
BIDDER'S EXAMINATION OF SITE
Each bidder shall examine carefully the site of the proposed
work and the Contract Documents therefore. It will be assum-
ed that the bidder has investigated and is satisfied as to
the conditions to be encountered; as to the character, qual-
ity and quantity of materials to be furnished and as to the
requirements of the Contract, Specifications and Drawings.
ADDENDA
Bidders desiring further information, or interpretation of
the Plans or Specifications must make request for such infor-
mation in writing to Engineer, prior to 48 -hours before the
bid opening. Answers to all such requests will be given in
writing to all bidders, in Addendum form, and all Addenda,
will be bound with, and made a part of, the Contract Docu-
ments. No other explanation or interpretation will be consi-
dered official or binding. Should a bidder find discrepan-
cies in, or omissions from the Plans, Specifications or other
Contract Documents, or should he be in doubt as to their
meaning, he should at once notify the Engineer in order that
a written Addendum may be sent to all bidders. Any Addenda
issued prior to twenty -four (24) hours of the opening of bids
will be mailed or delivered to each Contractor contemplating
the submission of a proposal on this work. The proposal as
submitted by the Contractor will be so constructed as to in-
clude any Addenda if such are issued by the Engineer prior to
twenty -four (24) hours of the opening of bids.
3 of 3
PROPOSAL
TO
THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK
FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
IN ROUND ROCK, TEXAS
The undersigned, as bidder, declares that the only person or
parties interested in this proposal as principals are those
named herein, that this proposal is made without collusion
with any other person, firm or corporation; that he has care-
fully examined the form of contract, Notice to Contractors,
inviting bids, conditions and classes of materials of the
proposed work; and agrees that he will provide all the neces-
. _sary labor, machinery tools, apparatus, and other items inci-
dental to construction, and will do all the work and furnish
all the materials called for in the contract and specifica-
tion in the manner prescribed therein and according to the
requirements of the Engineer as therein set forth.
It is understood that the following quantities of work to be
done at unit prices are approximate only, and are intended
principally to serve as a guide in evaluating bids.
It is further agreed that the quantities of work to be done
at unit prices and materials to be furnished may be increased
or diminished as may be considered necessary, in the opinion
of the Engineer, to complete the work fully as planned and
contemplated, and that all quantities of work, whether in-
creased or decreased are to be performed at the unit prices
set forth below except as provided for in the Specifica-
tions.
It is further agreed that lump sum prices may be increased to
cover additional work ordered by the Engineer; but not shown
on the plans or required by the Specifications, in accordance
with the provisions of the General Conditions. Similarly,
they may be decreased to cover deletion of work so ordered.
It is understood and agreed that the work is to be completed
within the time herein stated.
The undersigned bidder agrees to commence work within seven
(7) days after written notice to commence has been given.
Page 1 of 10
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF PAYMENT ITEMS
The undersigned acknowledges that the foregoing bid items are
the only items of payment under this contract and that his
bid price under these items reflects the complete charges for
furnishing all labor, material, and equipment to complete the
project as outlined in the plans, specifications, and con-
tract documents.
KNOWLEDGE OF LOCAL CONDITIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The undersigned warrants that he has examined the location of
the proposed work, the plan drawings, specifications, and all
other parts of the Contract Documents, and is familiar with
the local conditions at the place where the work is to be
performed.
CONTRACT TIME
If awarded the Contract, the undersigned agrees to complete
the work in 360 calendar days.
OWNER'S RIGHTS RESERVED •
The undersigned understands and agrees that the Owner reser-
ves the right to reject any or all Proposals or to waive any
informalities of technicalities in any proposal in the inter-
est of the Owner, except as specifically limited by the terms
of the Contract Documents or applicable Laws or Governmental
Regulations.
ADDENDA
The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following adden-
da:
Addendum No.
2
Page 2 of 10
Dated
4- 1L Y'I
/) -LA -`? 1
SUBMISSION OF THE PROPOSAL
In accordance with the Contract Documents, the above Proposal
is hereby respectfully submitted by:
12.13. BUTLER, INC:
Name of Contractor
•'l/ L,� ��,t • % /_, C( / / Ire. /c/Ci ?'f
'Executed by (Name) Title or Position
x .36•/c % /3 .3 o
Business Address Telephone Number
City
EQUIPMENT TO BE SUPPLIED
Water treatment plant equipment shall be supplied by:
ENU1
Name of Man facturer
'P P> 13
Address
Name of Representative
7xc s '7"/Y.3"
State Zip
U 1 T,c -- 7S7 ( 0
Page 3 of 10
.7 %f/
Date
PROPOSAL BIDDING SHEET
CONTRACT: WATER TREATMENT PLANT - 1981
JOB LOCATION: ROUND ROCK, TEXAS
OWNER: THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK
Gentlemen:
Pursuant to the foregoing Advertisement for Bids and Instructions to Bid-
ders, the undersigned bidder hereby proposes to do all the work, to furnish all
necessary superintendence, labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials, insur-
ance and miscellaneous items, to complete all the work on which he bids as pro-
vided by the attached supplemental specifications, and as shown on the plans for
the construction of Water Treatment Plant, and binds himself on acceptance of
this proposal to execute a contract and bond for completing said project within
the time stated, for the following prices, to wit:
This project is exempt from sales tax.
Bid
Item Quantity Unit
Item Description
and Written Unit Price
1 1 L.S. Install approx. 2500 L.F. of 7'
high fence with gates, per site
plan, complete in place, per lump
SUM
for Dollars
and Cents $
2 1 L.S. Site clearing, excavation, con-
trolled filling and grading, plant
and building foundation subgrade,
and tree removal, per site plan,
complete in place, per lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents $
3 1 L.S. Plant Access Roadway, approx. 3000
L.F., 21' wide, with 6" base mater-
ial and base shoulders, 1 -1/2" HMAC,
complete with railroad crossing,
drainage culverts, tree removal and
subgrade preparation, per site plan,
complete in place, per lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents $
Page 4 of 10
Unit
Price
$
Amount
Bid Item Description
Item Quantity Unit and Written Unit•Price
4 1 L.S. Water treatment plant equipment,
including paddle mixers in rapid
mixer and flocculator zones, clari-
fiers, recycle sludge propeller,
bridges, filters, flow control
weir gate, and related valves and
piping, complete in place, per
lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents $
5 1 L.S. Treatment plant concrete foundation
and walls, including rapid mi'x and
splitter box, clarifier, filters,
pipe gallery, flow control box,
and piping below grade, complete
in place, per lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents $ $
6 1 L.S. Construct prefabricated metal plant
control building with concrete foun-
dation and concrete driveway slab,
complete in place, per lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents $
7 1 L.S. Plant control building finish includ-
ing: interior wall finish, restroom
with fixtures, plumbing, electrical,
lighting and floor finish, complete
in place, per lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents $
8 1 L.S. Laboratory equipment including: test
equipment, cabinets, counter tops,
complete in place, per lump sum
for Dollars
Unit
Price Amount
and - Cents $ $
9 1 L.S. Turbidimeter (1) required with
recorder and piping, complete in
place, per lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents $
Page 5 of 10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bid
Item Quantity Unit
Item Description
and Written Unit Price
10 1 L.S. Chlorination equipment: two chlo-
rinators, scales, "I" beam support-
ed electric hoist with motorized
trolley, piping and conduit, and
injectors, complete in place, per
lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents $
11 1 L.S. Hydraulic pumps including: 3 pumps
and motors, storage reservoir,
hydraulic pumps for rapid mix, floc -
culators, sludge recycle propeller
and clarifier scraper drive, valves,
piping, fittings, electric, and con-
trols, complete in place, per lump
sum
for Dollars
and Cents $
12 1 L.S. One (1) air compressors with electric,
controls, piping and valves, complete
in place, per lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents $ $
13 1 L.S. Chemical (alum) feed system with
electrical, controls, storage bin,
dry feeder, mixer, mixing tank,
feed pumps, screw conveyor, valves,
piping, and injector, complete in
place, per lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents $
14 1 L.S. Chemical feed system electrical,
controls, mixer, mixing tank, feed
pumps, valves, piping and injector,
complete in place, per lump sum
for • Dollars
and Cents $ $
1 Page6of 10
1
Unit
Price
$
Amount
Bid Item Description
Item Quantity Unit and Written Unit Price
15 1 L.S. Raw water meter vault, including
meter with remote recorder, valves,
piping, fittings, electric and con-
duit, complete in place, per lump
SUM
for Dollars
and Cents $
16 1 L.S. Install approx. 650 L.F. of 6" ACP,
Cl. 200 water service line to treat-
ment plant, per site plan, including
3" meter, 3" service to plant, fittings,
bends, reducers, gates, trench, back -
fill, and control wire conduit with
pull boxes, and special fittings,
complete in place, per lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents $
17 1 L.S. Install approx. 850 L.F. of 30" CSC
raw water and treated water lines,
• also 16" CSC and 24" CSC lines into
the plant, including pipe, fittings,
trench, backfill and flush valves,
complete in place, per lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents $
18 1 L.S Install approx. 400 L.F. of 42" CSC
treated water line including pipe,
fittings, trench, backfill, and
flush valves, complete in place,
per lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents $
19 1 L.S. Electrical and controls, complete
in place, per lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents $
Page 7 of 10
Unit
Price
$
$
$
Amount
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Sid
Item Description
Item Quantity Unit and Written Unit Price
20 1 L.S. Yard and plant piping not specifi-
cally included in other items,
related valves and fittings, bends
as required, tie to existing lines,
including trench and backfill,
thrust blocking, complete in place,
per lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents $
21 1 L.S. Sludge and Sanitary Sewer Lines,
including 50 L.F. of 8" C.I.,
175 L.F. of 12" C.I., 83 L.F. of
6" C.I., and 887 L.F. of 6" PVC,
668 L.F. of 16" C.I., 400 L.F. of
4" PVC, SDR 26, 40 L.F. of 4" C.I.,
13 each manhole, 1 each clean -out,.
including valves, fittings, bends,
tie into existing lines, trench
blocking and backfill, complete in
place per lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents S $
22 1 L.S. Outfall sewer line from treatment
plant site to existing city waste-
water line including 3382 L.F. of
8" PVC, 4 each manholes, fittings,
bends, tie into existing lines,
trench blocking and backfill, com-
plete in place, per lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents $
! 23) 160 Ea. Grill test holes, complete in
place, per each
for
and N��1
Dollars
•24) 50 C.Y. Concrete Pressure Grouting sub-
surface at plant, complete in
place, per cubid yard
for ,„ c J Do11 ars
and I• 1 pJ — - - - -.•_ Cents
Page 8 of 10
Unit
Price Amount
$
goo $14221.
Bid Item Description Unit
Item Quantity Unit and Written Unit Price Price Amount
25 1 L.S. Supply and install one (1) graphic
display control board in plant
control building, including elec-
trical wiring, lights, and graphics,
complete in place, per lump sum
TOTAL 81D (ITEMS 1 11180 25)
"Revised 4 /24/81 Addendum No. 2 - 3/3
for Dollars
and Cents $ $
*LUMP SUM TOTAL 81D (ITEM 1 THRU 25,
EXCEPT ITEMS 23 R 24)
ALTERNATE
26 1 L.S. Install approx. 800 L.F. of 30"
0.i., Cl. 50 raw water and
treated water lines, also 16"
D.1., Cl. 50 and 24" D.I., Cl.
50 into the plant, including
pipe, fittings, trench, backfill,
and flush valves, complete in
place, per lump sum
for Dollars
and — rents $
27 1 L.S. Install approx. 1(10 L.F. of 30"
C.S.C., C -301, 700 L.F. of 27"
C.S.C., C -301, raw water and
treated water lines, also 16"
C.S.C., C -301, and 24" C.S.C.
C -301 into the plant, including
pipe, fittings, trench, backfill,
and 11u valves, complete in
place, per lump sum
for Dollars
and _ ._ — --- — Cents $
28 1 L.S. Irr;i al l approx. 100 L.I . of 30"
D.1., Cl. 150, 700 L.F. of 27"
II.I., Cl. 50 raw water and
treated water lines, also 16"
11.1., Cl. 50 and 24" D.1. Cl.
50 into the plant, including
Page 9 of 10
$
$
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bid
Item Quantity Unit
Item Description
and Written Unit Price
pipe, fittings, trench, back -
fill, and flush valves, com-
plete in place, per lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents S
29 1 L.S. Install approx. 400 L.F. of 42"
D.I., Cl. 50 treated water line,
including pipe, fittings, trench,
backfill, and flush valves, com-
plete in place, per lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents $
Add Alternate
30 1 L.S. Supply one (1) Model 730 Bobcat
Fork Lift, Clark Equipment Co., or
approved equal, delivered to the
jobsite, per lump sum
for Dollars
and Cents (Add) $ I (4t00 kx
Page 10 of 10
Unit
Price Amount
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Properly&Liability
Insurance
'011/ ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we n RI 1 n Tnn
as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal,
t the ST. PAUL FIRE AND MARINE INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the
le of Minnesota as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto
('i ♦•y of Rn,,rd Rnrk TAV7,S
'le sum of
Five per —cent of greatest amount bid Dollars
SM, ) for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety,
I ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
'EREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for Water Treatrcrnt.P1
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Piincipal and the Principal shall enter into a
tract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such hid, and give such bond or bonds as may he specified in
bidding or contract documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such contract and for
prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the
.cipal to en ter such contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not
.coed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may
, 00d faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and
1, otherwise to remain In full force and effect.
Signed and sealed this
-�f 2•
(Wmteas)
3r
day of
1
(Witness)
50 Rev, 5.79 Printed In U.S.A.
BID BOND
Approved by The American Institute of Architects,
A. 1. A. Document A 310 Feb. 1970 Edition
April
St. Paul Fire and
1 13y r ,( rIALJ
0i.choccl VI. I'ol
ST. PAUL FIRE AND MARINE
INSURANCE COMPANY
St. Paul, Minnesota
A Capital Stock Company
as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee,
A D 19 81 ,
1i B , Tnr.. (Seal)
(Principal)
('title)
Marine Insurance Company
- ((Surety)
✓i
(Seal)
1 Artgrncyt6- racopt torn cy —in —fact
Printcd with permission of The American Institute of Architects
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ST. PAUL FIRE AND MARINE INSURANCE COMPANY (A Capital Stock Company)
ST, PAUL, MINNESOTA
CERTIFIED COPY OF POWER OF ATTORNEY
Original on File at Home Office of Company. See Certification.
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the Si. Paul Fire and Marine insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the
.nws of the State of Minnesota, and having Its principal office in the City of Saint Paul, Minnesota, does hereby constitute and appoint
:chard W. Pollard, Adrian G. McDonald, Millie Fazzino, individually, College Station, Texas
Class I
Fidelity and Surety
Department
:t true and lawful attorneys(s)- in-fact to execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety, any and all bonds and undertakings, recogntzances,
:onuacts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, which are or may be allowed, required or permitted by law, statute. rule,
-egulation, contract or otherwise, and the execution of such instrument(s) in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon the said St. Paul Fire
Marine Insurance Company, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if the same had been duly executed and acknowledged by its regularly
•lected officers at its principal office.
This Power of Attorney is executed, and may be certified to and may be revoked, pursuant to and by authority of Article V,— Section 6(C), of the
iy -Laws adopted by the Board of Directors of the ST. PAUL FIRE AND MARINE INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting called and held on the 23rd
'ay of January, 1970, of which the fallowing is a Iran transcript of said Section 6(Ci.
"The President or any Vice President, Assistant Vice President, Secretary or Resident Secretary, shall have power and authority
(1) To appoint Attorneys -in -fact, and to authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the Seal of the Company thereto,
bonds and undertakings, recogntzances, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and
(2) To appoint Special Attorneys -in -fact, who are hereby authorized to certify to copies of any power-of- attorney Issued in pursuance of this
section and/or any of the By -Laws of the Company, and
(3) To remove, at any time, any such Attorney -in fact or Special Attorney-in -fact and revoke the authority given him,"
Further, this Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile pursuant to resolution of the Board of Duectors of said Company adopted at a
meeting duly called and held on the 601 day of May, 1959, of which the following is a true excerpt:
"Now therefore the signatures of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such power of attorney or any certificate
elating thereto by facsimile, and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding
pun the Company and any such power so executed and certified by facsimile signatures and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company
.. the future with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached."
IN TESTIMONY WIILRLOF, the St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company has caused this instrument to be signed and
its corporate seal to be affixed by its authorized officer, this 2nd day or September A D 19 80
ST. PAUL FIRE AND MARINE INSURANCE COMPANY
STATE OF MINNESO fA
County of Ramsey
Vice President,
On this 2nd day of September 19 80 . before me came the individual who executed the preceding instrument,
.a me personally known, and, oeing by me duly sworn, said that he is the therein described and authorized officer of the St. Paul Fire and Marine
' nsurance Company: that the seal affixed to said instrument it the Corporate Scat of said Company; that the said Corporate Seal and his signature were
..ly affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said Company.
CERTIFICATION
1, the undersigned officer of the St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, do hereby certify that I have compared the foregoing copy of the
.ewer of Attorney and affidavit, and the copy of the Section of the By -Laws of said Company as set forth In said Power of Attorney,• with the ORIGINALS
:N FILE IN TIIE IIOME OFFICE OF SAID COMPANY, and that the same are correct transcripts thereof, and of the whole of the said originals, and that
�.e said Power of Attorney has not been revoked and is now in full force and effect.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, 1 have hereunto set my hand and affixed niy Official Seal,
at the City of Saint Paul, Minnesota, the day and year first above written.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, 1 have hereunto set my hand this 3(1 day of Apr i, 1
1 'Unlimited as to character and amount.
10870 Re, 10 - 74 Printed In U.S.A
V.C. INNES
Notary Public, Ramsey County, Minn.
My Commission Expires April 27,1983
19 81
Secretary .
THE STATE OF TEXAS j
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS
COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON j
That this Agreement made and entered into this Ar
of , A.D.. 1981, by and between the CITY OF
ROUND ROCK, TEXAS, its Mayor, First Party, hereinafter termed
the OWNER, and R. B. BUTLER, INC.
of the City of BRYAN , County of BRAZZOS
AGREEMENT
State of Texas, Second Party, hereinafter termed the CONTRAC-
TOR.
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the pay-
ments and agreements hereinafter mentioned to be made and
performed by said First Party (Owner), the said Second Party
(Contractor) hereby agrees with the First Party to commence
and complete the construction of certain improvements at the
prices set forth in the Contractor's Proposal dated April 23,
1981, for certain improvements described as follows;
WATER TREATMENT PLANT - 1981
The Contractor shall perform all work shown on the Plans
and described in the Specifications and shall meet all re-
quirements of this Agreement, the General and Special Condi-
tions of the Contract; and such Orders and Agreements for
Extra Work as may subsequently be entered by the above named
parties to this Agreement.
- The Contractor hereby agrees to commence work under this
contract within 30 consecutive calendar days after award of
contract and shall cause work to progress in a manner satis-
factory to the Owner. Such work shall be completed in full
within 360 consecutive calendar days after award of con-
tract.
The Owner agrees to pay the Contractor in current funds,
and to make payments on account, for the performance of the
work in accordance with the Contract, at the prices set forth
in the Contractor's Proposal, subject to additions and deduc-
tions, all as provided in the General Conditions of the
Agreement.
The following documents, together with this Agreement,
comprise the Contract, and they are as fully a part thereof
as if herein repeated in full:
Page 1 of 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AGREEMENT (Continued)
ATTEST:
By
Notice to Contractors
Instructions to Bidders
Proposal and Bidding Sheets
Performance & Payment Bonds
General Conditions of
Agreement -
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Parti
executed this Agreement in the ye
written
ATTEST:
BY 4P- / w P-a BY it s - d• �i�
Page 2 of 2
Special Conditions of
Agreement
Technical Specifications
Addenda
Change Orders
Plans
J -
e s to these presents have
ar and day first above;"
CITY OF R ND ROCK, EXAS; -,
OWNER ' _ I
R.B. BUTLER, INC,
CONTRACTOR
PERFORMANCE BOND
THE STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF ,BRAZOS
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT
County of BRAZOS
R. B. BUTLER, INC.
of the City of BRYAN
, and State of TEXAS
as principal, and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company
authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as
surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound
unto CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS
PB -1
(OWNER),
in the penal sum ofTwo million,six hundred seventy f Dollarosusand,
six hundred minty aotlars ana no /100
($2,674,690.00 ) for the payment whereof, the said Principal
and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators,
executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by
these presents:
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written
contract with the Owner dated the day of
1981, to which contract is hereby referred to and made a part
hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length
herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH,
that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform said Con-
tract and shall in all respects duly and faithfully observe
and perform all and singular the covenants, conditions and
agreements in and by said contract agreed and covenanted by
the Principal to be observed and performed, and according to
the true intent and meaning of said Contract and the Plans
and Specifications thereto annexed, then this obligation
shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect;
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the
provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of
Texas as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be
determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article
to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no
change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the term
of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the
plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same,
shall in anywise affect its obligation on this bond, and it
does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of
time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or
to the work to be performed thereunder.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed
and sealed this instrument this 26th9ay of May
1981.
R.B. BUTLER, INC. St. PaulFire and Marine Insurance Company
Surety
Principal
� y /
BYizc- CY. �y / By
PB -2
Title Wee Prej /Cieh7 Title Attorney - in - fact
Address RC, Box ,3. Address 4710 Bellarie Blvd.
TXOi 7 -78 a . Bellaire, Texas 77401
The name and address of the Resident Agent of Surety is:
Tnterstate Insurance Agg�y
P.O.Box 4186- Bryan Texas 77805
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PAYMENT BOND
THE STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF BRAZOS [-
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT
County of BRAZOS
PB -3
R. B. BUTLER, INC.
, of the City of BRYAN
, and State of
TEXAS
as principal, and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company
authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as
surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound
unto CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS (OWNER),
Two m lion Six hundred Seventy -four thousand,
in the penal sum of Six hundred ninty dollars andno /1011ars
($2,674,690.00 ) for the payment whereof, the said Principal
and Surety bind themselves and their heirs, administrators,
executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by
these presents:
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written
contract with the Owner, dated the day of
1981, to which contract is hereby referred to and made a part
hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length
herein;
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH,
that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying
labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecu-
tion of the work provided for in said contract, then, this
obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force
and effect;
Provided, however, that this bond is executed pursuant to the
provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of
Texas as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be
determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article
to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no
change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the
terms of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder,
or the plans, specifications or drawings accompanying the
same, shall in anywise affect its obligation on this bond,
and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension
of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract,
or to the work to be performed thereunder.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed
and sealed this instrument this 2bpth day of May
1981.
R. B. BUTLER, INCC
Principal
Title (//ce Presic/eh¢
Address P. Box 4,96/O Address 4710 Bellaire Blvd.
P/ryor1, 77'1X0_5 7 Bellaire, Texas 77401
The name and address of the Resident Agent of Surety is:
Tnterst,fe Tnsurnnee Agency, Inc
P 0.Rox 418E - Rryan,Texas 77805
PB - 4
St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance
Surety Company
Title Attorney- in -fac+
In the event suit is brought upon this bond by the OWNER and
judgment is recovered, said SURETY shall pay all costs
incurred by the OWNER in such suit, including a reasonable
attorney's fee to be fixed by the Court.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we have hereunto set our hands and seals
this 26 day of May , 1981.
R. B. BUTLER. INC.
Principal
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance
Surety Company
By: Af* ,6eP By:
(Seal) Mile zl.8ea ttorney -in -fact
Class 1
Fidelity and Surety
Department
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the St. Paul Fite and Marine Insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the
laws of the State of Minnesota, and having Its principal office in the City of Saint Paul, Minnesota, does hereby constitute and appoint
Richard W. Pollard, Adrian G. McDonald, Millie Fazzino, individually, College Station, Texas
its true and lawful attorneys(s)- in•fact to execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety, any and all bonds and undertakings, recognizances.
contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, which are or may be allowed, required or permitted by law, statute, rule,
regulation, contract or otherwise, and the execution of such instrument(s) in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon the saki St. Paul Fire
and Marine Insurance Company, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if the same had been duly executed and acknowledged by its regularly
elected officers at its principal office.
This Power of Attorney is executed, and may be certified to and may be revoked, pursuant to and by authority of Article V,— Section 6(C), of the
By adopted by the Board of Directors of the ST. PAUL FIRE AND MARINE INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting called and held on the 23rd
day of January, 1970, of which the following is a true transcript of said Section 6(C).
"The President or any Vice President, Assistant Vice President, Secretary or Resident Secretary, shall have power and authority
(1) To appoint Attorneys -in -fact, and to authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the Seal of the Company thereto,
bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and
(2) To appoint Special Attorneys- in•fact, who are hereby authorized to certify to copies of any power -of- attorney issued in pursuance of this
section and/or any of the By-Laws of the Company, and
(3) To remove, at any time, any such Attorney- in•fact or Special Attorney -in -fact and revoke the authority given him."
Further, this Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile pursuant to resolution of the Board of Directors of said Company adopted at a
meeting duly called and held an the 6th day of May, 1959, of which the following is a true excerpt:
"Now therefore the signatures of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such power of attorney or any certificate
relating thereto by facsimile, and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding
upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by facsimile signatures and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company
in the future with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached."
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company has caused this instrument to be signed and
Ze
mbSTATE OF MINNESOTA
County of Ramsey
2nd
'Unlimited as to character and amount.
10870 Rev. 10.74 Printed In U.S.A.
ST. PAUL FIRE AND MARINE INSURANCE COMPANY (A Capital Stock Company)
ST. PAUL, MINNESOTA
CERTIFIED COPY OF POWER OF ATTORNEY
Original on File at Home Office of Company. See Certification.
its corporate seal to be affixed by its authorized officer, this 211
1 s s
440 A
Nu
tw Vice President.
On this day of September 19 g0 , before me came the individual who executed the preceding instrument,
to me personally known, and, being by me duly sworn, said that he is the therein described and authorized officer of the St. Paul Fire and Marine
Insurance Company; that the seal affixed to said instrument la the Corporate Seal of said Company; that the said Corporate Seal and his signature were
duly affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said Company,
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal,
at the City of Saint Paul, Minnesota, the day and year rust above written.
c Th� CERTIFICATION
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, 1 have hereunto set my hand this 26 day of , May
day of September A D 19 80
ST. PAUL FIRE AND MARINE INSURANCE COMPANY
Le-
V
Notary Public, Ramsey County, Minn.
My Commission Expires April 27, 1983
I, the undersigned officer of the St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, do hereby certify that I have compared the foregoing copy of the
Power of Attorney and affidavit, and the copy of the Section of the By-Laws of said Company as set forth in said Power of Attorney,' with the ORIGINALS
ON FILE IN THE HOME OFFICE OF SAID COMPANY, and that the same are correct transcripts thereof, and of the whole of the said originals, and that
the said Power of Attorney has not been revoked and is now in full force and effect.
19 81
0S01/—
IYPE OF
INSURANCE
POLICY
NO.
EH- ECIIVE EXPIRATION
DATE DATE
LIMITS OF LIABILITY
Workmen's
Compensation
* 20518
1/1 /81 1/1/82
Statutory State of
Texas, $ X0,000.00
Employer's Liability
Comprehensive
General
Liability
Includes
Contractual
Liability
Covers
Independent
Contractors
** 523010
Yes
Yes
1/1/81 1/1/82
Bodily Injury
$500,000. each person
$ 500,000. each accident
Property Damage
$ 100,000. each accident
$ 100,000. aggregate
Owner's
Protective
this polior
necessary
will be issued when
Bodily Injury
$ each person
$ each accident
Property Damage
$ each accident
$ aggregate
Comprehensive
Automobile
Liability
Lx� Owned
Vehicles
L Hired
i Vehicles
Non -owned
L 1 Vehicles
L 1 Includes
7 Contractual
Liability
** 5011609
1/1/81 1/1/82
Bodily Injury
$250,000. each person
$ 00,000. each accident
Property Damage
$ 100,000. each accident
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TO: City of Round Rock
214 East Main Street -
Round Rock, Texas 78664
'This certification is not a joint but is a separ
CLIIfIFICAIL' OF INSURANCE shown of each of the Insurance carriers
shown below."
Date: Map 25, 1981
Description of Work: Water
Treatment Plant -1981
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT R. B. Butler, Inc. is, at the date of
this certificate, insured by this company with respect to the business opera-
tions hereinafter described, for the types of insurance and in accordance with
the provisions of the standard policies used by this company, and further here-
inafter described. Exceptions to standard policies are noted on the reverse
side hereof.
The above policies either in the body thereof or by appropriate endorsement
provide that they may not be changed or cancelled by the insurer in less than
ten days after the insured has received written notice of such change or cancel-
lation.
This Certificate of Insurance neither affirmatively or negatively amends, ex-
tends, or alters the coverage afforded by policy or policies indicated by this
certificate
* Texas 2nployers+ Insurance Association
and
* Employers Casualty Compar;y
ZName of
Aubrey Conna
By:
Title: District Manager
Address 1005 La Posada
Page 2 of 2
Austin, Texas 78752
INFORMATION REQUIRED OF LOW BIDDER
The low bidder is required to supply the following informa-
tion. Additional sheets may be attached if necessary.
(1) Address P. 0. BOX 3610 BRYAN, TEXAS 77805
(2) Telephone 713/823 -8091
(3) Type of firm:
( ) Individual, ( ) Partnership, (X ) Corporation
(4) Corporation organized under the laws of the State of
TEXAS
(5) List the names and address of all members of the firm or
names and titles of all officers of the corporation:
R. B. BUTLER, CHAIRMAN OF BOARD H. DAVID BUTLER, PRESIDENT
R. W. BUTLER, VICE PRESIDENT
H. LOUIS HECOX, VICE PRESIDENT
GORDON T. HILL, VICE PRESIDENT
E. E. HOLLEY, VICE PRESIDENT
J. L. HOWARD, VICE PRESIDENT W. G. WHITE, SECRETARY /TREASURER
(6) Number of years experience
(7) List at least three (3) projects completed as of recent
date: Contract Amount /Class of Work /Date Completed /Name
and Address of Owner
(8)
$3,767,020.24 WTR. TR. PLT. 1981 TRINTIY RIVER AUTHORITY ARLINGTON,
TEXAS
$ 2,957,554.68 WTR. TR. PLT. 1980 TARRANT CO. WC &ID N0. 1 F�SORTH, 1
$4,495,707.00 SEW. TR. PLT. 1978 CITY OF LONGVIEW LO
TS
List the name and address of each subcontractor who will
perform work in or about the work or improvement in ex-
cess of one -half (1/2) of one percent (1%) of the total
bid price and indicate what part of the work will be
done by each such subcontractor:
Name
* *SEE ATTACHMENT **
(9) Payment of taxes, in the State of
Yes X No
Address Work to be Performed
Page 1 of 2
TEXAS
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
NAME AND ADDRESS TYPE OF WORK
- KENROD STEEL BUILDINGS METAL BUILDING
P. 0. BOX 648
ROUND ROCK, TEXAS 78664
512/255 - 2515 BOB PERKINS
DAVID LEE EXCAVATION AND ROADWAY
12600 TOMANET
AUSTIN, TEXAS 78758
512/255 -4963 DAVID LEE
VIKING FENCE CO., INC. CHAIN LINK FENCE
9206 B UNITED DRIVE
AUSTIN, TEXAS 78759
512/837 -6411 DICK CURTIS
T & T ELECTRIC, INC. ELECTRICAL
P. 0. BOX 9632
AUSTIN, TEXAS
512/258 -2261 RODNEY
SAN BLON CO. PAINTING
P. 0. BOX 10025
SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS
512/532 - 1647 JACK GOODWYN III
EAST TEXAS CONTROLS INSTRUMENTATION
P. O. BOX 5077
HUNTSVILLE, TEXAS 77340
713/291 - 2035 WILLIE GRANT
(10) If requested by the Owner, the Low Bidder shall submit
a notarized financial statement, financial data or
other information and references sufficiently compre-
hensive to permit an appraisal of his current financial
conditions.
Page 2 of 2
THE STATE OF TEXAS 1
COUNTY OF
BEFORE ME,
County of BRAZOS
appeared R. B. BUTLER, INC.
GERTRUDE THWEATT
(herein represented by GORDON T. HILL
Texas, which will provide benefits to the
ROUND ROCK
owners, and that said
CONTRACTOR'S ACT OF ASSURANCE
Public, duly commissioned and qualified, in and. for the
its VICE PRESIDENT
pursuant to and by virtue of the
provisions of a resolution adopted by the said R. B. BUTLER, INC.
on the 22ND day of MAY
1981, a duly certified copy of such resolution being annexed
hereto and made a part hereof,) who declared that (in accor-
dance with the said resolution and pursuant thereto,) he, the
said GORDON T. HILL' has assured and does
hereby assure the Texas Water Development Board that the said
. R. B. BUTLER, INC.
rized and empowered to comply'°with certain required condi-
tions for the investment of Water Development Funds of the
State of Texas in the construction of a WATER TREATMENT PLANT
project at ROUND ROCK
, the State of Texas, the County
of , other local interests and property
R. B. BUTLER, INC.
CITY OF
, a Notary
, State of Texas, came and
is autho-
1
1
1
1
1
1
.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
will construct said project only in accordance with all laws
of the State of Texas, and all Rules, Regulations and Poli-
cies of the Texas Water Development Board, which assurances
hereby made constitute material and substantial representa-
said R. B. BUTLER, INC.
tions upon the reliance of which the Texas Water Development
Board is expected to approve the award of contracts to the
the construction of said project, and the said
for
R. B. BUTLER, INC.
hereby waives and agrees to waive any
and all claim to monies due the said R. B. BUTLER, INC.
and retained by the Texas Department of
Water Resources and /or Local Sponsor of the project pursuant
to the provisions of Section 17.135, Texas Water Code, as may
be further provided pursuant to the contracts heretofore or
hereafter executed by and between (1) the said R. B. BUTLER, INC.
and (2) THE CITY OF
ROUND ROCK
and /or the Texas Department of
Water Resources, upon a finding by the Texas Water Develop-
ment Board that the said R. B. BUTLER, INC.
has either:
(1) Failed to construct the project according to the
engineering plans specifically approved by the
Texas Water Development Board, or
(2) Failed to obtain the prior approval of the Texas
Water Development Board for any and all subsequent
modifications, amendments, or changes to such engi-
neering plans, without regard to the nature, char-
acter or extent of such changes, or
(3) Failed to construct the works in accordance with
sound engineering principles, or
(4) Failed to comply with any term or terms of the con-
struction contract.
PROVIDED HOWEVER, that such waiver of any and all claims
to monies due the said R. B. BUTLER, INC.
as described above shall extend only to that portion of the
monies retained as are reasonably necessary to correct con-
struction defects in the project resulting from the failure
of the said R. B. BUTLER, INC.
as enumerated under Items 1 -4 above.
By
R. B. BUTLER, INC.
tea. JfZee
Sworn to and subscribed before me this the _jx - of
, 1981.
Notary Public in and for
County, Texas
My commission expires 1,4.21_Js
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
=1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
MINUTES OF A CALLED MEETING
OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF
R. B. BUTLER, INC.
A called meeting of the Board of Directors of R. B. Butler, Inc.
was held in the office of the corporation on May 22, 1981 at
9:15 a.m. for the purpose of authorizing G. T. Hill,,Vice President,
of R. B. Butler, Inc. to enter into a contract on behalf of the
corporation with the City of Round Rock for the construction of a
Water Treatment Plant.
The motion was made, seconded and carried that the following resolution
be adopted:
RESOLVED: That Gordon T. Hill be authorized to enter into a
contract, on behalf of the corporation, with the
City of Round Rock for the construction of a
Water Treatment Plant.
The meeting was then adjourned.
Chairman
Secretary- Treasurer
I hereby certify that this is a true and correct copy of the minutes
of the Board of Directors meeting dated May 22, 1981.
'W. G. White
Secretary- Treasurer
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT•
1. DEFINITIONS
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
CONTENTS
Page
2. GENERAL PROVISIONS
2.01 Engineer's Status and Authority
2.02 Right of Engineer to Modify Methods
and Equipment
2.03 Changes and Alterations
2.04 Damages
2.05 Losses from Natural Causes
2.06 Laws and Ordinances
2.07 Licenses, Permits, and Certificates
2.08 Royalties and Patents
2.09 Keeping of Plans and Specifications
Accessible
2.10 Discrepancies and Omissions
2.11 .Contractor's Understanding
2.12 Extra Work
2.13 Payment for Extra Work
2.14 Assignment and Subletting
2.15 Subcontractors
2.16 Owner's Status
2.17 Completed Portions of Work . . . . . ..
2.18 Materials
2.19 Receiving and Storage of Materials
2.20 "Or Equal" Clause
2.21 Completed Work
2.22 Materials Furnished by the Owner
2.23 Protection of Property
2.24 Shelters for Workmen and Materials . .
2.25 Sanitary Facilities 1
3. CONTRACTOR'S OBLIGATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES . . 1
3.01 Labor, Equipment, Materials and
Construction Plant 1
3.02 Performance and Payment Bonds 1
3.03 Contractor's Ability to Perform 1
3.04 Superintendence and Inspection 1
3.05 Character of Employees 1
3.06 Contractor's Duty to Protect Persons
and Property 1
3.07 Safety Codes 1
3.08 Barricades 1
3.09 Minimum Wages 1
3.10 Unsuitable Work or Materials 1
3.11 No Waiver of Contractor's Obligation . • • 1
3.12 Site Clean Up 1
3.13 Guarantee 1
(CONTENTS CONTINUED) Page
4. OWNER'S OBLIGATIONS AND REPONSIBILITIES 14
4.01 Lines and Grades 1
4.02. Right of Entry 14
4.03 Owner's Inspectors 14
4.04 Collateral Work 15
4.05 Right -of -Way 15
4.06 Adequacy of Design 15
5. SCHEDULING AND PROGRESS OF WORK 15
5.01 Order and Prosecution of the Work 15
5.02. Rate of Progress 16
5.03 Sunday, Holiday, and Night Work 16
5.04 Hindrances and Delays 16
5.05 Extensions of Time 17
5.06 Liquidated Damages for Failure to
Complete on Time 17
6. INDEMNITY 18
6.01 Contractor's Indemnity Provision 18
6.02 Workmen's Compensation Insurance 18
6.03 Comprehensive General Liability Insurance . 18
6.04 Owner's Protective Insurance 19
6.05 Comprehensive Automobile Liability
Insurance 19
6.06 Insurance Certificate 19
7. TERMINATION OF CONTRACT 20
7.01 Right of Owner to Terminate 20
7.02 Right of Contractor to Terminate 20
7.03 Removal of Equipment 20
8. ABANDONMENT OF CONTRACT BY CONTRACTOR 20
8.01 Notification of Contractor 20
8.02 Retention of Contractor's Equipment
and Materials by Owner 21
8.03 Methods of Completing the Work 21
8.04 Final Acceptance 22
8.05 Disposition of Contractor's Equipment . . 22
9. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 23
9.01 Character of Measurements 23
9.02 Estimated vs. Actual Quantities 23
9.03 Payment 24
9.04 Monthly Estimates and Payments 24
9.05 Certificates of Completion 24
9.06 Final Estimate and Payment 25
9.07 Notarized Affidavit 25
9.08 Release of Liability 25
9.09 Contractor's Obligation 26
9.10 Payments Withheld 26
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
1. DEFINITIONS
1.01 Calendar Day. A calendar day shall be the 24 hour
period from one midnight to the next consecutive mid-
night.
1.02 Contract Documents. The Contract Documents shall con-
sist of the Invitation to Bidders; the Instructions to
Bidders; the Proposal; the Signed Agreement; the Per-
formance and Payment Bonds; the General Conditions of
the Agreement; the Special Conditions of the Agree-
ment; the Specifications; the Plans; the Standard
Drawings; Addenda; and duly authorized Change Orders.
The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is
called for by any one shall be as binding as if called
for by all. In case of conflict between any of the
Contract Documents, priority of interpretation shall
be in the following order: Signed Agreement, Perfor-
mance and Payment Bonds, Proposal, Special Conditions
of the Agreement, Invitation to Bidders, Specifica-
tions, Plans, and General Conditions of the Agree-
ment.
1.03 Contractor. "Contractor" shall mean the business or-
ganization or individual named and designated in the
Contract Agreement as the "Party of the Second Part ",
who has entered into this contract for the performance
of the work covered thereby, and its, his, or their
duly authorized agents and other legal representa-
tives.
1.04 Engineer. "Engineer" shall mean the City Engineer of
the City of Round Rock, Texas, or such other engineer,
supervisor, or inspector who has been designated, ap-
pointed, or otherwise employed or delegated by the
Owner for this work, or their duly authorized agents,
such agents acting within the scope of the particular
duties entrusted to them in each case.
1.05 Extra Work. The term "extra work" as used in this
contract shall be understood to mean and include all
work that may be required by the Engineer or Owner to
be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change,
alteration, or addition to the work shown on the
Plans, or reasonably implied by the Specifications,
and not covered by the Contractor's Proposal, except
as provided under "Changes and Alterations ", herein.
-1-
1.06 Owner. "Owner" shall mean the City of Round Rock,
Texas, named and designated in the Agreement as the
"Party of the First Part" acting through its duly
authorized officers and agents.
1.07 Plans. "Plans" shall mean and include (a) all draw-
ings prepared by the Owner as a basis for proposal,
(b) all supplementary drawings furnished by the Engi-
neer as and when required to clarify the intent and
meaning of the drawings submitted by the Owner to the
Contractor, and (c) drawings submitted by the Contrac-
tor to the Owner when and as approved by the Engi-
neer.
1.08 Specifications. "Specifications" shall mean (a) all
written descriptions, methods and instructions prepar-
ed by the Owner as a basis for proposals, (b) all sup-
plementary written material furnished by the Engineer
as and when required to clarify the intent or meaning
of all written descriptions,.methods and instructions
submitted by the Owner to the Contractor, and (c)
written descriptions submitted by the Contractor to
the Owner when and as approved by the Engineer.
1.09 Subcontractor. "Subcontractor" shall mean and refer
only to a business organization or individual having a
direct contract with the Contractor for (a) performing
a portion of the Contract work, or (b) furnishing
material worked to a special design according to the
Contract plans or specifications; it does not, how-
ever, include one who merely furnishes material not so
worked.
1.10 Substantially Completed. The term "substantially com-
pleted" shall mean that the structure or facility has
been made suitable for use is in condition to serve
its intended purpose, but still may require minor mis-
cellaneous work and adjustments.
1.11 Work. "Work" shall mean the work to be done and the
equipment, supplies, material, and services to be fur-
nished under the Contract unless some other meaning is
indicated by the context.
1.12 Working Day. A "working day" is defined as any day
not including Sundays or any legal holidays, in which
weather or other conditions, not under the control of
the Contractor, will'permit construction of the prin-
cipal units of the work for a continuous period of not
less than seven (7) hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00
p.m.
-2-
1.13 Written Notice. "Written notice" shall be deemed to
have been duly served if delivered in person to the
individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer
of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if de-
livered at or sent by certified or registered mail to
the last business address known to him who gives the
notice.
2. GENERAL PROVISIONS
2.01 Engineer's Status and Authority. It is mutually
agreed by and between the parties to this Contract
that the Engineer shall have general supervision and
direction of the work included herein. In order to
prevent delays and disputes and to discourage litiga-
tion it is further agreed by and between the parties
of this Contract that the Engineer shall in all cases
determine the amounts and quantities of the several
kinds of work which are to be paid for under the Con-
tract; that he shall determine all questions in rela-
tion to said work and the construction thereof, that
he shall in all cases decide every question which may
arise relative to the execution of the Contract on the
part of the Contractor; that his decisions and find-
ings shall be the conditions precedent to the right of
the parties hereto to arbitration or to any action on
the Contract and to the rights of the Contractor to
receive any money under this Contract; provided, how-
ever, that should the Engineer render any decision or
give any direction which in the opinion of either
party hereto is not in accordance with the meaning and
intent of this Contract, either party may file with
the Engineer within 30 days a written objection to the
decision or direction so rendered. It is the intent
of this Agreement that there shall be no delay in the
execution of the work, and the decision or directions'
of the Engineer as rendered shall be promptly carried
out.
2.02 Right of Engineer to Modify Methods and Equipment. If
at any time the methods or equipment used by the Con-
tractor are found to be unsafe or inadequate to secure
the quality of the work or the rate of progress re-
quired under this Contract, the Engineer may direct
the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or
improve their character and efficiency and to cease
operations under this Contract until such direction is
complied with. No claims shall be made against the
Owner for damages caused by any delay resulting from
such order.
-3-
2.03 Changes and Alterations. The Contractor agrees that
the Owner, through the Engineer, may make such changes
and alterations as the Owner may see fit in the line,
grade, form, dimensions, plans, or materials for the
work herein contemplated or any part thereof either
before or after the beginning of the construction
without affecting the validity of this Contract and
the accompanying bonds. If such changes or altera-
tions diminish the quantity of the work to be done,
they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for
damages or anticipated profits on the work that may be
dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work
and the increased work can fairly be classified under
the specifications, such increase shall be paid for
according to the quantity actually done and at the
unit price established for such work under this Con-
tract; otherwise such work shall be paid for as pro-
vided under Section 2.12 "Extra Work ". In the event
the Owner shall make such changes or alterations which
will make useless any work already done or material
already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner
shall compensate the Contractor for any materials or
labor so used, for any actual loss occasioned by such
change, and for the actual expenses incurred in prepa-
ration for the work as originally planned.
2.04 Damages. The right of general supervision by the
Owner shall not make the Contractor an agent of the
Owner, and the liability of the Contractor for all
damages to persons, firms, and corporations arising
from the Contractor's execution of the work shall not
be lessened because of such general supervision. The
Contractor is an independent contractor in regard to
work under this Contract, and as such is solely liable
for all damages to any persons, firms, corporations,
or their property as a result of the prosecution of
the work.
2.05 Losses from Natural Causes. All loss or damage aris-
ing out of the nature of the work to be done or from
the action of the elements or from any unforeseen cir-
cumstances in the prosecution of the work or from unu-
sual obstructions or difficulties which may be encoun-
tered in the prosecution of the work shall be sustain-
ed and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and
expense.
2.06 Laws and Ordinances. The Contractor shall at all
times observe and comply with all Federal, State, and
local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations which
-4-
in any manner affect the Contract or the work and
shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against
any claim arising from the violation of any such laws
and ordinances whether by the Contractor or his em-
ployees or his subcontractors and their employees.
2.07 Licenses, Permits and Certificates. Except as herein-
after stipulated, all licenses, permits, certificates,
etc. required for and in connection with the work to
be performed under the provisions of these Contract
Documents shall be secured by the Contractor at his
own expense. In the event a building permit is re-
quired such permit will be obtained by the Owner at no
cost to the Contractor.
2.08 Royalties and Patents. The Contractor shall protect
and save harmless the Owner from all and every demand
for damages, royalties, or fees on any patented inven-
tion used by him in connection with the work done or
material furnished under this Contract; provided, how-
ever, that if any patented material, machinery, appli-
ance, or invention is clearly specified in this Con-
tract, the cost of procuring the rights of use and the
legal release or indemnity shall be borne and paid by
the Owner direct unless such cost is determined and
directed to be included in the bid price at the time
the Proposal is submitted..
2.09 Keeping of Plans and Specificatidns Accessible. The
Engineer shall furnish the Contractor with three (3)
sets of executed Plans and Specifications without ex-
pense to him, and the Contractor shall keep one copy
of the same constantly accessible on the work, with
the latest revisions noted thereon.
2.10 Discrepancies and Omissions. It is further agreed
that it is the intent of this Contract that all work
must be done and all material must be furnished in ac-
cordance with the generally accepted practice, and in
the event of any discrepancies between the separate
contract documents, the priority of interpretation de-
fined under "Contract Documents" shall govern. In the
event that there is still any doubt as to the meaning
and intent of any portion of the Contract, Specifica-
tions or Drawings, the Engineer shall define which is
intended to apply to the work.
2.11 Contractor's Understanding. It is understood and
agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examina-
tion, satisfied himself as to the nature and location
-5-
of the work, the conformation of the ground, the char-
acter, quality and quantity of the materials to be en-
countered, the character of equipment and facilities
needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of
the work, the general and local conditions, and all
other matters which can in any way affect the work
under this Contract. No verbal agreement or conversa-
tion with any officer, agent, or employee of the Own-
er, either before or after the execution of this Con-
tract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or ob-
ligations herein contained.
2.12 Extra Work. The term "extra work" as used in this
Contract shall be understood to mean and include all
work that may be required by the Owner through the
Engineer to be done by the Contractor to accomplish
any change, alteration, or addition to the work shown
by the Plans or reasonably implied by the Specifica-
tions and not covered by the Contractor's Proposal,
except as provided in Section 2.03 - "Changes and
Alterations ".
It is agreed that the Contractor shall
perform all extra work under the direction of the
Engineer when presented with a written Change Order
signed by the Engineer.
No claim for extra work of any kind will
be allowed unless ordered in writing by the Engineer.
In case any orders or instructions, either oral or
written, appear to the Contractor to involve extra
work for which he should receive compensation, he
shall make a written request to the Engineer for a
written Change Order authorizing such extra work.
Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does
or does not constitute extra work or concerning the
payment therefor and the Engineer insists upon its
performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the
work after making a written request for a written
Change Order and shall keep an accurate account of the
"actual field cost" thereof as provided under Method
"C" below.
2.13 Payment for Extra Work. It is agreed that the compen-
sation to be paid the Contractor for performing extra
work shall be determined by one or more of the follow-
ing methods:
Method "A" - By agreed unit prices;
Method "B" - By agreed lump sum; or
Method "C" - If neither Method "A" or Method "B" can
be agreed upon before the extra work is
commenced, then the Contractor shall be
paid the "actual field cost" of the work
plus 15 %.
Where extra work is performed under Method "C ", the
term "actual field cost" of such extra work is hereby
defined to be and shall include: (a) the payroll cost
for all workmen, such as foreman, mechanics, crafts-
men, and laborers; (b) the cost of all materials and
supplies not furnished by the Owner; (c) rental for
all power- driven equipment at agreed -upon rates for
the time actually employed or used in the performance
of the extra work; (d) transportation charges neces-
sarily incurred in connection with any equipment
authorized by the Engineer for use on said extra work
and which is not already on the job; (e) all power,
fuel, lubricants, water, and similar operating expens-
es; (f) all incidental expenses incurred as a direct
result of such extra work including sales or use taxes .
on materials, payroll taxes, and the additional pre-
miums for construction bonds, workmen's compensation,
public liability and property damage, and other insur-
ance required by the Contract where the premiums
therefor are based on payroll and material costs. The
Engineer may direct the form in which accounts of the
"actual field costs" shall be kept and may also speci-
fy in writing before the work commences the method of
doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and
equipment to be used; otherwise these matters shall be
determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed
upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equip-
ment shall be incorporated in the written extra work
Change Order. The 15% of the "actual field cost" to
be paid the Contractor shall cover and compensate him
for his profit, overhead, and general superinten-
dence.
2.14 Assignment and Subletting. The Contractor shall not
assign or sublet the work or any part thereof without
the previous written consent of the Owner, nor shall
he assign, by power of attorney or otherwise, any of
the money payable under this Contract unless by and
with the consent of the Owner to be signified in like
manner. If the Contractor assigns all or any part of
any monies due or to become due under this Contract,
the instrument of assignment shall contain a clause
substantially to the effect that it is agreed that the
right of the assignee in and to any monies due or to
-7-
become due to the Contractor shall be subject to all
prior liens of all persons, firms, and corporations •
for services rendered or materials supplied for the
performance of the work called for in this Contract.
2.15 Subcontractors. The Contractor shall be as fully re-
sponsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of
his subcontractors and of persons either directly or
indirectly employed by them as he is for the acts and
omissions of persons directly employed by him. Should
any subcontractor fail to perform the work undertaken .
by him in a satisfactory manner, his subcontract shall
be immediately terminated by the Contractor upon writ-
ten notice from the Owner.
2.16 Owner's Status. Nothing contained in this Contract
shall create any contractual relation between any sub-
contractor and the Owner.
2.17 Completed Portions of Work. The Owner shall have the
right to take possession of and to use any completed
or partially completed portions of the work prior to
completion of the entire work, but such use shall not
constitute an acceptance of any of the work not com-
pleted in accordance with the Contract Documents. If
the Engineer determines that taking possession of and
using partially completed work substantially increases
the cost of or delays construction, the Contractor
shall be entitled to extra compensation or extension
of time or both as determined by the Engineer..
2.18 Materials. All materials furnished by the Contractor
shall be as required by the Plans and Specifications
or as otherwise stipulated. The Contractor shall not
start delivery of materials which he is to furnish
until the Engineer has approved the source of supply
of such materials.
2.19 Receiving and Storage of Materials. The Contractor
shall make arrangements for receiving and storing
materials. The Owner will not sign for or receive
shipments of materials consigned to the Contractor.
The Owner will not furnish storage space for materials
except where the written permission of the Engineer is
given.
2.20 "Or Equal" Clause. Whenever a material, product, or
article is specified or shown on the Plans by using
the name of the proprietary product or of a particular
manufacturer or vendor and is followed by the term "or
equal" the Contractor may submit a written request to
-8-
the Engineer requesting approval of the use of a
material, product, or article he feels is truly equal
to the one specified. The Engineer will evaluate the
request to determine if the material, product, or
article is of equal substance and function and if it
will perform identically the duties imposed by the
general design. Written approval of an "or equal"
material, product, or article must be obtained from
the Engineer before it may be incorporated into the
work as a substitute for that specified in the Con-
tract Documents.
2.21 Completed Work. The Contractor shall maintain contin-
uous adequate safeguards to protect all completed work
from damage, loss, or the intrusion of foreign ele-
ments.
2.22 Materials Furnished by the Owner. The Contractor
shall assume responsibility for and safeguard any and
all materials supplied by the Owner against loss or
injury. This provision shall extend to the taking of
all necessary sanitary precautions to avoid contamina-
tion of such materials that must be maintained and in-
corporated into the work in a sanitary condition..
2.23 Protection of Property. The Contractor shall give
reasonable notice to the owner or owners of public or
private property and utilities when such property is
liable to injury or damage through the performance of
the work, and he shall make all necessary arrangements
with such owner or owners relative to the removal and
replacement or protection of such property or utili-
ties.
The Contractor shall satisfactorily shore, support,
and protect any and all structures, and all pipes,
sewers, drains, conduits, and other facilities belong-
ing to the Owner, and he shall be responsible for any
damage resulting thereto. The Contractor shall not be
entitled to any damages or extra pay as a result of
any postponement, interference, or delay caused by any
such structures and facilities being on the line of
the work whether they are shown on the Plans or not.
2.24 Shelters for Workmen and Materials. The building or
structures for housing men or the erection of tents or
other forms of protection for workmen or materials
will be permitted only as the Engineer shall authorize
or direct. The sanitary conditions of the grounds in
or about such structures shall at all times be main-
tained in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
-9-
2.25 Sanitary Facilities. Necessary sanitary toilet facil-
ities for the use of all employees on the work shall
be of a type complying with State and local sanitary
regulations and shall be properly secluded from public
observation. These facilities shall be constructed
and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at
such points as shall be approved by the Engineer.
Their use shall be strictly enforced.
3. CONTRACTOR'S OBLIGATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
3.01 Labor, Equipment, Materials and Construction Plant.
The Contractor shall provide a 1 labor, tools, equip-
ment, machinery, supplies, and materials necessary for
the prosecution and completion of this Contract where
it is not specifically provided that the Owner shall
furnish them. The Owner shall not be held responsible
for the care, preservation, conservation, or protec-
tion of any material, tools, or machinery on any part
of the work until it is finally completed and accept-
ed. The Contractor shall maintain on the job at all
times sufficient labor, material, and equipment to
adequately prosecute the work.
3.02 Performance and Payment Bonds. It is further agreed
by the .Parties to this Contract that the Contractor
will execute separate performance and payment bonds,
each in the sum of 100% of the total Contract price in
standard forms for this purpose, guaranteeing faithful
performance of the work and the fulfillment of any
guarantees required and further guaranteeing payment
to all persons supplying labor and materials or fur-
nishing him any equipment in the execution of the Con-
tract. It is agreed that the Contract shall not be in
effect until such performance and payment bonds are
furnished and approved by the Owner. The cost of the
premium for the performance and payment bonds shall be
included in the price bid by the Contractor for the
work under this Contract, and no extra payment for
such bonds will be made by the Owner.
The surety company or companies underwriting the per-
formance and payment bonds shall be acceptable accord-
ing to the latest list of companies holding certifi-
cates of authority from the Secretary of the Treasury
of the United States, shall be duly authorized to act
under the laws of the State of Texas as Surety, and
shall be approved by the Owner.
-10--
3.03 Contractor's Ability to Perform. Upon request by the
Owner the Contractor shall furnish sufficient evidence
of his ability to perform the work which is outlined
in this document. This shall include an equipment in-
ventory and records showing the satisfactory comple-
tion of projects of equal magnitude in the past. It
shall be the prerogative of the Owner to terminate the
Contract as outlined in Section 7 "Termination of Con-
tract", if job progress indicates that the Contractor
lacks either appropriate experience or ability.
3.04 Superintendence and Inspection. The Contractor shall
give personal attention to the faithful prosecution
and completion of the Contract and shall keep a compe-
tent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all
of whom are satisfactory to the Engineer, on the work
continuously during its progress. The superintendent
shall represent the Contractor in his absence, and all
directions given to him by the Owner's representative
shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.
In the event that the Contractor and the superinten-
dent are both absent from the site of the work for
prolonged periods of time the Engineer may order any
or all work under this Contract to be stopped until
the Contractor provides continuous and proper supervi-
sion of the work. Such stoppage shall not constitute
a basis for any claim against the Owner for damages
caused by delay for such work stoppages.
3.05 Character of Employees. The Contractor agrees.to em-
ploy only orderly, competent, and skillful persons to
do the work, and whenever the Engineer shall inform
him that the work being accomplished is of sub -stan-
dard character by reason of carelessness, incompe-
tence, or inexperience on the part of the workers the
installation of such work shall be immediately sus-
pended and shall not be resumed until the Engineer is
satisfied that the conditions causing such faulty work
have been corrected.
3.06 Contractor's Duty to Protect Persons and Property. In
the performance of this Contract, the Contractor shall
protect the public and the Owner fully by taking rea-
sonable precaution to safeguard persons from death or
bodily injury and to safeguard property of any nature
whatsoever from damage. Where any dangerous condition
or nuisance exists in and around construction sites,
equipment and supply storage areas, and other areas in
anyway connected with the performance of this Con-
tract, the Contractor shall not create excavations
obstructions, or any dangerous condition or nuisance
of any nature whatsoever in connection with the per-
formance of this Contract unless necessary to its per-
formance, and in that event the Contractor shall pro-
vide and maintain at all times reasonable means of
warning of any danger or nuisance created. The duties
of the Contractor in this paragraph shall be nondeleg-
able, and the Contractor's compliance with the speci-
fic recommendations and requirements of the Owner as
to the means of warning shall not excuse the Contrac-
tor from the faithful performance of these duties
should such recommendations and requirements not be •
adequate or reasonable under the circumstances.
3.07 Safety Codes. The Contractor shall comply with all
applicable provisions of any Federal, State, and Muni-
cipal safety laws and building and construction codes.
All machinery, equipment, and other physical hazards
shall be guarded in accordance with the latest edition
of the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction"
of the Associated General Contractors of America ex-
cept where incompatible with Federal, State, or Muni-
cipal laws or regulations.
3.08 Barricades. When barricades are used to satisfy
safety requirements, such barricades shall be properly
identified with the Contractor's name prominently
stenciled on both sides of the barricades with letters
at least 2 inches high.
3.09 Minimum Wages. All employees directly employed on the
work shall be paid not less than the established pre-
vailing wage scale for work of a similar character in
this locality. A scale of prevailing wages is includ-
ed in the Special Conditions of these Contract Docu-
ments. The Contractor shall pay not less than the
general prevailing wages shown on said scale and shall
keep accurate wages records accessible in accordance
with Article 5159 of the Revised Civil Statutes of
Texas.
3.10 Unsuitable Work or Materials. It is understood and
agreed that if the work or any part thereof or any
material furnished by the Contractor for use in the
work or selected for the same shall be deemed by the
Engineer as unsuitable or not in conformity with the
specifications, the Contractor shall, after receipt of
written notice thereof from the Contracting Officer,
-12-
forthwith remove such material and replace, rebuild,
or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in
full accordance with this Contract.
Should the Contractor fail to initiate compliance with
the above provision within 72 hours or should he fail
to properly prosecute and complete correction of such
faulty work, the Engineer may direct that the work be
done by others and that the cost of the work be de-
ducted from monies due the Contractor.
3.11 No Waiver of Contractor's Obligations. The Engineer,
supervisor, or inspector shall have no power to waive
the obligations of this Contract for the furnishing by
the Contractor of good material and of his performing
good work as herein described and in full accordance
with the plans and specifications. No failure or
omission of the Engineer, supervisor, or inspector to
condemn any defective work or material shall release
the Contractor from the obligation to at once tear
out, remove, and properly replace the same at any time
prior to final acceptance upon the discovery of said
defective work or material; provided, however that the
Engineer, supervisor, or inspector shall upon request
of the Contractor inspect and accept or reject any
material furnished, and once the material has been ac-
cepted by the Engineer, supervisor, or inspector such
acceptance shall be binding on the Owner unless it can
be clearly shown that such material furnished was not
as represented and does not meet the specifications
for the work. Any questioned work may be ordered
taken up or removed for re- examination by the Engineer
prior to final acceptance, and if found not in accor-
dance with the specifications for said work, all ex-
pense of removing, re- examination, and replacement
shall be borne by the Contractor; otherwise the ex-
pense thus incurred shall be allowed as "Extra Work"
and shall be paid for by the Owner.
3.12 Site Clean Up. The Contractor shall not allow the
site of the work to become littered with trash and
waste material, but shall maintain the site in a neat
and orderly condition throughout the construction per-
iod. The Engineer shall have the right to determine
what is waste material or rubbish and the manner and
place of disposal. On or before the completion of the
work the Contractor shall, without charge therefor,
carefully clean out all pits, pipes, chambers, or con-
duits, shall tear down and remove all temporary struc-
tures built by him, shall remove all rubbish of every
-13-
�
V
'1
1
,
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
kind from the tracts or grounds which he has occupied,
and shall leave them in a condition satisfactory to
the Engineer.
3.13 Guarantee. During a period of 12 months from and
after the date of the final acceptance by the Owner of
the work embraced by this Contract, the Contractor
shall make all needed repairs arising out of defective
workmanship or materials, or both, which in the judg-
ment of the Owner shall become necessary during such
period. If within 10 days after the mailing of a
notice in writing to the Contractor or his agent the
said Contractor shall neglect to make or to undertake
with due diligence the aforesaid repairs, the Owner is
hereby authorized to make such repairs at the Contrac-
tor's expense; provided, however, that in case of an
emergency where, in the judgment of the Owner, delay
would cause serious loss or damage, repairs may be
made without notice being sent to the Contractor, and
the Contractor shall pay the cost thereof.
4. OWNER'S OBLIGATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
4.01 Lines and Grades. All necessary lines and grades
shall be furnished by the Engineer. Whenever neces-
sary, work shall be suspended to permit performance of
this work, but such suspension will be as brief as
practicable, and the Contractor shall be allowed no
extra compensation therefor. The Contractor shall
give the Engineer ample notice of the time and place
where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes,
marks, etc. shall be carefully preserved by the Con-
tractor, and in case of careless destruction or remov-
al by him or his employees such stakes, marks, etc.
shall be replaced by the Engineer at the Contractor's
expense.
4.02 Right of Entry. The Owner reserves the right for its
personnel or its agents to enter the property or loca-
tion on which the work herein contracted are being
constructed or installed for the purpose of supervis-
ing and inspecting the work or for the purpose of con-
structing or installing such collateral work as the
Owner may desire.
4.03 Owner's Inspectors. It is agreed by the Contractor
that the Owner shall appoint such Engineer, supervi-
sors, or inspectors as the said Owner may deem neces-
sary to inspect the material furnished and the work
-14-
kind from the tracts or grounds which he has occupied,
and shall leave them in a condition satisfactory to
the Engineer.
3.13 Guarantee. During a period of 12 months from and
after the date of the final acceptance-by the Owner of
the work embraced by this Contract, the Contractor
shall make all needed repairs arising out of defective
workmanship or materials, or both, which in the judg-
ment of the Owner shall become necessary during such
period. If within 10 days after the mailing of a
notice in writing to the Contractor or his agent the
said Contractor shall neglect to make or to undertake
with due diligence the aforesaid repairs, the Owner is
hereby authorized to make such repairs at the Contrac-
tor's expense; provided, however, that in case of an
emergency where, in the judgment of the-owner, delay
would cause serious loss or damage, repairs may be
made without notice being sent to the Contractor, and
the Contractor shall pay the cost thereof.
4. OWNER'S OBLIGATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
4.01 Lines and Grades. All necessary lines and grades
shall be furnished by the Engineer. Whenever neces-
sary, work shall be suspended to permit performance of
this work, but such suspension will be as brief as
practicable, and the Contractor shall be allowed no
extra compensation therefor. The Contractor shall
give the Engineer ample notice of the time and place
where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes,
marks, etc. shall be carefully preserved by the Con-
tractor, and in case of careless destruction or remov-
al by him or his employees such stakes, marks, etc.
shall be replaced by the Engineer at the Contractor's
expense.
4.02 Right of Entry. The Owner reserves the right for its
personnel or its agents to enter the property or loca-
tion on which the work herein contracted are being
constructed or installed for the purpose of supervis-
ing and inspecting the work or for the purpose of con-
structing or installing such collateral work as the
Owner may desire.
4.03 Owner's Inspectors. It is agreed by the Contractor
that the Owner shall appoint such Engineer, supervi-
sors, or inspectors as the said Owner may deem neces-
sary to inspect the material furnished and the work
-14--
done under this Contract, to see that the said mater-
ial is furnished, and to see that said work is done in
accordance with the plans and specifications therefor.
The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and
assistance required by the Engineer, supervisors, or
inspectors for the proper inspection and examination
of the work and all parts thereof. The Contractor
shall regard and comply with the directions and in-
structions of the Engineer, supervisors, or inspectors
so appointed when such directions and instructions are
consistent with the obligations of this Contract.
4.04 Collateral Work. The Owner reserves the right to pro-
vide all labor and material essential to the comple-
tion of work that is not included in this Contract
either by a separate contract or otherwise. Any col-
lateral work shall be prosecuted in such a manner that
it will not damage the Contractor nor delay the pro-
gress of the work being accomplished under this Con-
tract. The respective rights of and operations of the
various interests involved shall be established and
coordinated by the Engineer.
4.05 Right -of -Way. Easements across private property and
lands needed for construction under this Contract will
be provided by the Owner.
4.06 Adequacy of Design. It is agreed that the Owner shall
be responsible for the adequacy of the design, suffi-
ciency of the Contract Documents, the safety of the
structure and practicability of the operations of the
completed project; provided the Contractor has com-
plied with the requirements of the said Contract Docu-
ments, all approved modifications thereof, and addi-
tions and alterations thereto approved in writing by
the Owner. The burden of proof of such compliance
shall be upon the Contractor to show that he has com-
plied with the said requirements of the Contract Docu-
ments, approved modifications thereof and all approved
additions and alterations thereto.
5. SCHEDULING AND PROGRESS OF WORK
5.01 Order and Prosecution of the Work. It is the meaning
and intent of this Contract, unless otherwise herein
specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be
allowed to prosecute his work at such times and sea-
sons in such order of precedence and in such manner as
shall be most conducive to economy of construction;
-15-
provided however, that the order and time of prosecu-
tion shall be such that the work shall be substantial-
ly completed as a whole or in part in accordance with
this Contract within the time of completion hereafter
designated; provided also that the Engineer may direct
the time and manner of constructing any part or parts
of the work when in his opinion such should be given
priority to lessen the probability of danger to the
public or to anticipate seasonal hazards from the ele-
ments or to coordinate with other work being done for
or by the Owner.
5.02 Rate of Progress. The Contractor shall give the Engi-
neer full information in advance as to his plans for
carrying on any part of the work. If at any time
prior to the start or during the progress of the work
any part of the Contractor's plant or equipment or any
of his methods of executing the work appear to the
Engineer to be unsafe, inefficient, or inadequate to
insure the required quality or rate of progress of the
work, the Engineer may order the Contractor to in-
crease or improve his facilities or methods, and the
Contractor shall promptly comply with such orders; but
neither compliance with such orders nor failure of the
Engineer to issue such orders shall relieve the Con-
tractor from his obligation to secure the degree of
safety, the quality of work, and the rate of progress
required by this Contractor. The Contractor alone
shall be responsible for the safety, adequacy, and
efficiency of his plant, equipment, and methods.
5.03 Sunday, Holiday, and Night Work. Except in connection
with the care, maintenance, or protection of equipment
or of work already done, no work shall be done between
the hours of 6:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. or on Sundays or
legal holidays without written consent of the Engi-
neer.
5.04 Hindrances and Delays. No claims shall be made by the
Contractor for damages, hindrances, or delays from any
cause during the progress of any portion of the work
embraced by this Contract except where the work is
stopped by order of the Owner. If the Owner stops the
work for just cause because the Contractor is not com-
plying with the plans and specifications or the intent
thereof, the Contractor shall have no claim for dam-
ages, hindrances, or delays. However, if the Owner
stops the work for any other reason, the Contractor
shall be entitled to reimbursement paid by the Owner
for such expenses actually incurred which in the judg-
ment of the Engineer occurred as a result of the work
stoppage.
-16-
Should delays repeatedly occur due to the Contractor's
failure to provide adequate plant, equipment, or per-
sonnel, or where the Engineer determines that unrea-
sonable inconvenience to the public is due to such
failure, the Contractor's operations shall be suspend-
ed until he shall have provided adequate plant, equip-
ment, and personnel to properly resume and continually
prosecute the work.
5.05 Extensions of Time. Should the Contractor be delayed
in the final completion of the work by any act or neg-
lect of the Owner or Engineer, or of any employee of
either, or by any other contractor employed by the
Owner, or by strikes, fire or other cause or causes
outside of and beyond the control of the Contractor
and which the Engineer determines could have been
neither anticipated nor avoided, then an extension of
time sufficient to compensate for the delay as deter-
mined by the Engineer shall be granted by the Owner;
provided, however, that the Contractor shall give the
Owner prompt notice in writing of the cause of delay
in each case. Extensions of time will not be granted
for delays caused by unfavorable weather, unsuitable
ground conditions or inadequate construction force.
5.06 Liquidated Damages for Failure to Complete on Time.
The Contractor agrees that time is of the essence of
this Contract and that the definite value of damages
which would result from delay would be incapable of
ascertainment and uncertain, so that for each day of
delay beyond the number of days herein agreed upon for
the completion of the work herein specified and con-
tracted for, after due allowance for such extension of
time as is provided for under the provisions of the
preceding paragraph, the Owner may withhold permanent-
ly from the Contractor's total compensation, not as a
penalty but as liquidated damages, the sum per day
given in the following schedule:
Amount of Liquidated
Amount of Contract Damages Per Day
Less than $ 5,000.00
$ 5,001.00 to $ 15,000.00
15,001.00 to 25,000.00
25,001.00 to 50,000.00
50,001.00 to 100,000.00
100,001.00 to 500,000.00
500,001.00 to 1,000,000.00
1,000,001.00 to 2,000,000.00
2,000,001.00 to 5,000,000.00
-17-
$ 30.00
35.00
40.00
50.00
70.00
200.00
300.00
400.00
500.00
6. INDEMNITY
6.01 Contractor's Indemnity Provision. To protect the
Owner from the Contractor's failure to perform any of
the foregoing duties or any of the terms of this Con-
tract, the Contractor shall indemnity and save harm-
less the Owner and the Owner's agents and employees
from all losses, damages, judgments, decrees, and ex-
penses or costs of any nature whatsoever arising out
of or in anyway connected with any claims or actions
at law or in equity brought against the Owner and the
Owner's agents and employees for the death or injury
to persons or for damage to property caused, or alleg-
edly caused, by any willful acts, negligence, nui-
sance, or breach of any term or condition of this Con-
tract by the Contractor, his agents, servants, subcon-
tractors, or employees. The Contractor shall further-
more indemnify and save harmless the Owner and the
Owner's agents and employees from all demands of sub-
contractors, workers, material persons, or suppliers
of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power
tools, and supplies incurred in connection with work
to be performed under this Contract. Property of any
description, including property of the Owner, which
shall be damaged in the performance of this Contract
by the Contractor, his agents, employees, subcontrac-
tors or their employees and subcontractors shall be
restored to its condition prior to damage by the Con-
tractor at the Contractor's expense.
6.02 Workmen's Compensation Insurance. The Contractor
agrees to comply with the Workmen's Compensation Act
of the State of Texas, and to pay or cause to be paid
all compensation, medical or other benefits, which may
become due or payable thereunder, and to protect and
indemnify the Owner and the Owner's agents and employ-
ees from and against any and all liabilities by reason
of accidental injury, disease or death sustained by
subcontractor's employees. The Contractor shall fur-
nish the Owner with a certificate from the Industrial
Accident Board evidencing the Contractor's and subcon-
tractors' compliance with said statute.
6.03 Comprehensive General Liability Insurance. The Con-
tractor shall provide and maintain during the life of
this Contract and until all work under said Contract
has been completed and accepted by the Owner, a Com-
prehensive General Liability insurance policy, said
policy and the issuing carrier approved by the Owner,
which specifically insures the contractual liability
-18-
of the Contractor assumed under Paragraph 6.01 above
entitled "Contractor's Indemnity Provision ". The lia-
bility coverage under this policy shall cover Indepen-
dent Contractors. Liability limits for the Comprehen-
sive General Liability insurance coverage under this
policy shall not be less than the following:
Bodily Injury $100,000 each person
$300,000 each accident
Property Damage $ 25,000 each accident
$ 50,000 aggregate
6.04 Owner's Protective Insurance. The Contractor shall
provide and maintain during the life of this Contract
and until all work under said Contract has been com-
pleted and accepted by the Owner, an Owner's and Con-
tractor's Protective Policy which co- insures the Owner
and the Owner's agents and employees with the same
Comprehensive General Liability coverage as described
in 6.03 above entitled "Comprehensive General Liabil-
ity Insurance ".
6.05 Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance. The
Contractor shall provide and maintain during the life
of this Contract and until all work under said Con-
tract has been completed and accepted by the Owner, a
Comprehensive Automobile Liability insurance policy,
said policy and issuing carrier approved by the Owner,
covering the operation on or off the site of the work
of all motor vehicles licensed for highway use, whe-
ther they are owned, non - owned, or hired by the Con-
tractor, in which shall specifically insure contrac-
tual liability of the Contractor assumed under the
above Paragraph 6.01 entitled "Contractor's Indemnity
Provision ". The liability limits for the Comprehen-
sive Automobile Liability insurance coverage shall not
be less than the following:
Bodily Injury $100,000 each person
$300,000 each accident
Property Damage $ 50,000 each accident
6.06 Insurance Certificate. In connection with the insur-
ance coverage set out in sections 6.02, 6.03, 6.04,
and 6.05 above, the Contractor shall furnish the Owner
with a certificate verifying said insurance. Said
certificate shall state that the owner shall be given
10 days advance written notice before any provisions
-19-
of the policies are changed or in the event said poli-
cies shall be cancelled. This Certificate of Insur-
ance shall be provided to the Owner prior to starting
any construction work in connection with this Con-
tract.
7. TERMINATION OF CONTRACT
7.01 Right of Owner to Terminate. If the Contractor should
be guilty of substantial violation of the Contract or
any provision thereof, the Owner, upon certification
by the Engineer as to the nature and extent of such
violation, may without prejudice to any other resourc-
es or remedy give the Contractor written notice of
termination of the employment of the Contractor 10
days subsequent to such notice. Immediately following
such date the Owner may take possession of the site of
the work and all material, equipment, tools, and ap-
pliances thereon and may finish the work in accordance
with the provisions of Section 8 "Abandonment of Con-
tract by Contractor ", of these General Conditions.
7.02 Right of Contractor to Terminate. If work should be
stopped by order of any public authority or court
through act or fault of the Contractor for a period
of three (3) months or if the Owner should substan-
tially fail to perform the provisions of the Contract
with regard to Owner's obligations to the Contractor,
then the Contractor may, upon 10 days written notice
to the Owner, terminate this Contract and recover from
the Owner payment for all completed work.
7.03 Removal of Equipment. In the event that the Contract
should be terminated for any reason whatsoever, the
Owner may request the Contractor in writing to remove
any or all of his equipment, tools, and supplies, and
the Contractor shall comply with the request within 10
days after receipt of the notice. Should he fail to
do so within 10 days after receipt of such notice, the
Owner shall have the right to remove such equipment
and supplies at the expense of the Contractor and to
place such equipment, tools and supplies in storage at
the risk and expense of the Contractor.
8. ABANDONMENT OF CONTRACT BY CONTRACTOR
8.01 Notification of Contractor. If the Contractor should
abandon and fail to refuse to resume work within 10
-20-
days after written notification from the Owner or the
Engineer or if the Contractor fails to comply with the
orders of the Engineer when such orders are consistent
with this Contract or with the specifications hereto
attached, then the Contractor shall be deemed as hav-
ing abandoned the Contract. In such event the Surety
on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed
to complete the work, and a copy of said notice shall
be delivered to the Contractor.
8.02 Retention of Contractor's Equipment and Materials by
Owner. After receiving said notice of abandonment the
Contractor shall not remove from the work any machin-
ery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies then on
the job, but the same together with any materials and
equipment under contract for the work may be held for
use on the work .by the Owner or the Surety on the per-
formance bond or another contractor in completion of
the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any
rental or credit therefor except when used in connec-
tion with extra work where credit shall be allowed as
provided for under Section 2.12 entitled "Extra- Work ",
it being understood that the use of such equipment and
materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete
the work and will be reflected in the final settle-
ment.
8.03 Methods of Completing the Work. If the Surety should
fail to commence compliance with the notice for com-
pletion hereinbefore provided within 10 days after
service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for
completion of the work in either of the following
elective manners:
a. The Owner may thereupon employ such force of work-
ers and use such machinery, equipment, tools, mat-
erials, and supplies as said Owner may deem 'neces-
sary to complete the work and charge the expense
of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, mater-
ials, and supplies to said Contractor, and the ex-
pense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the
Owner out of such monies as may be due or that may
thereafter at any time become due to the Contrac-
tor under and by virtue of this Contract. In case
such expense is less than the sum which would have
been payable under this Contract if the same had
been completed by the Contractor, then said Con-
tractor shall receive the difference. In case
such expense is greater than the sum which would
have been payable under this Contract if the same
-21-
had been completed by said Contractor, then the
Contractor or his Surety shall pay the amount of
such excess to the Owner.
b. The Owner under sealed bids, after 14 days notice
published two or more times in a newspaper having
a general circulation in the county of location of
the work, may let the contract for the completion
of the work under substantially the same terms and
conditions which are provided in this Contract.
In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under
the new contract as compared to what would have
been the cost under this Contract such increase
shall be charged to the Contractor, and the Surety
shall be and remain bound therefor. However,
should the cost to complete any such new contract
prove to be less than what would have been the
cost to complete under this Contract, the Contrac-
tor or his Surety shall be credited therewith.
8.04 Final Acceptance. When the work has been completed
the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and
a Contract Completion Certificate as hereinafter pro-
vided shall be issued. A complete itemized statement
of the Contract accounts certified by the Engineer as
being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to
the Contractor and his Surety, whereupon the Contrac-
tor, his Surety or the Owner, as the case may be,
shall pay the balance due as reflected by said state-
ment within 15 days after the date of such Contract
Completion Certificate.
8.05 Disposition of Contractor's Equipment. In the event
the statement of accounts shows that the cost to com-
plete the work is less than that which would have been
the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by
the Contractor under the terms of this Contract or
when the Contractor or his Surety pay the balance
shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machin-
ery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies left on
the site of the work shall be turned over to the Con-
tractor or his Surety. Should the cost to complete
the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor
or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner
within the time designated hereinabove, and there re-
mains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials,'or
supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof to-
gether with an itemized list of such equipment and
materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his
Surety at the respective addresses designated in this
-22-
1
Contract; provided, however, that actual. written
1 notice given in any manner will satisfy this condi-
tion. After mailing or other giving of such notice
such property shall be held by the Owner at the risk
of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the
duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect
such property. After 15 days from the date of said
' notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment,
tools, materials, or supplies and apply the net sum
derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor
' and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either pub-
lic or private sale, with or without notice, as the
Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machin-
ery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which
remain on the work and belong to persons other than
the Contractor or his Surety to 'their proper owners.
1 9. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
9.01 Character of Measurements. No extra or customary
measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the
actual length, area, solid contents, number, and
weight only shall be considered unless otherwise spe-
cifically provided.
9.02 Estimated vs. Actual Quantities. Any and all estimat-
' ed quantities stipulated in the proposal form under
unit price items are approximate and are to be used
only (a) as a basis for estimating the probable cost
of the work and (b) for the purpose of comparing the
proposals submitted for the work. It is understood
and agreed that the actual amounts of work done and
' materials furnished under unit price items may differ
from such estimated quantities and that the basis of
payment for such work and materials shall be for the
actual amount of such work done and the actual quan-
tity of materials furnished.
The Contractor agrees that he will make no claim for
damages, anticipated profits, or otherwise on account
of any difference between the amounts of work actually
performed and materials actually furnished and the
' amounts estimated therefor in the proposal or other
Contract Documents; provided, however, that if the
actual quantity of any item should become as much as
25 percent more than or 25 percent less than the esti-
mated or contemplated quantity for such items, then
either party to this Contract shall be entitled upon
demand to a revised consideration on the portion of
-23-
the work above or below 25 percent of the estimated
quantity prior to initiating work or furnishing mater-
ials for the overrun or underrun quantities. Such re-
vised consideration shall be determined by agreement
between the parties or otherwise by the terms of this
Contract as.provided under Section 2.12 entitled
"Extra Work ".
9.03 Payment. In consideration of the furnishing of all
the necessary labor, equipment, and material and the
completion of all work by the Contractor, and On the
completion of all work and the delivery of all mater-
ial embraced in this Contract in full conformity with
the specifications and stipulations contained herein,
the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the amounts set
forth in the Proposal attached hereto which has been
made a part of this Contract. The Contractor hereby
agrees to receive such amounts in full payment for
furnishing all material and all labor required for the
aforesaid work, for all expense incurred by him, and
for well and truly performing the same and the whole
thereof in the manner and according to this Contract,
the attached specifications, and requirements of the
Engineer.
9.04 Monthly Estimates and Payments. On or about the fifth
day of each month the Engineer will make an approxi-
mate estimate of the value of work done in conformity
with the plans and specifications during the previous
calendar month. The Contractor shall furnish to the
Engineer such detailed information as he may request
to aid him as a guide in the preparation of monthly
estimates. After each such estimate shall have been
approved by the Owner, the Owner shall pay to the Con-
tractor 90 percent of the amount of such estimated sum
on or before the 15th day of said month.
It is understood, however, that in case the whole work
is near to completion and some unexpected or unusual
delay occurs due to no fault or neglect on the part of
the Contractor, the Owner may, upon written recommen-
dation of the Engineer, pay a reasonable and equitable •
portion of the retained percentage to the Contractor.
9.05 Certificates of Completion. Within 10 days after the
Contractor has given the Engineer notice that the work
has been completed the Engineer shall inspect the work
and satisfy himself by examination and test that the
work has been finally and fully completed in accor-
dance with the plans, specifications and Contract. If
-24-
so, the Engineer shall issue a Contract Completion
Certificate to the Owner and the Contractor. Such
certificate when issued shall constitute final accep-
tance of the work covered under this Contract.
9.06 Final Estimate and Payment. After the Contract Com-
pletion Certificate has been issued the Engineer shall
proceed to make final measurements and to prepare a
final estimate of the work done and materials furnish-
ed under this Contract and the value thereof. The
Engineer shall certify the Final Estimate and submit
it to the Owner within five (5) days from the date of
the Contract Completion Certificate.
The Owner shall pay the Contractor within 15 days from
the date of the Contract Completion Certificate the
entire sum shown due on the. certified Final Estimate
prepared by the Engineer after deducting all amounts
to be kept and retained under any provision of this
Contract. However, it is to be specifically under-
stood that the final payment will not be paid by the
Owner to the Contractor under any circumstances until
the Notarized Affidavit required by Section 9.07 en-
titled "Notarized Affidavit ", has been submitted to
the Engineer.
All prior estimates and payments shall be subject to
correction in the final estimate and payment; but in
the absence of error or manifest mistake, it is agreed
that all estimates, when approved by the Owner, shall
be conclusive evidence of the work done and materials
furnished.
9.07 Notarized Affidavit. Before final payment for the
work by the Owner the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer a notarized affidavit in duplicate stating
under oath that all subcontractors, vendors, and other
persons or firms who have furnished or performed labor
or furnished materials for the work have been fully
paid or satisfactorily secured. Such affidavit shall
bear or be accompanied by a statement, signed by the
Surety Company who provided the performance bond for
the work, to the effect that said Surety Company con-
sents to final payment to the Contractor being made by
the Owner.
9.08 Release of Liability. The acceptance by the Contrac-
tor of the last payment shall operate as and shall be
a release to the Owner and every officer and agent
thereof from all claims and liability hereunder for
anything done or furnished for or relating to the work
or for any act or neglect of the Owner or of any per-
son relating to or affecting the work.
-25-
9.09 Contractor's Obligation. Neither the Contract Comple-
tion Certificate nor the final payment nor any provi-
sion in the Contract Documents shall relieve the Con-
tractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any war-
ranty which may be required in the Contract Docu-
ments.
9.10 Payments Withheld. The Owner may, on account of sub-
sequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the
whole or part of any payment to such extent as may be
necessary to protect himself from loss on account of:
a. Defective work not remedied.
b. Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating
probable filing of claims.
c. Failure of the Contractor to make payments proper-
ly to subcontractors or for material or labor.
d. Damage to another contractor.
When the above grounds are removed or the Contractor
provides a Surety Bond satisfactory to the Owner,
which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld,
payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of
them.
-26-
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT
SECTION 01 - INFORMATION
01 -01 ENGINEER
The word "Engineer" in these Specifications
shall be understood as referring to Haynie &
Kallman, Inc., 2115 N. Mays, Round Rock, Texas
78664. Engineer of the Owner, or the Engineer's
authorized representative, supervisor or inspec-
tor to act in any particular position for the
Owner.
01 -02 COPIES OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FURNISHED
The Agreement will be prepared in not less than
five (5) counterparts (original signed) sets.
Owner will furnish Contractor three (3) sets of
conforming Contract Documents, Technical Speci-
fications and Plans free of charge, and addi-
tional sets will be obtained from Engineer at
commercial reproduction rates plus 15% for
handling.
01 -03 GOVERNING CODES
All construction as provided for under these
Plans and Specifications shall be governed by
any existing Resolutions, Codes and Ordinances,
and any subsequent amendments or revisions
thereto as set forth by the Owner.
01 -04 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO COMPLETE ON
TIME
01 -06 OWNER
Refer to the General Conditions of Agreement,
Section 5.06, Page 17 for description.
01 -05 TIME OF COMPLETION
The work shall be completed within the number of
calendar days stated in the Proposal. The time
shall begin from the date of the Agreement, or
the date of the Notice to Proceed, whichever is
latest.
The Owner shall be the party of parties named in
the Notice to Contractor.
S -1
01 -07 LOCATION
The location of work shall be as mentioned in
the Notice to Contractor and as indicated on the
Plans.
SECTION 02 - SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
02 -01 CROSSING UTILITIES
Prior to commencing construction, it shall be
the Contractor's responsibility to make arrange-
ments with the Owners of such utility companies
to uncover their particular utility lines or
otherwise confirm their location. Certain util-
ity companies perform such services at their own
expense, however, where such is not the case,
the Contractor will cause such work to be done
at his own expense.
02 -02 "AS- BUILT" DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall mark all changes and revi-
sions on all of his copies of the working draw-
ings. Upon completion of the Project and prior
to final acceptance and payment, the Contractor
shall deliver this correctly marked set of draw-
ings to the Engineer.
02 -03 LANDS FOR WORK
Owner provides, as indicated on Drawings, land
upon which work is to be done, rights -of -way for
access to same and such other lands which are
designated for use of Contractor. Contractor
provides, at his expense and without liability
of Owner, any additional land and access thereto
that may be required for his construction opera-
tions, temporary construction facilities, or for
storage of materials.
02 -04 UTILITY SERVICES FOR CONSTRUCTION
The Contractor will be responsible for providing
his own utility services during construction.
No additional payment will be made for this
item.
s -2
02 - GUARANTEES
Guarantee work, including equipment installed,
to be free from defects due to faulty workman-
ship or materials for a period of one year from
date of acceptance by•City Council of Final
Estimate. Upon notice from Owner, repair de-
fects in all construction which develop during
specified period at no cost to Owner. Neither
final acceptance nor final payment nor any pro-
vision in Contract Documents relieves Contractor
of above guarantee. Notice of observed defects
will be given with reasonable promptness. Fail-
ure to repair or replace defect upon notice en-
titles Owner to repair or replace same and reco-
ver reasonable cost thereof from Contractor.
02 -06 DEVIATIONS OCCASIONED BY UTILITY STRUCTURES
Whenever existing utilities, not indicated on
Plans, present obstructions to grade and align-
ment of pipe, immediately notify Engineer, who
without delay, will determine whenever existing
improvements are to be relocated, or grade and
alignment of pipe changed. Where necessary to
move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, or
other obstructions, make arrangements with
Owners of utilities. Owner will not be liable
for damages on account of delays due to changes
made by Owners of privately owned utilities
which hinder progress of work.
02 -07 MINIMUM WAGE SCALE
Wage rates paid for highway -heavy construction
and paving and utilities incidental to general
building construction in Zone 8 which includes
Williamson County, Texas, in accordance with the
latest revisions thereof.
02 -08 LIMIT OF FINANCIAL RESOURCES
The City of Round Rock has a limited amount of
financial resources committed to this Project;
therefore, it shall be understood by all bidders
that the Owner may be required to change and /or
delete any items which he may feel is necessary
to accomplish all or part of the scope of work
within its limit of financial resources.
S -3
{
�
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Contractor shall be entitled to no claim for
damages for anticipated profits on any portion
of work that may be omitted. At any time during
the duration of this contract, the Owner reserv-
es the right to omit any work from this con-
tract. Unit prices for all items previously
approved in this contract shall be used to
delete or add work per change order.
02 -09 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION
The Owner shall provide an inspector to review
the quality of materials and workmanship.
02 -10 LIMITS OF WORK AND PAYMENT
It shall be the obligation of the contractor to
complete all work included in this contract, so
authorized by the Owner, as shown on the draw-
ings or described in the contract documents and
technical specifications. All items of con-
struction not specifically paid for in the bid
schedule shall be included in the unit price
bids. Any question arising as to the limits of
work shall be left up to the interpretation of
the Engineer.
02 -11 EXCERPTS FROM TEXAS WATER CODE
The following excerpts from the Texas Water Code
are hereby made a part of this contract. In the
event there are any conflicts between these re-
quirements and requirements of these Specifica-
tions, these excerpts will govern.
Construction Contract Requirements:
The governing body of each political subdivision
receiving financial assistance from the board
shall require in all contracts for the construc-
tion of a project:
(1) that payment be made in partial payments as
the work progresses;
(2) that each partial payment shall not exceed
90 percent of the amount due at the time of
the payment as shown by the Engineer of the
project; and
(3) that payment of the 10 percent remaining
due upon completion of the contract shall
be made only after:
S -4
(A) approval by the Engineer for the poli-
tical subdivision as required under
the bond proceedings; and
(B) certification by the board that the
work to be done under the contract has
been completed and performed in a sat-
isfactory manner and in accordance
with sound engineering principles and
practices.
Filing Construction Contract:
The political subdivision shall file with the
department a certified copy of each construction
contract it enters into for the construction of
all or part of a project. Each contract shall
contain or have attached to it the specifica-
tions, plans and details of all work included in
the contract.
Inspection of Projects:
(a) The department may inspect the construction
of a project at any time to assure that:
(1) the contractor is substantially com-
plying with the engineering plans of
the project as submitted when approval
of the feasibility of the project was
sought; and
(2) the contractor is constructing the
project in accordance with sound engi-
neering principles.
(b) Inspection of a project by the department
does not subject the state to any civil
liability.
Alteration of Plans:
After board approval of engineering plans, a
political subdivision may not make any substan-
tial or material alteration in the plans unless
the board authorizes the alteration.
Certificate of Approval:
The board may consider the following as grounds
for refusal to give a certificate of approval
for any construction contract:
S -5
SECTION 03 - INSURANCE
(1) failure to construct the project according
to the plans as the board approved them or
altered with the board's approval;
(2) failure to construct the works in
accordance with sound engineering
principles; or
(3) failure to comply with any term of the con-
tract.
S -6
03 -01 Insurance policies must be obtained by the Con-
tractor or separate endorsement obtained to his
existing insurance policies on projects that
involve special hazards, such as blasting, exca-
vation on public properties, etc.
The principal types of insurance which will be
necessary are:
Public Liability and Property Damage to protect
the Contractor, any of his sub - contractors and
the Owner against claims arising from personal
injury, including accidental death, as well as
claims for property damage.
The amount for liability is $100,000/$300,000.
The amount of property damage will depend upon
the magnitude and nature of the project.
Automobile and Truck Public Liability and Pro -
perty Damage to protect the same individuals as
indicated under Public Liability and Property
Damage above, and in the same amounts for lia-
bility.
Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability
Builder's Risk Insurance is necessary to cover
loss of or damage to the building materials
while the project is under construction.
The Contractor shall supply to the Owner a Cer-
tificate of Insurance, on a form supplied by the
insurance companies or a form similar to the
attached samples from the Contractor prior to
the start of work.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 01 - GENERAL
01 -01 Scope of Work 1
01 -02 Construction Site 1
01 -03 Backwork 1
01 -04 Grading 1
01 -05 Surface Drainages 2
01 -06 Backfill 2
01 -07 .Inspection of Work 2
01 -08 Notification 2
01 -09 Construction Staking 2
01 -10 Testing & Acceptance of Improvements 3
01 -11 Work in Freezing Weather ' 3
01 -12 Protection of Trees, Plants & Shrubs . 3
01 -13 Barricades 3
01-14, Property Lines and Monuments 3 .
01 -15 Disposal of Surplus Material 3
01 -16. Contractor's Use of Premises 3
01 -17 Trade Names 4
01 -18 Materials and Workmanship 4
01 - • Measurement and Payment 4
SECTION 02 -
02 -01
02 -02
02 -03
02 -04
02 -05
02 -06
02 -07
02 -08
02 -09
02 -10
02 -11
02 -12
02 -13
02 -14
02 -15
02 -16
EARTHWORK
INDEX
General 1
Clearing and Grubbing 1
Protection of Existing Structures &•
Utilities 2
Maintaining Drainage 2
Blasting 3
Piling Excavated Material 3
Shoring, Sheeting and Bracing 3
Seasonal Limits 3
Control of Dust 4
Barricades, Guards, & Safety Provisions 4
Excess Material 4
Trench Excavation 4
Trench Backfill 6
Structural Excavation & Backfill 8
Earthfill Construction 10
Measurement and Payment 13
Page
f'
1
1
1
1
;
SECTION 03 - CONCRETE 22 11
03 -01 General 1
03 -02 Scope 1
03 -03 Portland Cement 1
03 -04 Aggregates 2
03 -05 Water 2
03 -06 Admixtures 3
03 -07 Proportioning 3
03 -08 Mixing 5
03 -09 Concrete Consistency 5
03 -10 Transit Mixers 7
03 -11 Hand Mixing 8
03 -12 Transporting Batched Materials &
Mixed Concrete 8
03 -13 Steel Reinforcement for Concrete . . • • 9
03 -14 Expansion Joint Filler and Joint
Sealants 10
03 -15 Concrete Construction 13
.03 -16 Finishing Types 22
03 -17 Openings for Installation of, and
•
Preparation for, Other Work 25
03 -18 Defective Work 26
03 -19 Tests 26
03 -20 Cleaning 27
03 -21 Measurement and Payment 27
SECTION 04 WATER TREATMENT FACILITIES
04 -01 General 1
04 -02 Equipment Performance 1
04 -03 Equipment to be Furnished 2
04 -04 Operating Conditions 3
04 -05 Construction 5
04 -06 Installation 5
04 -07 Reactor Clarifier Equipment 6
04 -08 Filter Equipment 19
04 -09 Miscellaneous Handrails, Grating,
and Ladders 31
04 -10 Cleaning and Painting 32
04 -11 Shop Drawings and Submittals 33
04 -12 Experience and Guarantee 34
04 -13 Service 35
04 -14 Water Plant Operating Controls 35
04 -15 Measurement and Payment 35
SECTION 05 - METAL TREATMENT PLANT BUILDING
05 -01 General 1
05 -02 Reinforced Concrete Foundation 1
05 -03 Steel 1
05 -04 Site Work 2
ii
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION 05 - METAL TREATMENT PLANT BUILDING (Continued) Page •
05 -05 Floor Slabs 2
05 -06 Building 2
05 -07 Metal Building Accessories 5
05 -08 Chlorination Room 8
05 -09 Insulation 8
05 -10 Carpentry and Millwork 8
05 -11 Partition Insulation 11
05 -12 Drywall 12
05 -13 Caulking 14
05 -14 Texture 15
05 - Interior Painting 16
05 -16 Floor Covering 18
05 -17 Heating and Air Conditioning 18
05 - 18 Plumbing 19
05 -19 Electrical Work 19
05 -20 Measurement and Payment 19
SECTION 06 - WATER PLANT EQUIPMENT
06 -01 General 1
06 -02 Alum Feed Equipment 1
06 -03 Polymer or pH Control Feed Equipment . 5
06 -04 Chlorination System 8
06 -05 Turbidimeters 10
06 - 06 Self Prime Lift Station 11
06 -07 Flow Measurement and Recording 15
06 -08 Plant Water Service Meter 18
06 - Drinking Fountain 18
06 -10 Rate of Flow Controller and
Pressure Reducer 19
06 - 11 Flow and Level Recorders 19
06 -12 Measurement and Payment 21
SECTION 07 - PIPING
07 -01 General 1
07 -02 Materials 3
07 -03 Plumbing 7
07 - Installation of Pressure Lines 9
07 -05 Installation of Gravity Lines 10
07 - 06 Cleaning, Testing and Disinfection . . 11
07 -07 Pipe Insulation 14
07 -08 Measurement and Payment 14
SECTION 08 - VALVES, GATES AND APPURTENANCES
08 -01 General 1
08 -02 Valves 2
08 -03 Measurement and Payment 6
i1i
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION 09 ELECTRICAL Page
09 -01 Scope 1
09 -02 Applicable Specifications & Standards . ' 1
09 -03 General Conditions 1
09 -04 Plans and Specifications 1
09 -05 Codes, Permits and Inspections 2
09 -06 Progress and Guarantee 2
09 -07 Cutting; Repairing 2
09 -08 Basic Materials and Methods 3
09 -09 Conduit System 3
09 -10 Conductor 4
09 -11 Electrical Service System 5
09 -12 Grounding System 5
09 -13 Temporary Power 5
09 -14 Electrical Distribution System 5
09 -15 Branch Circuits 6
09 -16 Wiring Devices 6
09 -17 Lighting Fixtures 6
09 -18 Lamps 7
09 -19 Other Systems 7
09 -20 Electrical Power Equipment 7
09 -21 Electric Motors 8
09 -22 Shop Drawings 8
09 -23 Equipment Finish 9
09 -24 Guarantee 9
09 -25 Heating Equipment 9
09 -26 Measurement and Payment 9
SECTION 10 - PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS
10 -01 General 1
10 -02 Scope of Work 1
10 -03 Preparation of Surface 2
10 -04 Painting Schedule 3
10 -05 Application of Paint 4
10 -06 Workmanship . 6
10 -07 Protection of Work 6
10 -08 Measurement and Payment 6
SECTION 11 CONTROL SYSTEM - RAW WATER INTAKE
SYSTEM, WATER TREATMENT PLANT, AND
BOOSTER PUMP STATION
11 -01 Raw Water Pump Control System 1
11 -02 Water Treatment Plant Control System . 3
11 -03 Control System for Booster Pumps,
Control Valves and Existing Booster
& Well Pumps 4
SECTION 12 - LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
12 -01 General 1
12 -02 Materials 1
12 -03 Construction 1
iv
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION 12 - LABORATORY EQUIPMENT (Continued) Page
12 -04 Finishing 2
12 -05 Sides 2
12 -06 Bottoms 2
12 -07 Wood Doors and Drawer Facings . . . . 2
12 -08 Drawers 2
12 -09 Countertops 2
12 -10 Sinks and Troughs 3
12 -11 Backsplashes 3
12 -12 Laboratory Furniture and Equipment . 3
12 -13 General Tests 3
12 -14 Furniture and Fixtures 4
12 - Major Equipment, Glassware and
Plasticware, Apparatus, Chemicals and
Miscellaneous Supplies 4
12 -16 Performance 5
12 -17 Delivery 5
12 -18 Laboratory Manuals 6
12 -19 Measurement and Payment 6
SECTION 13 - SHOP DRAWINGS
13 -01 General 1
13 -02 Measurement and Payment 1
SECTION 14 - FENCING
14 -01 General 1
14 -02 Chain Link Fence 1
14 -03 Measurement and Payment 5
SECTION 15 - ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION
15 -01 Scope of Work 1
15 -02 Governing Technical Specifications 1
15 -03 Measurement and Payment 1
SECTION 16 - FORK LIFT
16 -01 General 1
16 -02 Measurement and Payment 1
SECTION 17 - GRAPHIC DISPLAY PANEL
17 -01 General 1
17 -02 Measurement and Payment 3
SECTION 18 - PRESSURE GROUTING UNDERNEATH PLANT
18 -01 General 1
18 -02 Measurement and Payment 1
v
SECTION 01 - GENERAL
01 -01 SCOPE OF WORK
The work covered by these Specifications consists of
furnishing all labor, equipment, appliances, mater-
ials and performing all operations in connection
with the construction of a water treatment plant,
plant equipment, control building, excavation, in-
stallation of pipe lines, related appurtenances and
the backfilling, testing and compaction of trenches
complete in accordance with the Plans, and subject
to the terms and conditions of the Contract Docu-
ments.
01 -02 CONSTRUCTION SITE
During construction, the Contractor shall keep the
site free and clean from all rubbish and debris and
shall clean -up the site promptly when notified to do
so by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, maintain
the street free from dust, mud, excess earth or de-
bris which constitutes a nuisance or danger to the
public using the thoroughfare, or the occupants of
adjacent properties.
Care shall be taken to prevent spillage on streets
over which hauling is done, and any such spillage or
debris deposited on streets, due to the Contractor's
operations, shall be immediately removed.
01 - BACRWORK
The Contractor shall coordinate his operations in
such a manner as to prevent the amount of clean -up
and completion of back works from becoming exces-
sive. Should such a condition be existent, the
Engineer may order all or portions of the work to
cease and refuse to allow any work to commence until
the back work is done to the Engineer's satisfac-
tion.
01 -04 GRADING
The Contractor shall do such grading in the area
adjacent to backfilled trenches and structures as
may be necessary to leave the area in a neat and
satisfactory condition approved by the Engineer.
01 -1/4 9/80
01 -05 SURFACE DRAINAGE
All grading in the vicinity of trench excavation
shall be controlled to prevent surface water from
flowing into the trenches. Any water accumulated in
the trenches shall be removed by pumping or by other
approved methods.
01 -06 BACKFILL
During excavation, material suitable for backfilling
shall be piled in an orderly manner, a sufficient
distance back from the edges of trenches, to avoid
overloading and to prevent slides or cave -ins.
Materials unsuitable for backfilling shall be hauled
from the job site and disposed of by the Contrac-
tor.
Where the Plans and /or Special Provisions provide
for segregation of top soil from underlying material
for purposes of backfill, the materials shall not be
mixed.
01 -07 INSPECTION OF WORK
The work covered under this Contract shall be in-
spected by the Engineer or the Owner's authorized
representative. The quality of material and the
quality of installation of pipe and related equip-
ment shall be to the satisfaction of the Inspector..
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility for the
construction methods and safety precautions in the
undertaking of this Contract.
01 -08 NOTIFICATION
The Engineer must be notified a minimum of 24 -hours
in advance of beginning construction.
01 -09 CONSTRUCTION STAKING
The Engineer has staked the sewer alignment and pro-
vided reference hubs and bench marks at the treat-
ment plant site.
The Contractor shall provide his own construction
staking.
01 -2/4 9/80
01 -10 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE OF IMPROVEMENTS
The Engineer or his representative will be present
at the testing of water and sewer lines. The Con-
tractor will test all lines and be confident that
the lines will be able to pass test prior to calling
the Engineer to observe test. No lines will be ac-
cepted by the Owner without the Engineer observing
the test and certifying to the lines passing the
pressure tests as specified herein.
01 - 11 WORK IN FREEZING WEATHER
Portions of the work may continue as directed by the
Engineer.
01 - PROTECTION OF TREES, PLANTS AND SHRUBS
The Contractor shall take necessary precautions to
preserve all existing trees, plants and shrubs but
where it is justifiable and necessary, the Contrac-
tor may remove trees and plants for construction
right -of -way but only with prior approval of the
Engineer.
01 -13 BARRICADES
Barricades shall be installed, in locations deemed
necessary by the Engineer, for the protection of
life and property. Under no circumstances will any
existing road be permitted to remain closed over a
weekend.
01 - PROPERTY LINES AND MONUMENTS
The Contractor shall be responsible for the protec-
tion, reference and resetting of property corner
monuments if disturbed.
01 -15 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS MATERIAL
The Contractor shall at his own expense make ar-
rangement for the disposal of surplus material, such
as rock, trees, brush and other unwanted backfill
materials.
01 -16 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide
additional space as necessary for his operations and
storage of materials.
01 -3/4 9/80
01 -17 TRADE NAMES
Except as specified otherwise, wherever in the
Specifications an article or class of material is
designated by a trade name or by the name or catalog
number of any maker, patentee, manufacturer, or
dealer, such designations shall be taken as intend-
ing to mean and specify the articles described or
another equal thereto in quality, finish, and ser-
viceability for the purpose intended, as may be
determined and judged by the Engineer in his sole
discretion.
01 -18 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
No material which has been used by the Contractor
for any temporary purpose whatever is to be incor-
porated in the permanent structure without written
consent of the Engineer. Where materials or equip-
ment are specified by a trade or brand name, it is
not the intention of the Owner to discriminate
against an equal product of another manufacturer,
but rather to set a definite standard of quality for
performance, and to establish an equal basis for the
evaluation of bids. Where the words "equivalent ",
"proper ", or "equal to" are used, they shall be
understood to mean that the item referred to shall
be proper, the equivalent of, or equal to some other
item, in the opinion or judgment of the Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be
the best of their respective kinds and shall be in
all cases fully equal to approved samples. Notwith-
standing that the words "or equal to" or.other such
expressions may be used in the specifications in
connection with a material, manufactured article or
process, the material, article or prices specifical-
ly designated shall be used, unless a substitute
shall be approved in writing by the Engineer, and
the Engineer shall have right to require the use of
such specifically designated material, article or
process.
01 -19 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No separate payment for work performed under this
item. Include cost of same in contract price bid
for items of which this work is a component.
01 -4/4 9/80
1
SECTION 02 EARTHWORK
1 02 -01 GENERAL
Earthwork shall consist of clearing, grubbing,
loosening, blasting, rock excavation, removing,
transporting, depositing, compacting, trenching,
backfilling in final location all materials, wet or
dry as required for construction; together with
furnishing, placing and removing of all sheeting
and bracing; and all pumping and draining of exca-
vation.
02 -02 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
02 -02:1 General
This work shall consist of removing all natural and
artificial objectionable material from the right -
of -way, construction areas and such other areas as
may be specified. Clearing and grubbing shall be
performed in advance of grading operations and in
accordance with the requirements herein specified,
subject to erosion control requirements. Demoli-
tion of buildings and structures, other than foun-
dations or slabs, shall be as specified on the
plans.
02 -02.2 Preservation of Property
Existing improvements, adjacent property, utility
and other facilities, and trees and plants are not
to be removed, and shall be protected from injury
or damage resulting from the Contractor's opera-
tions.
02 -02.3 Clearing and Grubbing Operations
Unless otherwise specified, the entire area of the
project to the widths specified below shall be
cleared and grubbed. No payment will be made to
the Contractor for clearing and grubbing outside
these limits, unless such work is authorized by the
Engineer.
The area above the natural ground surface shall be
cleared of all vegetable growth, such as trees,
logs, upturned stumps, roots of downed trees,
brush, grass, weeds, and all other objectionable
material, within the limits of the roadways and
yard area.
02 -1/13 9/80
Trees and plants that are not to be removed shall
be fully protected from injury by the Contractor at
his expense.
02 -03 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
Existing power and telephone lines, trees, fences,
pipelines or other conduits, and structures in the
vicinity of the work shall be supported and pro-
tected from injury by the Contractor during the
construction and until the completion of the work.
The Contractor shall be liable for all damages to
such structures, as herein provided, and shall save
and keep the Owner harmless from any liability or
expense for injuries, damages, or repairs to same.
A thorough attempt has been made to show the type,
size, location and number of all utilities, how-
ever, no guarantee is made as to the location and
number of utilities. The Contractor shall repair,
in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer, all util-
ities damaged in the progress of his work. The
Contractor shall notify all owners of utilities
prior to commencement of and sufficiently in ad-
vance to have the utilities mark the location of
their facilities. The Contractor shall be prepared
at all times with labor,•equipment, and materials
to make repairs to damaged. mains or utilities.
02 -04 MAINTAINING DRAINAGE
The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary
drainage for all excavations, drains, ditches,
trenches, and structures. The Contractor shall
keep the excavations dry through the construction
operations. Whenever necessary, in order to pro-
vide proper drainage, the Contractor shall, at his
own expense, install underdrains, furnish and ope-
rate all necessary pumping equipment, drainage
sumps, wellpoint systems and other drainage facil-
ities.
The Contractor shall dispose of the water from the
work into a drainage channel without damage to ad-
jacent property and in such a manner as not to be a
menace to the public health. No water shall be
drained into completed work or work under construc-
tion without prior consent of the Engineer.
02 -2/13 9/80
02 -05 BLASTING
The Contractor shall provide, without additional
compensation, suitable temporary channels or other
work for the water that may flow along or across
the site of the work.
Blasting for excavation will be permitted only
after securing the approval of the Engineer and
only when proper precautions are taken for the pro-
tection of persons and property. The hours of
blasting will be fixed by the Engineer. Any damage
caused by blasting shall be repaired by the Con-
tractor at his expense.
The Contractor shall carry proper and adequate
blasting insurance. The Contractor's methods of
procedure in blasting shall conform to federal,
state, and local laws.
02 -06 PILING EXCAVATED MATERIAL
All excavated material shall be piled in a manner
that will not endanger the work and that will avoid
obstructing roads and driveways. Hydrants under
pressure, valve pit covers, valve boxes, curb stop
boxes, fire and police call boxes, or other utility
controls shall be left unobstructed and accessible
until the work is completed. Gutters shall be kept
clear or other satisfactory provisions made for
street drainage. Natural watercourses shall not be
obstructed.
02 -07 SHORING, SHEETING AND BRACING
Where necessary, trenches and other excavations
shall be properly sheeted and braced to furnish
acceptable working conditions. The bracing shall
comply in all respects to the rules, orders, and
regulations prescribed by federal, state and local
laws. When required by law, the Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer detailed drawings of propos-
ed bracing.
02 -08 SEASONAL LIMITS
No fill material shall be placed, spread, or com-
pacted during unfavorable weather conditions. When
the work is interrupted by snow or rain, filling
operations shall not be resumed until field tests
02 -3/13 9/80
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
by the Engineer indicate that the moisture content
and density of the fill are as specified.
02 -09 CONTROL OF DUST
The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the con-
struction area watered or swept of all loose mater-
ial produced by his operations in order that traf-
fic and construction do not raise an objectionable
amount of dust. When conditions warrant, the Con-
tractor shall apply a suitable dust palliative to
control dust.
02 -10 BARRICADES, GUARDS, AND SAFETY PROVISIONS
To protect persons from injury and to avoid proper-
ty damage, adequate barricades, construction signs,
torches, red lanterns, and guards, as required,
will be placed and maintained during the construc-
tion. All material piles, equipment, and pipe
which may serve as obstructions to traffic shall be
enclosed by fences or barricades and shall be pro-
tected by proper lights when the visibility is
poor. The rules and regulations of the local
authorities respecting safety provisions shall be
observed.
02 -11 EXCESS MATERIAL
Excess excavation material shall be promptly remov-
ed and disposed of on the site by the Contractor as
directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not
dump material on any private property without the
written permission of the Owner thereof.
02 -12 TRENCH EXCAVATION
02 -12.1 Trenching
Trenches shall be of such extra width, when requir-
ed, as will permit the convenient placing of timber
supports, sheeting and bracing, and handling of
specials. All excavations for pipes shall be of a
depth to permit at least a thirty inch (30 ") cover-
ing over the pipe unless otherwise shown. All
trenches shall have vertical sides from the bottom
to a point at least twelve inches (12 ") above the
top of the pipe. Above this point in unstable
ground, with the written consent of the Engineer,
the trench banks may be sloped as directed.
02 -4/13 9/80
Bell holes shall be provided at each joint to per-
mit the jointing to be made properly, unless other-
wise approved by the Engineer.
The bottom of trench must be free from loose mater-
ial before placing the subgrade material. Whenever
the maximum allowable trench width is exceeded for
any reason, the Contractor shall, at his expense,
embed or cradle the pipe in concrete in a manner
satisfactory to the Engineer.
02 -12.2 Pipe Clearance in Rock
Ledge rocks, boulders, and large stones shall be
removed to provide a clearance of not less than six
inches (6 ") below and on each side of all pipe,
valves, and fittings.
02 -12.3 Excavation in Poor Soil and Refilling to Grade
Where the bottom of the trench at subgrade is found
to be unstable or to include ashes, cinders, any
type of refuse, vegetable or other organic mater-
ial, or large pieces of fragments or inorganic
material which, in the judgment of the Engineer are
unsuitable, the Contractor shall excavate and re-
move such unsuitable material to the width and
depth ordered by the Engineer. Before the pipe is
laid, the subgrade shall be made by backfilling as
provided herein.
Payment for over excavation and refilling to grade
will be made in accordance with the General Condi-
tions. Unsuitable excavation shall be removed from
the project.
02 -12.4 Braced and Sheeted Trenches
Open -cut trenches shall be sheeted and braced as
required by applicable regulations, and as may be
necessary to protect life, limb, property, or the
work. When close sheeting is required by trench
conditions, it shall be so driven as'to prevent ad-
jacent soil from entering the trench below or
through such sheeting. Where sheeting and bracing
are used, the trench width shall be increased ac-
cordingly.
The Engineer reserves the right to order the sheet-
ing driven to the full depth of the trench or to
02 -5/13 9/80
such additional depths which are required for the
protection of the work. Where the soil in the
lower limits of a trench has the necessary stabil-
ity, the Engineer, at his discretion, may permit
the Contractor to stop the driving of sheeting at
some designated elevation above the trench bottom.
Any sheeting driven below the invert grade shall be
left in place. The granting of such permission by
the Engineer, however, shall not relieve the Con-
tractor in any degree from his full responsibility
under the Contract.
Sheeting and bracing which are left in place must
be removed for a distance of three feet (3') below
the established finished grade or the existing sur-
face, whichever is lower. Trench bracing, except
that which must be left in place, may be removed
when the backfilling has reached the respective
levels of such bracing. Sheeting, except that
which must be left in place, must be removed after
the backfilling has been completed or has been
brought up to such an elevation as to permit its
safe removal. Sheeting and bracing may be removed
before backfilling but only in such manner as will
insure the adequate protection of the adjacent
structures.
02 -13 TRENCH BACKFILL
02 -13.1 General
Pipeline trenches shall be backfilled with desig-
nated materials to the level of the original ground
surface, to the underside of the ground base
course, to the finished grade, or as shown on the
drawings. Before backfilling, the trench shall be
cleared of all timber and debris. Backfill shall
be compacted to 85% relative density except as
otherwise provided herein.
It is highly important that a dense, well- compacted
backfill be placed around the pipelines. The Con-
tractor will be required to produce such a backfill
under all circumstances. The materials used for
the backfill, the amount thereof, and the manner of
deposition shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer, but the Contractor will be held respons-
ible for any displacement or instability of the
pipeline or any damage to the coating caused by im-
proper installation of backfill materials. No
02 -6/13 9/80
material shall be used for trench backfill, which,
for any reason cannot be compacted to the degree
specified.
For these specifications, backfill shall be divided
into two (2) categories: Bedding and Upper Zone
Backfill. Bedding shall be defined as that mater-
ial supporting and extending to one foot (1') above
the top of the pipe. Where concrete is specified
to cover the pipe, the top of the concrete shall be
considered as the top of the bedding. Upper zone
backfill shall be defined as that material placed
in the trench from the top of the bedding to the
upper limit of backfill required.
02 -13.2 Bedding.
In soft, spongy, unstable, or other similar mater-
ial is encountered upon which the bedding material
or pipe is to be placed, this unsuitable material
shall be removed to a depth ordered by the Engineer
and replaced with bedding material suitably densi-
fied. Additional bedding so ordered, over the
above amount required by the plans or specifica-
tions, will be paid for as provided in the General
Conditions. If the necessity for such additional
bedding materials has been caused by an act or
failure to act on the part of the Contractor, or is
required for the control of ground water, the Con-
tractor shall bear the expense of the additional
excavation and bedding.
Bedding material shall first be placed so that the
pipe is supported for the full length of the barrel
with full bearing on the bottom segment of the pipe
equal to a minimum of 0.4 of the outside diameter
of the barrel. Then the remainder .of the bedding
shall be placed. Alternate methods of pipe laying
which are recommended by the pipe manufacturer may
be used if approved by the Engineer.
Except where otherwise specified, bedding material
shall be sand, gravel, disintegrated granite,
crushed aggregate, native free - draining granular
material having a sand equivalent of not less than
30 or having a coefficient or permeability greater
than 0.001 Cm. per Sec., or other material approved
by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, con-
crete used for bedding shall be Class 5.0 -B -2000.
02 -7/13 9/80
In cases where native free - draining granular mater-
ial is suitable for use as bedding, the trench may
be excavated to a point above the invert grade and
the trench bottom hand - shaped so that the bottom
segment of the pipe is firmly supported on undis-
turbed material.
The pipe bedding over the top of the pipe shall be
compacted to 90 percent relative compaction unless
otherwise shown on the drawings.
02 -13.3 Upper Level Backfill
Backfill material for the upper level backfill zone
of the pipe trench shall be native material com-
pacted to 85 percent relative compaction.
In roadway or parking areas, all backfill shall be
compacted to 90 percent relative compaction.
Jetting (water consolidation of backfill) shall be
used only when approved by the Engineer. The jet
pipe shall be not less than one and one -half
(1 -1/2) inches in diameter and shall extend to
within fifteen inches (15 ") of the top of the pipe
during jetting of backfill over pipe. The source
of water for jetting shall be a water tank with a
pressure of sixty pounds (60) per square inch. All
"bridges" shall be completely broken down during
the jetting process. Jet points along the line of
the ditch shall be staggered from side to side at
intervals not to exceed six feet (6') center to
center or as necessary so that the takes
full possible subsidence while water is being in-
troduced into it through the jet pipe. If the com-
paction requirements specified above are not met
within 60 calendar days after jetting the backfill,
the trench shall be re- excavated. Backfill mater-
ial shall then be compacted by tamping and /or roll-
ing until the compaction requirements are satis-
fied.
02 -14 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACRFILL
02 -14.1 Excavation
The Contractor may employ any method of excavation
that he desires which, in his experience, he con-
siders to be the best, providing it meets with the
approval of the Engineer. The ground shall not be
02 -8/13 9/80
dug by machinery nearer than three inches (3 ") of
any finished subgrade without the express consent
and approval of the Engineer. The last three inch-
es (3 ") shall be removed by such methods acceptable
to the Engineer, and shall not disturb or weaken
any subgrade for foundation purposes.
Excavations for footing, floor slabs, and other
structures shall be carried to the neat outside
lines of such structures, as shown on the drawings,
plus one inch (1 ") in all horizontal directions,
and the concrete to be poured therein shall be
placed on or against the original undisturbed
material whenever such a procedure is reasonably
possible and expedient.
If this is not possible, the earth on which the
concrete is to be poured shall be compacted to a
uniform density of not less than ninety percent
(90 %) of the maximum density.
Excavations for walls, where forms are used, shall
extend a sufficient distance to allow for placing
and removal of forms, installations of services,
and inspection of work.
Structure excavation carried beyond or below the
lines and grades indicated on the drawings shall be
refilled with approved materials and compacted as
directed by the Engineer at the expense of the Con-
tractor, except that under footings, concrete shall
be used.
02 -14.2 Backfilling
All lumber, rubbish and braces shall be carefully
removed from excavations. Unless otherwise speci-
fied, all excavations shall then be backfilled with
imported material up to the original surface of the
ground, or to such grades as shall be directed.
The backfilling shall be done as completely as pos-
sible in such manner as to prevent after- settle-
ment.
No backfill shall be placed against concrete walls
until the walls have been inspected and approved by
the Engineer. Shoring and sheeting shall be care-
fully and completely removed as the backfilling
progresses, unless otherwise authorized by the
Engineer. Where sheeting is left in place, all
cavities behind such sheeting shall be solidly
filled.
02 -9/13 9/80
Aggregate under floor slabs, as called for on the
drawings, shall meet the following specifications
and be compacted to 90 percent of the maximum den-
sity.
Sieve Size Percentage Passing Sieve
1" 100
3/4" 90 -100
No. 4 0- 10
Backfill material shall be placed in horizontal,
uniform layers not exceeding eight inches (8 ") in
thickness before compaction, and shall be brought
up uniformly on all sides of the structure or
facility. Each layer of backfill shall be compact-
ed to a relative compaction of not less than 90
percent.
Consolidation of structure backfill by ponding and
jetting will be permitted when as determined by the
Engineer, the backfill material is of such charac-
ter that it will be self- draining when compacted
and that foundation materials will not soften or be
otherwise damaged by the applied water, and no
damage to the structure from hydrostatic pressure
will result. When ponding and jetting is permit-
ted, material for use as structure backfill shall
be placed and compacted in layers not exceeding
four feet (4') in thickness. The work shall be
performed without damage to the structure or soft-
ening of the embankment and in such a manner that
excess water will not be impounded. Ponding and
jetting methods. shall be supplemented by the use of
vibratory or other consolidation equipment when
necessary to obtain the required consolidation.
Backfill material shall be native material provided
that no material larger than three inches (3 ") in
greatest dimension shall be used.
02 -15 EARTBFILL CONSTRUCTION
02 -15.1 General
Earth' fill construction shall consist of construct-
ing embankments, including the preparation of the
areas upon which they are to be placed; buttress
fills, dikes; the placing and compacting of approv-
ed material within areas where unsuitable material
in holes, pits and other depressions.
02 -10/13 9/80
Areas over which fills are to be placed shall be
cleared of vegetation, scarified and then wetted
and rolled prior to placing fill materials. When
fills are to be placed over existing surface im-
provements which are to remain in place, such
clearing.and scarifying will not be required.
When fill is to be made and compacted on hillsides
or where new fill is to be compacted against exist-
ing fill or where embankment is built one -half
width at a time, the slopes or original hillsides
and old or new fills shall be benched a minimum of
four feet (4') horizontally as the fill is placed.
A new bench shall be started where the vertical cut
for the next lower bench intersects the existing
ground.
Material thus cut out shall be recompacted along
with the new embankment material at the Contrac-
tor's expense. •
Clods or hard lumps of earth of six inches (6 ") in
greatest dimension shall be broken up before com-
pacting the material in embankment, with the fol-
lowing exception:
When the fill material contains large rocks, boul-
ders, or hard lumps (such as hardpan or cemented
gravel which cannot be broken readily) over twelve
inches (12 ") in greatest dimension, such materials
may be incorporated in the fill only when authoriz-
ed by the Engineer with respect to the acceptabil-
ity of the material, the location and depth of its
placement in the fill, and the method to be used.
Embankments shall not be constructed when material
is frozen or a blanket of snow prevents proper com-
paction.
02 -15.2 Compacting
Fill shall be constructed in compacted layers of
uniform thickness and each layer shall be compacted
in accordance with the requirements herein speci-
fied with the following exception:
Where fills are to be constructed across low, swam-
py ground which will not support the weight of
hauling equipment, the lower part of the embankment
may be constructed by dumping successive loads in a
02 -11/13 9/80
uniformly distributed layer of a thickness not
greater than that necessary to support the equip-
ment while placing subsequent layers. The remain-
der of the embankment shall be constructed in lay-
ers and compacted as specified.
The construction of dikes, the placing and compact-
ing of approved material where unsuitable material
has been removed, and the filling of holes, pits
and other depressions,, shall conform to all of the
requirements specified herein for compacting fills.
Trenches, holes, depressions and pits outside of
areas where fills are to be constructed shall be
graded to provide a presentable and well- drained
area.
Embankments shall be constructed so that each layer
shall have a cross fall of at least two percent
(2%) but no more than five percent (5%).
The loose thickness of each lift of fill material
shall not exceed that which will provide the speci-
fied relative compaction through the full depth of
the lift by the specific compaction equipment being
utilized. Each lift shall be compacted in accor-
dance with the following requirements to a relative
compaction of not less than 90% of the maximum dry
density as determined by ASTM D -698 with a moisture
content of not less than 2% dry nor more than 3%
wet of optimum moisture content.
The interstices around the rock in each layer shall
be filled with earth or other fine material and '
compacted. Broken portland cement concrete and
bituminous type pavement obtained from the project
excavations will be permitted in the fill with the
following limitations:
1. The maximum dimension of any piece used
shall be six inches.
2. Pieces larger than four inches (4 ") shall
not be placed within twelve inches (12 ") of
any structure.
3. Pieces larger than three inches (3 ") shall
not be placed within twelve inches (12 ") of
the finished surface.
4. "Nesting" of pieces will not be permitted.
At locations where it would be impractical to use
mobil power compacting equipment, fill layers shall
be compacted to the specified requirements by any
approved method that will obtain the specified re-
lative compaction.
02 -12/13 9/80
At the time of compaction, the moisture content of
fill material shall be such that the specified rela-
tive compaction will be obtained and the fill will
be firm, hard and unyielding. Fill material which
contains excessive moisture shall not be compacted
until the material is dry enough to obtain the re-
quired relative compaction. Full compensation for
any additional work involved in drying fill material
to the required moisture content shall be considered
as included in the contract price paid and no addi-
tional compensation will be allowed therefor.
02 - MEASUREMENT OF PAYMENT
No separate payment for work performed under this
Item. Include cost of same in Contract prices bid
for item of which this work is a component part.
02 -13/13 9/80
SECTION 03 - CONCRETE
03 - GENERAL
Concrete consisting of portland cement, concrete ag-
gregate, sand and water will be designated by a sym-
bol consisting of a number, a letter and a number.
The first number will be the number of sacks of
cement per cubic yard, and the last number the com-
pressive strength at 28 days expressed in pounds per
square inch. A sack of cement shall be defined as
94 pounds. The concrete shall be 6.0 -4000 unless
otherwise specified. Compressive strength tests
where specified herein, shall be performed in accor-
dance with ASTM C -39.
03 -02 SCOPE
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing
the mix design to the Engineer for approval.
This section of the specifications shall include all
labor and materials to construct all concrete work
as shown on drawings, herein specified, or both in-
cluding the following:
All footings, slabs, floors, walls, beams, supports,
walks, pedestals, curbs, vaults and other concrete
items, complete with metal reinforcement.
All concrete finishes and textures.
All formwork, formwork supports, formwork coatings
and soaking, screens and levels required, and form-
work removal.
Installing all inserts, grounds, dowels, blocks,
sleeves and anchors, and safety threads as shown
and /or specified in this or other sections.
Slab waterproofing.
03 -03 PORTLAND CEMENT
All cement to be used or furnished shall be Type I,
portland cement, conforming to ASTM C -150 unless
otherwise specified. The Contractor shall furnish a
certificate of compliance signed by the manufacturer
identifying the cement and stating that the cement
delivered conforms to ASTM C -150.
03 -1/27 3/81
1
' Whenever suitable facilities, approved by the Engi-
neer, are available for handling and weighing bulk
cement, such facilities shall be used. Otherwise,
the cement shall be delivered in original unopened
' sacks that have been filled by the manufacturer.
They shall be plainly marked with the manufacturer's
name or brand and cement type. Each sack shall con-
1 tain 94 pounds of cement.
Cement shall be stored in such a manner as to permit
ready access for the purpose of inspection and sam-
pling, and suitably protected against contamination
or moisture. Should any cement show evidence of
' contamination, or be otherwise unsuitable, it shall
not be used.
All portland cement used in concrete for any indivi-
dual structure shall be of the same brand and type
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
' 03 - AGGREGATES
Aggregates shall be sand and concrete aggregates
conforming to the requirements prescribed in ASTM
C -33 coarse aggregate gradation size number 467, and
shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use.
They shall meet the grading requirements of this
1
subsection.
Methods of handling materials resulting in segrega-
tion, degradation or the combining of materials
which result in any stockpile failing to meet speci-
fications, shall not be permitted.
' Aggregates which are found to have a silica - released
to alkali- reduced ratio greater than one, when test-
, ed in accordance with ASTM C289", may be used only
when approved by the Engineer and provided low -
alkali cement is used.
03 -05 WATER
Water used for concrete shall be clear and free from
t oil, vegetable matter and other deleterious substan-
ces. Water shall not contain an amount of impurities
that will cause a change in the time of setting of
portland cement of more than 25 percent nor a reduc-
tion in the compressive strength of mortar at four-
teen days of more than 5 percent compared to results
obtained with distilled water.
1 03 -2/27 3/81
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
In conventionally reinforced concrete work, water
shall not contain more than 1,000 ppm of chlorides
calculated as Cl, nor more than 1,000 ppm of sul-
fates calculated as SO4.
In non - reinforced concrete work, water shall not
contain more than 2,000 ppm of chlorides calculated
as Cl, no more than 1,500 ppm of sulfates calculated
as SO4.
03 -06 ADMIXTURES
Air entrainment shall be required on exposed plant
walls or as directed by the Engineer. The air con-
tent shall not be less than 3% nor more than 6 %.
Admixture shall conform to ASTM C -260. Test shall
be conducted in accordance with C -231, 233 or 173.
Water reducer -set retarder admixture shall be used
when average daily mean temperature is 75 ° F. or more
per ASTM C -494.
No other admixtures of any type shall be used unless
authorized by the Engineer. When an admixture is
permitted or specified, it shall be measured accu-
rately into each batch or load in liquid form by a
mechanical dispensing device and method approved by
the Engineer.
03 -07 PROPORTIONING
Aggregates and cement shall be proportioned by
weight.
Proportioning shall consist of combining the aggre-
gates, each stored in a separate bin in the various
gradations prescribed, with cement and water. Weigh
hoppers shall be charged from bins located directly
over them or from conveyor belts. When conveyor
belts are used, there shall be a separate belt for
each size aggregate. There shall be an approved
moisture meter installed to indicate the moisture in
the sand.
Bulk cement shall be weighed in an individual hopper
and shall be kept separate from the aggregates until
the batch ingredients are discharged into the mixer
drum. The cement hopper shall be attached to a
separate scale for individual weighing.
03 -3/27 3/81
1 m :
03 -08 MIXING
I Machine mixing will be required in all cases other
than those in which it would obviously prove to be
' impractical, in which event hand mixing will be per-
mitted. Mixing shall be commenced as soon as possi-
ble after the cement is placed in contact with the
I aggregates, but in no event shall the intervening
period exceed 30 minutes.
' All concrete mixers shall be of such design and con-
struction and so operated as to provide a thoroughly
and properly mixed concrete in which the ingredients
are uniformly distributed. Mixers shall be main-
, tained in proper and serviceable working condition
and any part or portion thereof that is out of or-
der, or becomes worn to such extent as to detrimen-
tally affect the quality of mixing, shall be prompt-
ly repaired or replaced.
I 03 -09 CONCRETE CONSISTENCY
The amount of water added at the mixer shall be re-
gulated to take into account the free water in the
'
aggregates. Free water is defined as the total
water minus the water absorbed by the aggregate in a
saturated surface -dry condition.
1 The amount of water used in the mixture shall not
exceed the minimum amount necessary to permit prac-
I tical placement and consolidation of the concrete,
and unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer,
shall be that required to produce concrete with a
1 slump within the range shown as nominal in the fol-
lowing table:
1 Type of Work Nominal Slump Maximum Slump
(inches) (inches)
Concrete Pavement 0 -2 3
I Non - reinforced Concrete 0 -3 4
Reinforced Concrete
Structures
' Heavy Sections 0 -3 5
Thin Sections & Columns 0 -4 6
Concrete Placed under
Water 6 -8 9
1
03 -5/27 3/81
1
The concrete used in the work shall riot have a slump
greater than that shown as maximum above, nor a free
water content greater than 312 pounds per cubic yard
of concrete.
When adverse or difficult conditions affect the
placement of concrete, the Engineer may authorize a
greater slump to be used, provided both the water
and cement are increased. Water shall be added at a
ratio not to exceed 30 pounds per sack of added
cement per cubic yard of concrete, and such addi-
tional water and cement shall be at the Contractor's
expense.
The consistency of concrete shall be determined in
accordance with ASTM C -143.
If slump tests of individual samples taken at appro-
ximately the 1/4 and 3/4 points of the discharge
differ by more than two inches (2 "), the mixer will
not be acceptable for further use until the condi-
tion is corrected.
03 - 10 TRANSIT MIXERS
The type, capacity, and manner of operation of the
mixing and transporting equipment for ready -mix con-
crete shall conform to the current ASTM C -94 stan-
dard; "Standards for Operation of Truck Mixers and
Agitators of the National Ready -Mixed Concrete Asso-
ciation" and the "Truck Mixer and Agitators Stan-
dards of the Truck Mixer Manufacturers Bureau ".
Transit mix concrete trucks shall be equipped with
an automatic device for recording the number of
revolutions of the drum during the mixing period.
Each mixer and agitator shall have attached thereto
in a prominent place, a metal plate or plates, in-
stalled by the manufacturer on which is plainly
marked the capacity of the drum in terms of the
volume of mixed concrete and the speed of rotation
for the agitating and mixing speeds of the mixing
drum or blades.
Each mixer shall have an identification number
painted on the truck in such a location that it can
be easily read from the batching platform.
The total volume of materials introduced into the
mixer shall not exceed the manufacturer's guaranteed
mixing capacity. If the concrete so mixed does not
03 -6/27 3/81
meet the uniformity requirements of this subsection,
the amount of materials charged into the mixer shall
be reduced.
The drum of the mixer shall be completely emptied of
any previously mixed load. The proper proportions
of aggregate, cement, and water for each load of
concrete shall be placed in the mixer and shall be
mixed therein for not less than 70 nor more than 100
revolutions of the drum or blades at the speed de-
signated by the manufacturer of the equipment as
mixing speed. Additional revolutions of the drum
shall be at the speed designated by the manufacturer
of the equipment as agitating speed. The revolving
of the drum shall be continuous until the concrete
is completely emptied from the drum.
When concrete is being placed for concrete struc-
tures, all wash water shall be emptied from the mix-
er before any portion of the succeeding load is
placed therein. For all other work, the mixer shall
be empty or may carry 10 gallons of water in the
drum. Adequate control of ready -mixed concrete will
normally require that additional water be added and
mixed into the batch at the point of discharge.
Water so added shall be mixed into the load for a
minimum mixing time of three (3) minutes. Water
shall not be added to the load during transit.
The total elapsed time between the addition of water
at the batch plant and discharging the completed mix
shall not exceed 90 minutes. Under conditions con-
tributing to quick setting, the total elapse time
permitted may be reduced by the Engineer.
The Engineer shall be provided with a legible certi-
fied weighmaster's certificate which shall contain
the following information:
Name of vendor
Name of contractor
Number of cubic yards in the load
Actual weights of cement and of each size of
aggregate
Amount of water added at the plant
Amount of water in the aggregate
Brand and type of cement
Brand and amount of admixture
Time and date of batching
03 -7/27 3/81
Space shall be provided on the certificate so that
amount of water added on the job may be indicated.
03 -11 HAND MIXING
Hand mixed concrete shall be mixed on a water -tight
platform or in a mortar box in batches not to exceed
1/3 cubic yard each. The aggregates shall first be
spread in a uniform layer over which the required
quantity of cement shall be evenly distributed. The
entire batch shall be turned with shovels until the
ingredients are thoroughly blended before adding the
water. After adding the proper amount of water, the
batch shall again be turned with shovels until a
uniform consistency is obtained. Methods of hand
mixing which allow the loss of mixing water will not
be permitted.
03 - TRANSPORTING BATCHED MATERIALS AND MIXED CONCRETE
The compartments of trucks or other equipment used
for the purpose of transporting proportioned dry ag-
gregate and cement, or mixed concrete, shall be
suitably constructed to adequately protect and pre-
vent loss or leakage of the contents during charg-
ing, transit or discharging.
03 -13 STEEL REINFORCEMENT FOR CONCRETE
03 -13.1 General
The following specifications set forth the require-
ments for bar, wire, and wire mesh reinforcement.
The reinforcement shall conform accurately to the
dimensions and details indicated on the plans or
otherwise prescribed. Before being placed in any
concrete work, it shall be cleaned thoroughly of all
rust, mill scale, mortar, oil, dirt, or coating of
any character which would be likely to destroy, re-
duce, or impair its proper bonding with the con-
crete.
03 -13.2 Reinforcing Steel
Unless otherwise specified, reinforcing steel shall
be Grade 60 billet steel conforming to ASTM A -615.
Varying grades shall not be used interchangeably in
structures.
03 -8/27 3/81.
Steel bending processes shall conform to the re-
quirements of ACI -318.
Bending or straightening shall be accomplished so
that the steel will not be damaged. Kinked bars
shall not be used.
03 -13.3 Wire Reinforcement
Wire reinforcement shall in all respects fulfill re-
quirements prescribed in ASTM A -82.
03 -13.4 Wire Mesh Reinforcement .
Mesh reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A -185. The
gauge of the wire and the dimensions of the mesh
will be specified in the special provisions or shown
on the plans. The wire mesh reinforcement shall be
so constructed as to retain its original shape and
form during the necessary handling. The effective
cross - sectional area of the wire shall be equal to
that specified or indicated on Ate plans.
03 -14 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER AND JOINT SEALANTS
03 -14.1 General
This section specifies joint fillers and sealants to
be used for treating joints in portland cement con-
crete.
03 -14.2 Premolded Joint Filler
Premolded joint filler material shall consist of
premolded strips of a durable resilient material.
Unless otherwise specified, premolded joint filler
shall be one of the following types: Preformed Ex-
pansion Joint Filler (Bituminous Type) ASTM D -994,
Non - extruding and Resilient Filler (Bituminous Type)
ASTM D -1751, or Non - extruding and Resilient Filler
(Non- bituminous Type) ASTM D -1752.
03 -14.3 Asphalt -Latex Emulsion Joint Sealant
Asphalt -latex emulsion joint sealant shall be de-
signed for mixing and application by hand methods
and shall be suitable for use at temperatures above
50 ° F. The sealing compound shall be an emulsion
consisting of approved paving asphalt, emulsified
with rubber latex in the presence of a suitable
03 -9/27 3/81
emulsifying agent. Rubber latex shall be natural
rubber or synthetic latex containing approximately
40% solids. The resulting emulsion shall consist of
a minimum of 55% paving asphalt and a minimum of 36%
rubber latex.
A setting agent shall be provided in the form of a
paste to be added at the rate of approximately 3
fluid ounces per gallon of emulsion.
The joint sealant shall comply with the following
requirements:
03 -10/27 3/81
ASPHALT -LATEX EMULSION JOINT SEALANT
Test
Method
Determination No. Requirements Remarks '
Furol Visco- ASTM 80 -250 Sec. Before adding setting
sity at 77 ° F D -88 agent.
Sieve Test ASTM 1% Max. Before adding setting
D -244 agent.
Penetration Calif. 50 -150 Immediately after mixing,
418
at 77 ° F pour material into a 6 -oz.
deep ointment can. Allow
specimen to stand in air
at a temperature of 77 ° F +
2 °F for a period of 24 -hrs.
Then penetrate with a
grease cone under a total
load of 150 grams in accor-
dance with ASTM D -217.
Elasticity (1) Calif. 70% Min. Immediately after mixing,
418 pour material into ducti-
lity clips. Cure for 24-
hrs. at 115 ° F + 2 ° F. Test
specimen in modified ducti-
lity mold per test method
Total Solids . Calif. 70% Min. Place 3 to 5 grams freshly
(2) 418 mixed material in an alumi-
num pan and dehydrate in
suitable oven maintained
at a temperature of 200 ° F
+ 3 ° F for a period of 3-
Ers.
Setting Time Calif. 60 Min. Max. Pour material into a 6 -oz.
(2) 418 deep ointment can. Check
penetration each 15 -min.
Record time when penetra-
tion is less than 200.
(1) Mixing ratio of Material: to 200 g. of emulsion component
add 10 ± 0.1 g. of sodium fluosilicate powder.
(2) Mixing ratio of Material: to 8 fluid ounces of emulsion
component add 12 ml. of setting agent component.
03 -14.4 Application
Immediately before applying the joint sealant, the
joint shall be thoroughly cleaned by abrasive blast-
ing or other approved means to remove all mortar,
laitance, scale, dirt, dust, oil, curing compounds
and other foreign material. The joint shall be
blown out with high pressure compressed air to re-
move all residue.
03 -11/27 3/81
At the time of applying the joint sealant, the joint
shall be surface dry, and acceptable to the Engi-
neer. No sealant shall be placed during unsuitable
weather or when the atmospheric temperature is below
50 ° F, or when weather conditions indicate that the
temperature may fall below 32 ° F within 24- hours.
The joint shall be filled from the bottom to the top
without formation of voids. The top of the finished
joint seal shall be between 1/4 -inch and 3/8 -inch
below the finish surface.
At no time shall the emulsion be subjected to a tem-
perature below' 40 ° F. Prior to application, the
joint sealant may be warmed if necessary to permit
proper filling of the joints. The heating shall be
carefully controlled to avoid overheating of any
part of the container or mixture and under no cir-
cumstances shall the emulsion be heated to a temper-
ature greater than 130 ° F.
Immediately before applying the sealant, the emul-
sion shall be mixed with the proper amount of paste
setting agent. The components shall be mixed, pre-
ferably with a power mixer, for 5- minutes to produce
a homogeneous material.
03 -14.5 Concrete Curing Compound
Curing compound shall consist of a liquid which,'
when applied to fresh concrete by means of a spray
gun, will form an impervious membrane over the ex-
posed surfaces of the concrete. Mats and poly -
plastic sheets may be used.
The membrane may be either asphaltic or paraffin
derivatives to which other water - proofing materials
may have been added. Concrete curing compounds
shall be clear or translucent with red fugitive
dye. Curing time shall be a minimum of five (5)
days with temperature above 50 ° F. Curing compound
shall be non -toxic and taste and odor free.
03 -14.6 Form Coating
All form work to be required shall be coated with an
approved resin based material applied according to
the manufacturer's directions. Form coating shall
be non -toxic after 30 -days.
03 -12/27 3/81
1
03 -14.7 Water -Stops
1 Water -stops shall be provided where shown on the
Plans and shall be a minimum height of six inches, a
1 minimum thickness of 3/8 ", be of polyvinyl chloride
material and shall be approved by the Engineer. All
water -stop joints shall be welded according to the
' manufacturer's recommendations.
03 -14.8 Grout
Grout for patching of honeycombs, she bolt holes,
spells, etc. or where approved by the Engineer shall
be "Thorite" as manufactured by Standard Dry Wall
Products of Miami, Florida.
Grout used in setting machinery and equipment shall
1 be "Thoroset" Metallic Compound worked in under the
machinery bases in such a manner as to preclude
voids of pockets under the metal base. The edges
1 shall be neatly finished to give a neat appearance.
Concrete surfaces shall be roughened and cleaned
before the grout is placed. Mix compound with
1 cement, sand, and gravel per manufacturer's specifi-
cations. "Thoroset" shall be as manufactured by
Standard Dry Wall Products, Miami, Florida.
03 -15 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
03 -15.1 General
Concrete chambers, vaults, walls, structural slabs,•
footings, foundations and similar structures shall
1 be constructed in conformity with the plans and this
sub - section. Concrete for use in work constructed
under this Section shall conform to the requirements
herein.
1 Safe and suitable ladders shall be provided to per-
mit access to all portions of the work.
1 The compressive strength of the concrete referred to
in this section will be based on the results of two
1 tests from 6" X 12" concrete test cylinders made and
tested by the Engineer in accordance with ASTM C-31
and C -39. The cylinders shall be cured in
1 accordance with ASTM C -31:
1
1 03 -13/27 3/81
1
03 -15.2 Subgrade for Concrete Structure
Earth subgrade upon which concrete is placed shall
be firm and free from water. Ground water shall be
kept below subgrade until the concrete has set.
When the subgrade is in dry earth, it shall be tho-
roughly dampened with water to ensure that no mois-
ture will be absorbed from the fresh concrete.
03 -15.3 Forms
When the design details for the project provide for
the construction of filter or drain material con-
sisting of gravel (or combination of gravel and
sand), which material will be subgrade for concrete,
the placing of steel reinforcement and placement of
concrete shall follow the installation of the filter
or drain material as closely as practical. The fil-
ter or drain material shall be kept de- watered to
the extent necessary to prevent any portion of con-
crete materials being deposited in water.
When the concrete is to be deposited on rock, the
rock shall be fully uncovered, cleaned, and its sur-
face shall be. removed to a depth sufficient to ex-
pose sound rock. Bedrock shall be roughly leveled -
off or cut to approximately horizontal and vertical
steps. Seams in the rock shall be grouted under
pressure or otherwise treated as the Engineer may
direct.
Forms shall be of suitable material and of a type,
size, shape, quality, and strength to ensure con-
struction as designed. The forms shall be true to
line and grade, mortar tight, and sufficiently rigid
to resist deflection during placing of the concrete.
The responsibility for their adequacy shall rest
with the Contractor. All dirt, chips, sawdust,
nails and other foreign matter shall be completely
removed from forms before any concrete is deposited
therein. The surfaces of forms shall be smooth and
free from irregularities, dents, sags and holes that
would deface the finished surfaces. Forms previous-
ly used shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt,
mortar and foreign matter before being re -used.
03 -14/27 3/81
1
Before concrete is placed in forms, all inside
1
surfaces of the forms shall be thoroughly treated
with releasing agent as specified herein. Care
shall be exercised that no releasing agent is
deposited on previously placed concrete.
Forms for all surfaces that will not be completely
I enclosed or hidden below the permanent surface of
the ground shall be made of surfaced lumber, or
material which will provide a surface at least equal
I to surfaced lumber or plywood. Any lumber or mate-
rial which becomes badly checked or warped, prior to
placing concrete, shall not be used.
I Forms for all exposed surfaces shall be constructed
of plywood or an approved equal. Plywood for forms
shall be Exterior Type, of the grade "Concrete -Form
I Exterior ", conforming to the specifications of the
U. S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of
Standards, Commercial Standards, latest edition.
1 Plywood shall be furnished and placed in 48 inch .
widths and'in uniform lengths of not less than 96
inches, except where the dimension of the member
formed is less than the specified panel dimension.
I Plywood shall be placed with the grain of the outer
plies in the direction of the longest span. Where
1
plywood is attached directly to the studs or joists,
the panels shall be not less than 5/8 inch thick,
and the studs or joists shall be spaced not more
I than 12 inches, center -to- center. Plywood less than
5/8 inch thick, otherwise conforming to the require-
ments specified herein, may be used with a contin-
uous backing of 3/4 inch sheeting. All form panels
shall be placed in a neat symmetrical pattern with
the horizontal joists level and continuous. All
I joints shall be filled with an approved quick -set-
ting compound and finished flush with the interior
of the form.
Wooden forms for copings and curbs shall have a
thickness of not less than 1 -5/8 inches and a width
of not less than the full depth of coping or curb.
1 Unless otherwise shown on the plans, all sharp edges
shall be chamfered with 3/4 inch by 3/4 inch trian-
gular fillets. Forms for curved surfaces shall be
so constructed and placed that the finished surface
will not deviate from the arc of the curve by more
than the tolerance shown on the Plans.
1 03 -15/27 3/81
1
Forms shall be so constructed that portions, where
finishing is required, may be removed without dis-
turbing portions of forms to remain in place.
Forms for girders and slabs shall be cambered as may
be required by the Engineer.
Forms shall, as far as practicable, be so construct-
ed that the form marks will conform to the general
line of the structure.
Form clamps or bolts, approved by the Engineer,
shall be used to fasten forms. The use of twisted
wire loop ties to hold forms in position will not be
permitted, nor shall wooden spreaders be used unless
authorized by the Engineer. Clamps or bolts shall
be of sufficient strength and number to prevent
spreading of the forms. They shall be the break -off
type so that they can be entirely removed or cut
back 1 inch below the finished surface of the con-
crete. All forms for outside surfaces shall be con-
structed with stiff wales at right angles to the
studs, and all form clamps or bolts shall extend
through and fasten such wales.
Form work shall be approved prior to placement of
concrete in the form.
03 -15.4 Removal of Forms
The periods of time for form removal set forth here-
in are permissive only and subject to the Contractor
assuming all risks that may be involved. The time
periods are minimum with no allowance therein for
external loads. At times of low temperature, or
other adverse conditions, the Engineer may require
the forms to be kept in place for longer periods of
time.
The time periods are predicated on the use of con-
crete to which no admixtures have been added.
No forms shall be removed until approval of Engineer
is obtained. Forms shall be stripped after the re-
quired time and projecting wire snapped off. Remov-
al shall not proceed faster than the required fin-
ishing procedure can be completed.
Vertical forms shall not be disturbed for at least
twenty -four (24) hours after last concrete in walls
is placed, except as authorized by the Engineer.
03 -16/27 3/81
Forms shall remain in place a minimum of twenty -four
(24) hours and be removed only after Engineer's
approval.
03 - 15.5 Falsework
All falsework shall be designed and constructed to
provide the necessary rigidity and to support the
loads. Falsework for the support of a superstruc-
ture shall be designed to support the loads that
would be imposed if the entire superstructure were
placed at one time.
All falsework, staging, walkways, forms, ladders,
cofferdams, and similar accessories shall equal or
exceed the minimum requirements of the State Divi-
sion of Industrial Safety. Compliance with such
requirements shall not relieve the Contractor from
full responsibility for the adequacy of safety mea-
sures.
03 - 15.6 Placing Reinforcement
Before placing reinforcing steel, the Contractor
shall submit a reinforcing steel placing plan for
approval of the Engineer.
Reinforcing bars shall be accurately placed as shown
on the plans and shall be firmly and securely held
in position in accordance with Concrete Reinforcing
Steel Institute "Recommended Practice for Placing
Reinforcing Bars ", and by using concrete or metal
chairs, spacers, metal hangers, supporting wires and
other approved devices of sufficient strength to
resist crushing under full load. Metal chairs which
extend to the surface of the concrete (except where
shown on the plans) and wooden supports, shall not
be used.
Placing bars on layers of fresh concrete as the work
progresses and adjusting bars during the placing of
concrete will not be permitted. Before placing in
the forms, all reinforcing steel shall be cleaned
thoroughly of mortar, oil, dirt, loose mill scale,
loose or thick rust, and coatings of any character
that would destroy or reduce the bond. No concrete
shall be deposited until the placing of the rein-
forcing steel has been inspected and approved.
03 -17/27 3/81
03 -15.7 Splicing
Splices of bars shall be made only where shown on
the plans or as approved by the Engineer. Where
bars are spliced, they shall be lapped at least 36
diameters, unless otherwise shown on the plans.
Splicing shall be accomplished by placing the bars
in contact with each other and wiring them togeth-
er.
Welding of reinforcing steel will not be permitted
unless specifically authorized by the Engineer.
03 -15.8 Bending Reinforcement
Bends and hooks in bars shall be made in the manner
prescribed in the "Manual of Standard Practice" of
the American Concrete Institute.
Bars shall not be bent or straightened in a manner
which will injure the material. Bars with kinks or
unspecified bends shall not be used.
03 -15.9 Welded Wire Fabric
Welded wire fabric shall be spliced not less than
two meshes. It shall be lifted carefully into its
specified position after the concrete is placed but
still plastic.
03 -15.10 Placing Concrete, General
Concrete shall be conveyed, deposited and consoli-
dated by any method which will preclude the segrega-
tion or loss of ingredients.
Chutes used in conveying concrete shall be sloped to
permit concrete of the consistency required to flow
without segregation. Where necessary to prevent
segregation, chutes shall be provided with baffle
boards or a reversed section at the outlet.
Where a sequence for placing concrete is shown on
the plans, no deviation will be permitted unless
approved in writing by the Engineer.
Before depositing concrete, all debris, spreaders,
etc., shall be removed from the space to be occupied
03 -18/27 3/81
by the concrete and forms shall be thoroughly wet-
ted. All free standing water shall be removed.
Reinforcing steel and form shall be free of scale,
oil film, hardened concrete. Formwork shall have
specified coatings.
Concrete shall be deposited as rapidly and as near
as practicable in its final position, and shall not
be caused to flow in a manner to permit or cause
segregation. Runways shall be provided so that
wheelbarrows or buggies containing concrete will not
run over reinforcing steel or planks resting on
steel. Just before placing new concrete on old con-
crete in walls, a modified grout consisting of the
same mix as the concrete minus one -half of the
coarse aggregates shall be deposited to a depth of
six (6) inches before placing the regular concrete
mix. Concrete shall be worked and vibrated mechani-
cally with suitable appliances until it closes snug-
ly against all surfaces and is in perfect and com-
plete contact with all embedded reinforcement and
other metals.
Horizontal construction joints shall have a slurry
coating of 1 -part cement and 3 -parts of sand mixed
with a solution of 1 -part "Acryl 60" to 3 -parts of
water prior to placing modified 6 -inch mix noted
above. This slurry shall be applied by pumping or
other means to assure that about 1/2 - inch thick
coating of the slurry shall cover the surface of the
joint. The 6 -inch thick modified mix noted in the
above paragraph shall follow not more than 60 min-
utes later. "Acryl 60" shall be as manufactured by
Standard Wall Products, Miami, Florida.
03 -15.11 Notification
The Contractor shall give the Engineer written
notice of at least 24 -hours in advance of placing
concrete in any part of the work so that the Engi-
neer may make final inspection of the preparations
of the location fr such placing. No concrete shall
be placed except in the presence of the Engineer.
03 -15.12 Construction Joints
Construction joints shall be placed only in posi-
tions approved by Engineer or as indicated on draw-
ings. Exposed concrete face of construction joints
shall be kept continuously wet from time of initial
03 -19/27 3/81
03 -15.13 Slabs
03 -15.14 Walls
set until pouring of new concrete against it. The
contact surface shall be thoroughly cleaned by chip-
ping the entire surface not earlier than 8 days
after the first pour or jet washing the surface, not
less than 3 -1/2 nor more than 6 -1/2 hours after the
concrete is placed, or by sandblasting. The joint
surface shall consist of clean aggregate solidly
embedded in the mortar matrix. All wash water shall
be entirely removed from the surface. All construc-
tion joints in waterbearing tanks, except joints
above water level, shall have "waterstops" install-
ed; also, any additional ones shown on drawings.
All waterstop splices, joints, corners, or intersec-
tions shall be welded.
Watertight concrete is required for all submerged
structures and waterbearing structures. Any cracks
or imperfections developing at any point shall be
repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Where concrete construction is proposed to be ex-
tended at a later date, the walls and floors shall
be stubbed 24- inches. The contractor shall supply,
and cast -in, screwed insert anchors with protective
plugs in the face of the stub walls and floors. The
contractor shall supply the Owner with the screw -in
re - bar connectors, compatible with the insert
anchor, for use when the construction is extended.
Subgrade shall be in form as shown on drawings to
receive slab concrete. Slabs shall be poured in one
continuous operation between expansion joints.
Walls shall be poured in horizontal layers not to
exceed 18" thickness in such a manner that prevents
segregation of constituents or accumulation of hard-
ened concrete on the forms or metal reinforcement
above the level of the concrete. Total height of
any one pour shall not exceed 12'0 ". Free fall of
concrete into wall forms shall not excess 4'0" with-
out the use of pipes or tremies. Pipes and tremies
shall be at least 6 inches in diameter.
03 - 15.15 Depositing
To avoid segregation, concrete shall be deposited as
near to its final position as is practicable. The
03 -20/27 3/81
use of vibrators for extensive shifting of the mass
of concrete will not be permitted. Concrete that
has partially hardened, has been retempered, or is
contaminated by foreign materials shall not be depo-
sited in the structure.
Concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers inso-
far as practical. Placing shall start at the low
point and proceed upgrade unless otherwise permitted
by the Engineer. Concrete shall be placed in a con-
tinuous operation between construction joints and
shall be terminated with square ends and level tops
unless otherwise shown on the plans.
03 -15.16 Consolidating
Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated in a man-
ner that will encase the reinforcement and inserts,
fill the forms, and produce a surface or even tex-
ture free of rock pockets and excessive voids.
Structural concrete shall be consolidated by means
of high frequency internal vibrators of a type, size
and number approved by the Engineer. The location,
manner and duration of the application of the vibra-
tors shall be such as to secure maximum consolida-
tion of the concrete without separation of the mor-
tar and coarse aggregate, and without causing water
or cement paste to flush to the surface. Internal
vibrators shall not be held against the forms or
reinforcing steel.
The number of vibrators employed shall be sufficient
to consolidate the concrete within 15 minutes after
it has been deposited in the forms. At least two
vibrators in good operating conditions shall be
available at the site of the structure in which more
than 25 cubic yards of concrete is to be placed.
Approved external vibrators for consolidating con-
crete will be permitted when the concrete is not
accessible to internal vibration. Forms and false -
work shall be designed and constructed to resist
displacement or damage from external vibration.
03 -15.17 Walkways
Walkways and platforms shall be provided for person-
nel and equipment at a level convenient for the con-
crete placement and to permit the performance of all
operations necessary for the completion of such work
including finishing.
03 -21/27 3/81
03 -15.18 Placing Concrete Under Adverse Weather Conditions
Concrete for structures shall not be placed on fro-
zen ground nor shall it be mixed or placed while the
atmospheric temperature is below 35 ° F, unless ade-
quate means are employed to heat the aggregates and
water, and satisfactory provisions have been made
for protecting the work.
Concrete slabs shall not be placed on frozen ground,
nor shall concrete be mixed or placed when the at-
mospheric temperature is below 35 ° F, or when condi-
tions indicate that the temperature may fall to 35 ° F
within 24 hours, except with the written permission
of the Engineer and only after such precautionary
measures for the protection of the pavement have
been taken as he may direct.
Concrete shall be effectively protected from freez-
ing or frost for a period of five (5) days after
placing.
Concrete for structures shall not be mixed or placed
while the atmospheric temperature is above 115 ° F un-
less adequate means are employed to cool the aggre-
gate and water and satisfactory provisions have been
made for protecting the work. In any case, tempera-
ture of the concrete as placed shall not exceed
90 ° F. nor be less than 50 ° F.
Concrete placement shall be stopped when rainfall is
sufficient to cause damage to the work.
03 -16 FINISHING TYPES
03 -16.1 General
All finished or formed surfaces shall conform accu-
rately to the shape, alignment, grades, and sections
as shown on the drawings or prescribed by the Engi-
neer. Surfaces shall be free from fins, bulges,
ridges, offsets, honeycombing, or roughness of any
kind, and shall present a finished, smooth, contin-
uous hard surface. All sharp angles shall be round-
ed or beveled. Any formed surface to be painted
shall be free of any material that will be detrimen-
tal to the paint. Defective work shall be treated
as noted elsewhere in this specification.
03 -22/27 3/81
Surfaces not true to elevation or pitched to drain,
where specified, loose or roughened surfaces, and
high points as noted below shall be considered to be
defective work and shall be removed and repaired as
directed by the Engineer.
Top edges of walls, if not otherwise shown on the
drawings, shall be finished with a three - quarter
inch (3/4 ") chamfer edger, the flanges of which
shall be ground to a knife edge to produce as little
a burr as possible. Remaining burrs on the lower
side of the finished chamfer after the form is re-
moved should be rubbed off and the surface left in a
smooth, workmanlike condition.
Refer to Section 03.16.7 for Schedule of Finishes.
03 -16.2 Class - Steel Trowel Finish
The surface shall be steel - troweled to a dense
smooth finish to compact and seal the surface.
Except where required to remove imperfections, a
single -pass trowelling shall be applied.
03 -16.3 Class 2 - Broom Finish
The concrete surface shall first be steel troweled
as specified above and before final set, the surface
shall be slightly roughened by means of a broom or a
burlap mat.
03 -16.4 Class 3 - Ordinary Formed Surface
As forms are removed, the Engineer shall inspect
surface. Any poor joints, voids, honeycombs, or
rock pockets of a minor nature deeper than 1/4 inch
shall be immediately repaired by cutting back to a
full solid surface in a manner to form a key for
grout. Voids shall be filled with nonshrink "Tho-
rite" patching plaster applied according to the
manufacturer's recommendations. All fins or other
undesirable projections shall be chipped back on
interior or exposed surfaces. Form nails, wires, or
any metallic debris shall be removed or set below
the surface and patched with nonshrink "Thorite"
patching plaster. " Thorite" shall be as manufactur-
ed by Standard Dry Wall Products, Miami, Florida, or
approved equal.
03 -23/27 3/81
03 -16.5 Class 4 - Brush Coated for Formed Surfaces
The concrete surface shall first receive the treat-
ment as specified for Class 3 surface treatment.
Immediately thereafter a brush coat of "Thoroseal"
plus "Acryl 60" shall be applied to the surface at
the rate of 2 pounds per square yard and worked into
the minor voids. Overall effect shall be an even
coating showing only brush marks. After one or two
hours, depending on the ambient weather conditions,
use a nylon brush with plain water to work out all
brush marks. "Thoroseal" and "Acryl 60" shall be as
manufactured by Standard Dry Wall Products, Miami,
Florida, or approved equal.
03 -16.6 Class 5 - Plaster Coated Formed Sufaces
The concrete surface shall first receive the treat-
ment as specified for Class 3 surface treatment.
Immediately thereafter the surface shall receive a
finish coating of "Thoroseal" plaster mix applied by
trowel and finished with a rubber Thoro float to a
smooth even textured surface. The "Thoroseal" plas-
ter mix shall be mixed with water and "Acryl 60"
according to the manufacturer's instructions. The
finish coat shall be a minimum of 1/8" in thickness
with a lightly textured grain finish. Color shall
be an off -white as selected by the Engineer. "Tho-
roseal" and "Acryl 60" shall be as manufactured by
Standard Dry Wall Products, Miami,. Florida, or ap-
proved equal.
03 -16.7 Schedule of Finishes
Item Surface Finish
Treatment Plant Exterior, underground Class 3
Treatment Plant Exterior, above grade Class 5
Treatment Plant Interior, above waterline Class 4
Treatment Plant Interior, below waterline Class 3
Walkways Exterior Class 2
Floor Slabs in control building plant shall be Class
2 unless otherwise noted on Drawings.
Surfaces not specifically mentioned shall receive
Class 1 or Class 3 treatment as appropriate except
where otherwise approved by the Engineer.
03 -24/27 3/81
03 -17 OPENINGS FOR INSTALLATION OF,
AND PREPARATION FOR, OTHER WORK
The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact
that openings must be left in structures for the
installation of mechanical equipment, piping and
wiring and that certain mechanical and electrical
appurtenances and foundation anchor bolts are to be
embedded in concrete, and that some of such work is
unavoidably omitted from the drawings.
The Contractor shall examine all drawings to deter-
mine the relation of concrete work with all other
work, and shall attend to the following matters:
Openings shall be left in floor and walls for ducts,
flues, pipes, conduits, etc., required for mechani-
cal, electrical, and plumbing installations. Open-
ings not shown on the drawings or details shall be
subject to approval by the Engineer. Any additional
openings or changes in size or location of the open-
ings shown on the drawings, if deemed necessary by
the Engineer, shall be provided by the Contractor in
proper time to prevent unnecessary cutting of con-
crete work, and no additional payment shall be made
therefor. Wood, if used for pipe holes, shall be
completely removed after the concrete has set. If
metal is used, it shall be removed or cut off as
directed by the Engineer. After piping is install-
ed, concrete shall be filled in solid between the
edge of the hole and the piping, leaving clearance,
where necessary, for contraction and expansion.
Inserts: The Contractor shall organize the setting
and maintaining in all correct positions, all work
required to be embedded in the concrete, and fur-
nished and installed as specified under other sec-
tions of these specifications, including anchor
bolts, anchors, electrical conduits, wood inserts
and nailing blocks, reglets, dovetail slots, pipe
sleeves, thimbles, and other work as required. Wood
inserts and nailing blocks that will be concealed
shall be Wolmanized, or given two (2) coats of creo-
sote oil before placing in forms. Pipes other than
electrical, shall not be permitted in structural
concrete, except where indicated on the drawings.
Where required in slabs, piping shall be located in
center thereof.
03 -25/27 3/81
03 -18 DEFECTIVE WORK
If the defective work is judged by the Engineer to
be major in character or concrete does not conform
with lines shown on drawings, the Contractor will be
required to replace the work or repair it in a man-
ner satisfactory to the Engineer at the Contractor's
expense.
03 -19 TESTS
03 -19.1 General
Testing Laboratory fees will be at the expense of
the Owner. The Contractor shall cooperate and allow
three (3) test cylinders to be taken for each day's
pour of concrete or each 150 cubic yards. The in-
spection of the work and the certification of the
Testing Laboratory or any other body shall not re-
lieve the Contractor of obligation to fulfill his
contract as specified, and defective work shall be
replaced and unsuitable materials may be rejected,
notwithstanding that such defective work or unsuit-
able materials may have been overlooked by the Engi-
neer and the Testing Laboratory.
03 -19.2 Aggregates
Aggregates shall be tested before the concrete mix
is established and, whenever the source of an aggre-
gate is changed for testing, a 10 pound sample of
fine aggregate and a 10 pound sample of each average
quality and grading of the aggregate in question,
shall be delivered to the Testing Laboratory in suf-
ficient time to avoid delay in the work.
03 -19.3 Cylinders
One set of three (3) test cylinders shall be made
for each day's pour of 150 cubic yards or less of
each class of concrete. All testing shall be in
accordance to ASTM lastest revisions thereof.
Cylinders shall be numbered and dated and the point
from which the sample was taken noted. The Owner
will supply the molds. The Engineer will take sam-
ples in accordance with Method for Compression Test
Specimens, ASTM C- 31 -62T, store sample for 24- hours,
and deliver them to the Testing Laborabory. Tests
will be made at 7 day and 28 day age, in accordance
with ASTM C- 39 -64.
03 -26/27 3/81
03 -19.4 Strength
Should the strength of the concrete, as shown by the
test specimens, fall below the specified value, the
Engineer shall have the right to require additional
curing of those portions of the structure represent-
ed by control specimens which failed to show the re-
quired strength. In the event that such additional
curing does not give the strength required, the
Engineer shall have the right to require strengthen-
ing or replacement of those portions of the strut
ture which fail to develop the required strength.
All extra work done as a result of any low strengths
of the control specimens shall be performed at the
expense of the Contractor.
03 - 20 CLEANING
All slabs shall be swept clean and washed prior to
delivery of the completed project to the Owner.
03 -21 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No separate payment for work performed under this
Item. Include cost of same in Contract prices bid
for item of which this work is a component part.
03 -27/27 3/81
SECTION 04 WATER TREATMENT FACILITY
04 -01 GENERAL
The General Contractor shall provide material,
equipment, labor and appurtenances as required for
the construction and erection of a 6.0 MGD solids
contact type upflow clarifier basin, gravity type
filters and, associated appurtenances, as shown on
the project drawings and as specified herein.
Pre - approval of equipment to be bid is required.
Each manufacturer will be required to submit two
weeks prior, all necessary drawings, equipment
brochures, layouts, properly marked up catalog
cut - sheets, design calculations for plant hydrau-
lics, and any other pertinent data which will aid
in the evaluation process.
Any manufacturer requiring alternate basin configu-
ration or layout for his equipment will be respon-
sible for supplying all engineering data, and draw-
ings, and for paying all costs associated with
change of design.
Equipment submittals and shop drawings not approv-
able on the second submission will result in Engi-
neering charges to the manufacturer for subsequent
review.
04 -02 EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE
The clarification basin is an upflow type, and in
accordance with Section .004.(b)(10)(E) of the
Rules and Regulations for Public Water Systems by
the Texas Department of Health, the equipment manu-
facturer shall provide a two (2) year performance
guarantee that water going to the filters will have
a turbidity of less than ten (10) turbidity units.
The equipment supplier for the hydraulically driven
clarifier equipment shall assume unit responsibil-
ity for all rapid mix, flocculation, sludge return
propeller and scraper drive equipment and for all
hydraulic power supply equipment including power
unit, hydraulic motors, piping and accessories.
The filters have been designed for backwashing with
available head and design flow through the plant.
The hydraulic design is critical and the filter
04 -1/35 1 /81
equipment manufacturer will assume unit responsi-
bility for filter operation from the filter inlet
distribution flume through the weir gate in the
flow control box. Should the filters fail to func-
tion as guaranteed by the manufacturer and supplier
of the equipment, the manufacturer will be reponsi-
ble for all labor, material and equipment to modify
the filters to function properly. The equipment
manufacturer will provide a certified letter of
guarantee agreeing to make modifications should
they be necessary. The letter shall be provided
prior to contract award.
04 -03 EQUIPMENT TO BE FURNISHED
04 -03.1 One (1) concrete common wall basin with a 5.5' x
10.0' x 16.5' side wall rapid mix basin, two (2)
72'0" square x 16'6" side wall x 1:12 floor slope
clarifier basin, eighteen (18) 7.11' x 10.0' rec-
tangular filter cells, one (1) 10'0" x 72'0" pipe
gallery, and associated troughs, and appurtenances.
The concrete basin will be designed in accordance
with the project drawings and with Specification
Section 03 - Concrete.
04 -03.2 One (1) rapid mix basin with two (2) mechanical
paddle type rapid mixers.
04 -03.3 Two (2) reactor clarifiers, each with the following
appurtenances:
1 - Steel influent pipe
1 - Hydraulic distribution basin
1 - Flocculation Skirt
1 - Center pier
1 - Sludge recycle propeller and drive
1 - Spur gear drive
1 - Drive cage
2 - Collector arms with corner sweeps
1 - Access and support bridge
1 - Grout retainer /corner sweep wear ring,
1 - Lot of effluent launders with supports
1 - Tank drain /automatic sludge blowdown
4 - Mechanical paddle type flocculators
04 -03.4 One (1) lot of gravity filter equipment to in-
clude:
2 - Filter inlet troughs
18 - Telescoping filter inlet valves with manual
operators
18 - Filter wash troughs
04 -2/35 1/81
1 - Lot of filter anthracite media, filter sand
and filter gravel for eighteen (18) filter
cells
1 - Lot of underdrains for eighteen (18) filter
cells
18 - Backwash valves with pneumatic operators
6 - Filter effluent valves with handwheel opera-
tors
1 - Lot of effluent piping
1 - Flow control weir gate
1 - Lot of backwash waste piping
1 - Automatic filter control
04 -03.5 One (1) lot of appurtenances including access
stairways, access ladders, grating, miscellaneous
structural support members, anchor bolts, fasteners
all hot dip galvanized, aluminum handrails, pipes,
wall sleeves, for a complete plant as shown on the
project drawings.
04 -03.6 Any other items necessary for a complete installa-
tion and operations as shown on the drawings, and/
or as described in these specifications for a com-
plete system - ready to use.
04 -04 OPERATING CONDITIONS .
The proposed water treatment facility will be a
solids contact - upflow clarification unit followed
by gravity filtration. The facility will be de-
signed in strict accordance with the Texas Depart-
ment of Health, Rules and Regulations for Public
Water Systems, and must be approved by the Texas
Department of Health.
04 -3/35 1 /81
Design Criteria:
Design Flow, Qd
Recycle Flow, Qr
Detention Time Rapid
Mix (@ Qd)
Detention Time Rapid
Mix (8 Qd + Qr)
Detention Time Floccula-
tion Zone (8 Qd)
Detention Time Floccula-
tion Zone (@ Qd + Qr)
Detention Time Sedimenta-
tion Zone (@ Qd)
Detention Time Sedimenta-
tion Zone (@ Qd + Qr)
Weir Rate (@ Qd)
Weir Rate (8 Qd + Qr)
Filter Rate
(@ Qd - 9 cells /side)
Filter Rate
(8 Qd - 8 cells /side)
Filter Rate
(8 Qd + Qr - 8 cells/
side)
04 -4/35
Total Per Side
4167 GPM
1040 GPM
1.5 Mins.
1.2 Mins.
45 Mins.
36.2 Mins.
4.14 Hours
3.32 Hours
5682 GPD /LF
7100 GPD /LF
3.26 GPM /SF
3.66 GPM /SF
4.58 GPM /SF
2083 GPM
520 GPM
N/A
N/A
45 Mins.
. 36.2 Mins.
4.14 Hours
3.32 Hours
5682 GPD /LF
7100 GPD /LF
3.26 GPM /SF
3.66 GPM /SF
4.58 GPM /SF
1/81
04 -05 CONSTRUCTION
The water treatment plant unit with reactor clari-
fier, filters, flow control box, and sludge blow -
off manholes shall form a complete process unit.
All structural steel shall conform to ASTM Designa-
tion A -36 and shall have a minimum 1/4" section
thickness.
All welding shall conform to the latest AWS Stan-
dards and shall employ certified welders. All
welding shall be a minimum of 3/16" fillets, and
shall completely seal each joint. No skip welding
will be allowed.
All bolted structural connections shall be gusseted
with minimum 3/8" thick steel plate. Each structu-
ral connection shall have a minimum of two (2) 3/4"
diameter. bolts. Secondary connections shall have a
minimum of two (2) 5/8" diameter bolts.
All non - submerged cast - in - place anchorage shall
conform to ASTM A -307, hot dip galvanized per ASTM
A -153 and A -385.
All submerged drop -in and cast -in -place anchorage
shall conform to Federal Specifications GSA FF -S-
325, Group II, Type 4, Class 1. Anchor bolts to be
303 CG, Clips 304, and nuts and washers 18 -8 stain-
• less steel.
All non - submerged drop -in anchorage shall conform
to ASTM A -325, Type 3 -3, zinc plated per Federal
Specifications QQ -Z -325.
All fasteners, with the exceptions noted above,
shall be hot dipped galvanized per ASTM A -153 and
A -385.
04 -06 INSTALLATION
All of the integral parts of the water treatment
unit shall be installed and erected in accordance
with the manufacturer's printed instructions. It
shall be the Contractor's duty to delineate the
division of authority and responsibility between
himself and the water treatment plant equipment
manufacturer. The water treatment plant equipment
manufacturer shall be considered as a sub- contrac-
tor in all negotiations or other contact between
the Owner, or Owner's representative, and the Con-
tractor.
04 -5/35 1/81
04 -07 REACTOR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT
04 -07.1 General
This section of the specifications consists of the
requirements for the equipment to be supplied for
the reactor clarifier. The equipment shall be fur-
nished by a manufacturer having at least ten (10)
years experience manufacturing similar equipment.
04 -07.2 Equipment Data
Basin Size: 72'0" x 72'0" x 16'6" side wall
Floor Slope: 1" per 12"
Center Pier: 36" diameter
Influent Pipe Size: 18" diameter
Average Side Water Depth: 15.0'
Effluent Launders: 22" wide x 19" deep
Orifice Size: 13/16" diameter
Orifice Spacing: 12" centers
Rapid Mix Volume: 836 CF
Flocculation Skirt Volume: 12,597 CF
Maximum Surface Rate: 0.45 G PM/SF
Rapid Mix velocity Gradient: 400 sec (Max.)
200 sec
Flocculation Velociy Gradient: 80 sec -1
(Max.) 40 sec (Min.)
Recirculation Rate: 100% design flow
(10:1 variable minimum)
Water Temperature: 50 °F
04 -07.3 Center Pier
A circular steel center pier shall be furnished as
shown on the project drawings. The pier shall be
designed to support the drive unit, sludge collec-
tor mechanism, influent well and bridge and to
withstand the stalled torque of the drive.
The center pier shall be fabricated of not less
than 1/4" thick steel plate or 1/4" wall thickness
steel pipe, hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
The pier shall be provided with minimum 5/8" thick
steel plate top and bottom flanges. The top flange
shall be designed for mounting the sludge collector
drive mechanism and shall have a minimum of eight
(8) 3/8" thick steel plate gussets. The bottom
flange shall be anchored to the tank concrete bot-
tom with a minimum of eight (8) 1" diameter anchor
bolts.
04 -6/35 1/81
04 -07.4 Rapid Mix Equipment
There shall be installed, as shown on the project
drawings and as detailed in this specification,
complete vertical paddle type rapid mix units.
Mixers in the basin shall be designed to generate
velocity gradients for the basin as stated in the
equipment data section. Field performance and
testing will be conducted by the equipment manufac-
turer, in the presence of the engineer, to assure
proper energy input to the basin. The drive system
shall be designed and instrumentation provided to
accurately identify basin power input.
04- 07.4.1 Hydraulic Drive
Each of the rapid mix paddles shall be driven by a
properly sized hydraulic motor coupled through a
gear box to the vertical shaft. The vertical drive
shaft shall be in an assembly designed to take the
axial thrust and movements exerted by the paddle
mechanism and prevent these eccentric loads from
being transmitted to the drive motor. The entire
weight of the paddles shall be supported by the
thrust bearing assembly, but guided by a water
lubricated foot guide bearing assembly anchored to
the base of the mixing chamber.
The hydraulic motor shall be of the ball and piston
type and shall be dynamically balanced for smooth
operation within the range of the required operat-
ing speeds. The motor selected shall operate effi-
ciently within required speed range under contin- -
uous torque conditions. The drive units shall be
provided with a flow control valve, pressure gaug-
es, and reverse flow check valves as shown on the
hydraulic schematic.
All fluid drives shall be operated from a common
power unit consisting of three pumps and motors.
Each pump shall be capable of a minimum of 24 gpm
at 1250 psi. The power unit shall include a fluid
reservoir sized to effectively cool and deaerate
the working fluid.
The power unit shall have cooling capability using
an internal water to oil heat exchange.
The reservoir shall have removable end plates for
cleanout, a 100 micron pump inlet strainer, oil
breather, oil level gauge, temperature gauge and a
04 -7/35 1/81
magnetic drain plug. Each axial piston pump shall
be mounted on the reservoir and driven by a 20 HP,
O.D.P., Design B, Class B motor. The pump and •
motor assembly shall be mounted to a common drive
base plate and positively located in position after
assembly to assure the correct shaft alignment.
The power unit will be fitted with an appropriate
pressure relief valve, pressure gauge and snubber
valve, and accessories as shown on the hydraulic
schematic.
04 - 07.4.2 Piping System for Fluid Connectors
The piping system shall be of a closed loop design
to minimize pressure losses within the lines. Pip-
ing to each motor shall be 18 -8 Type 304 stainless
steel rated at 4000 P.S.I. High pressure flexible
hydraulic lines shall complete the connection to
the motors. The flexible hydraulic hose shall be
Synflex 3130 SAE Spec. No. 100R7 with compatible
couplings of same pressure rating. Each line shall'
be equipped with a shut -off valve at the transition
from hard piping to the flexible lines. Low pres-
sure motor case drain lines shall be provided as
needed back to the reservoir. In order to assure a
compatability of design in the hydraulic system,
all piping for the system shall be provided by the
mixer manufacturer.
04- 07.4.3 Component Reliability
A complete three (3) pump system as described above
shall be supplied, installed and connected to the
reservoir to provide complete component reliabil-
ity. A spare hydraulic motor of each type and
model provided shall be included as spare parts.
04- 07.4.4 Paddle Assemblies
The paddle assemblies shall be approximately 4.5
feet diameter, 13 feet long and installed vertical-
ly. The paddles shall be fabricated steel, hot dip
galvanized after fabrication. The assembly shall
be designed to withstand the forces in the basin.
04 07.4.5 Performance and Design Requirements
The manufacturer shall furnish complete design data
demonstrating that the drive components will deli-
ver the required water horsepower to obtain the
specified velocity gradients. The calculations
furnished shall include rotational speeds (RPM),
torque and horsepower calculations, allowances for
04 -8/35 1/81
mechanical efficiencies, drive horsepower selected
and service factors used.
04- 07.4.6 Controls
Overload circuitry and alarms shall be provided for
each unit by the equipment manufacturer for mount-
ing in the main control panel by the General Con-
tractor. The motor starter and running lights for
each 20 H.P. main power unit and the spare power
unit shall be provided and installed by the General
Contractor in the Main Motor Control Center. The
General Contractor shall be responsible for coordi-
nation of all electrical designs so that the equip-
ment for the mixers is compatable with the control
equipment in the Motor Control Center.
04 -07.5 Spur Gear Assembly
The spur gear shall be a cast iron internal gear
totally enclosed in a cast iron housing. The gear
shall be cast from 80 -60 -03 ductile iron with no
visible porosity, defects, or repairs permitted on
the casting. The gear shall have 105 teeth with a
4.50 -inch tooth face on a 42.00 -inch pitch diameter
(diametral pitch = 2.5). The gear teeth shall be
stressed to no more than 1/3 of the yield strength
at the continuous output torque.
The spur gear shall run on a bearing with 48.00 -
inch center distance, having 100 bearing balls.
The bearing balls shall be 1.500 -inch diameter,
Type 52100 steel, though hardened to 60 Rc. The
balls shall roll in a raceway of four replaceable
steel strip liners, 0.3125- inches square, made from
A.I.S.I. 1070 steel, hardened to 46 Rc.
The spur gear housing shall be A.S.T.M. A48 -64
Class 40B high strength cast iron. The housing
shall form a totally enclosed oil bath in which the
gear and bearing are submerged, and shall include a
felt dust seal and a M1020 steel channel anti -tilt
ring. A 3/16" thick checkered hot dip galvanized
steel plate manhole cover shall be provided for the
center of the housing.
The spur gear shall be pinion driven. The pinion
shall be machined from A.I.S.I. 4150 alloy steel,
quenched and tempered to 340 BAN hardness. The
pinion shall have 15 teeth with a 4.50 -inch tooth
04 -9/35 1/81
face on a 6.00 -inch pitch diameter and shall be
mounted on the output shaft of a worm gear reducer.
The pinion shaft shall be A.I.S.I. 1045 cold rolled
steel, 3.00 -inch diameter at the pinion, and 4.25 -
inch diameter at, the drive end.
The worm gear shall be driven by a properly sized
hydraulic motor direct coupled to the input shaft
by a flexible coupling. The hydraulic motor shall
be of the ball and piston type and shall be dynami-
cally balanced for smooth, continuous operation at
the required operating speed. The drive motor
shall be provided with a flow control valve, pres-
sure gauge and a reverse flow check valve. All
fluid drives shall be operated from the common
power unit described in the section of these speci-
fications on the Rapid Mix Equipment.
04 -07.7 Drive Cage
A center drive cage shall be furnished to provide
attachment structure for the sludge collector truss
arms and the influent well support beams. The
drive cage shall be fabricated from minimum 1/4"
thick structural steel shapes and shall be support-
ed from the main spur gear housing mounting pads by
means of a set of four (4) steel hangers fabricated
from minimum 3/8" thick steel angles with a minimum
3/4" thick steel mounting plate and minimum 1 -1/4"
diameter machine bolts. The steel hangers shall be
attached to the drive cage by minimum 3/4" diameter
machine bolts. This bolted connection shall be
gusseted with minimum 1/2" thick steel gusset
plates with the bolts to align with the neutral
axis of the individual members. The drive cage
shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
For the purpose of design, all drive cage members
shall be treated as compression members. Panel
lengths and member sizes shall be selected such
that no individual component in the drive cage
truss has a slenderness ratio exceeding 150.
04 -7.8 Flocculation Skirt
A flocculation skirt, shaped as the frustrum of a
cone, shall be provided for installation at the
center of the reactor - clarifier. The zone defined
by the inside of the skirt shall provide an effec-
tive detention time as stated in the section of
this specification titled Operating Conditions.
04 -10/35 1 /81
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
The flocculation skirt shall be fabricated from
1/4" thick plate, with minimum 1/4" thick structu-
ral steel shapes for stiffeners and trim angles as
required. The flocculation skirt shall be shop
erected and assembled in the minimum number of seg-
ments feasible for shipment. Segments shall be
match - marked for field erection and field welded.
The flocculation zone shall be designed such that a
high energy flocculation zone is set up in the up-
per portion with the energy slowly disipating as
flow reaches the lower portion of the zone, so that
a fully formed floc has developed as the mixture
enters the sludge blanket zone.
Adequate stiffening and bracing shall be provided
to maintain the skirt's shape as shown on the pro-
ject drawings.
04 -07.9 Sludge Collector Arms
The collector shall be furnished with two (2) fab-
ricated steel collector arms. The arms shall be of
a box construction with a horizontal top cord and
with the bottom cord conforming to the slope of the
tank floor. The collector arm shall be rigidly at-
tached to the drive cage with heavy bolted connec-
tions and shall not rely on rods or turnbuckles for
support or take -up. Provision shall be made to
hinge the bottom cord attachments and steel shims
shall be incorporated in the top cord attachment so
that the arms may be accurately leveled.
The arms shall be fabricated with a minimum of 1/4"
thick rolled shapes and a minimum of 3/8" thick
plate elements. The minimum shape used shall be a
2 x 2 x 1/4" steel angle. Each arm shall be de-
signed with flights to fully sweep the tank floor
twice with each revolution of the mechanism. The
steel flights shall not be less than 6 inches deep,
fabricated of a minimum of 1/4" thick steel plate.
The collector arms shall be hot dip galvanized
after fabrication and shall be bolted together in
the field.
Each flight shall be fitted with adjustable 26
gauge spring brass squeegees projecting 2 inches
below each flight and attached with 1/2" diameter
fasteners.
For the purposes of design, all structural members
of the collector arms will treated as potential
compression elements. The radius of the unbraced
04 -11/35 1/81
1
length to the least radius of gyration for angles
t about the Z -Z axis shall not exceed 150 for any
member.
' Additionally, all structural members and connec-
tions shall be designed so that the unit stresses
will not exceed AISC allowables as set forth in
Table 1 -36 of the Steel Construction Manual.
Design loading for structural analysis shall be
taken as all dead loads, plus a live load equal to
2.25 times the continuous output torque rating of
the gear drive. (1.5 times a cut out torque equal
to 150% of the continuous rated output torque).
1 Submittal information for the drive cage shall in-
clude the design criteria (loads, unit stresses,
' allowable stresses, slenderness ratios, and deflec-
tion under load) and drawings indicating all dimen-
sions and member sizes.
' Each collector arm shall have a pivoting corner
sweep mechanism designed to sweep the settled
sludge from the corners of the clarifier which ap-
proximates a square. Each corner sweep mechanism
shall consist of a boom with a scraping flight con-
nected by two (2) pivoting arms to the end of the
flight arm. One (1) pivot arm is' fitted with a
sprocket which is connected via pintle chain to a
counterweight. This weight forces the outboard end
' of the boom, which is fitted with a guide wheel,
against the vertical wall of the clarifier tank.
The corner sweep boom shall be fitted with an ad-
justable squeegee.
The pivoting arms and the booms shall be fabricated
of tubular steel shapes with a minimum 3/16" wall
thickness. All welding shall be minimum 3/16" fil-
let welds and shall be continuous and shall com-
pletely seal the tubular members.
1 All bearings shall have cast iron or stainless
steel housings and shall incorporate a special
' liner material suitable for non - lubricated under-
water application. The bearing liner material
shall be reinforced teflon, Ryertex Grade C lami-
nated, or an approved equal.
All shafting shall be 18 -8, Type 304 solid stain-
less steel. All shafts shall be fitted with bronze
1 04 -12/35 1 /81
1
thrust washers, slotted take -up nuts, lock bolts
and pins. The shafting shall be adjustable allow-
ing the entire mechanism to be set to maintain the
sweep boom and squeegee in a horizontal plane pro-
viding smooth operation throughout the entire range
of travel. All shafting shall be replaceable.
The inboard ends of the pivoting arms shall be fit-
ted with a heavy steel pivot shaft extending the
full depth of the flight arm. This pivot shaft
shall consist of a circular steel tube with 2" dia-
meter stainless steel stub shafts at each end. The
stub shafts are supported by and rotate in bearings
rigidly bolted to the flight arm. The outboard
ends of the pivoting arms shall support the corner
sweep boom through 1 -1/2" diameter pivoting shafts.
These shafts shall be secured to the end of the arm
and the boom by bearings, which allow the boom to
pivot while providing a raking surface which moves
settled sludge toward the center of the tank. The
boom shall consist of a structural tubing support
section with an adjustable 26 gauge spring brass
squeegee bolted through a steel backing plate fast-
ened to the tubing by a steel angle. A fabricated
guide wheel shall be fitted to the outboard end of
the boom and shall be designed to roll against the
vertical edge of the tank which approximates a
square shape. The counterweight mechanism shall be
designed to provide sufficient force to maintain
contact of the guide wheel with the wall in all
positions with a loading of 25.0 pounds per foot
along the boom length. The wheel will be attached
to the boom through a 1 -1/2" diameter replaceable
shaft which rotates in two bearings bolted to the
boom.
The counterweight mechanism shall operate through a
chain and sprocket linkage.
The sprockets used in the operating mechanism shall
be deep chilled cast pearlitic malleable iron with
type C hubs key seated to the shafting and located
with Type 304 stainless steel retaining pins.
Type H -78 promal iron pintle chain shall be used to
connect a weighted pendant to a cross shaft mounted
in pillow block bearings rigidly attached to the
flight arm top chord. An additional chain segment
shall connect the opposite end of the cross shaft
sprocket to a sprocket keyed to the active pivot
arm using a special 90 rotating chain link.
04 -13/35 1/81
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
04 -07.10 Launders
Steel inboard weir troughs shall be supplied and
located as shown on the Plans. The troughs shall
be fabricated in chord sections for field assembly
and shall be sized as indicated in the data section
of this specification. Two (2) chord sections
shall be provided with effluent flumes. The
troughs shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrica-
tion.
Troughs shall be adequately braced and supported so
that a deflection of less than 1/4" shall occur at
any point on the troughs with the tanks full and
the troughs empty. Bracing shall be adequate to
maintain a true, straight weir edge.
Knee braces shall be fabricated from structural
steel angles and shall be anchored to the tank wall
with a minimum of three (3) 3/4" diameter anchor
bolts.
Trough sections will be spliced over knee braces
only. Troughs will be provided with submerged ori-
fices sized and spaced as specified in the data
section (04- 07.2). Troughs shall be shimmed and
leveled such that the horizontal centerline of the
orifices are at a constant elevation the entire
trough length.
04 -07.11 Access Bridge
An access bridge shall be provided for the reactor
clarifier unit. The bridge shall be hot dip galva-
nized after fabrication from structural steel sec-
tions, interlaced for rigidity with minimum 1/4"
thickness structural steel shapes. The bridge
shall span across approximately the full basin
width, supported on each end by the basin wall.
The bridge shall be designed and constructed so
that the maximum deflection shall not exceed 1/800
of the span, with all dead loading, torque loading,
and a live load of 30 pounds per square foot. The
bridge shall be anchored at the one (1) end, and
slide plates shall be provided at the opposite tank
wall to allow for thermal expansion.
The access walkway shall be a minimum of 3'0" wide
and shall consist of removable steel grating sec-
tions of 1-1/4." x 3/16" x 1" clear spacing, hot
dipped galvanized, complete with standard galvaniz-
ed hold -down clips. Removable grating sections
04 -14/35 1/81
shall not exceed 5 ft. lengths and shall be recess-
ed flush with bridge beam. Sections shall be
straight and true.
The bridge shall be provided with handrails along
both sides. Handrails shall be two -rail type with
the top rail extending 3'6" above the bridge deck,
fabricated of 1.9" O.D. (1 -1/2" nominal) aluminum
pipe.
Bridge and slide plate anchor bolts shall be no
less than 5/8" diameter.
An access walkway and support bridge shall be pro-
vided perpendicular to the main bridge for support-
ing the flocculator units as shown on the project
drawings and to provide a working area for mainte-
nance of these units.
04 -07.12 Automatic Sludge Blow -Down
The automatic sludge blow -down will consist of a 4"
plug valve with a pneumatic operator connected by
4" piping to the tank drain line, upstream of the
tank drain valve. The operation of the blow -down
valve will be controlled by a 24 hour time clock
with interval set points and a 0 -15 minute duration
timer. At preset intervals, the controller will
actuate the interval timer and a three -way solenoid
valve which will open the sludge blow -down valve.
Upon completion of the waste interval, the duration
timer will actuate the three -way solenoid valve to
close the blow -down valve and reset for blow -down
sequence at the next interval on the 24 hour timer. .
An BOA switch will be provided for automatic or
manual control of the blow -down operation. All
controls will be located in the main control cen-
ter.
04 -07.13 Vertical Paddle Flocculators
There shall be installed, as shown on the project
drawings and as detailed in these specifications,
complete vertical paddle type flocculator units.
Paddles shall be designed to generate velocity gra-
dients for each stage under the conditions stated
in the Equipment Data section of these specifica-
tions.
Field performance and testing will be conducted by
the equipment manufacturer to assure proper energy
04 -15/35 1/81
input to the basin. Calculations of energy re-
quirements will be by the flat plate drag force
method. The drive system shall be so designed
and instrumentation provided to accurately iden-
tify basin power input.
Equipment furnished under this section shall be
fabricated, hot dip galvanized after fabrication,
assembled, erected and placed in proper operating
condition in full conformity with detailed draw-
ings, specifications, engineering data, instruc-
tions and recommendations furnished by the equip-
ment manufacturer.
Flocculator equipment shall be designed, arrang-
ed, and constructed for installation and opera-
tion in the flocculation zone of each basin as
shown on the drawings.
The mechanism shall be the center drive type with
a vertical output shaft supported on stationary
beams spanning the tank. The paddle equipment
shall be designed so that it will safely clear
all equipment in the tanks while rotating.
04- 07.13.1 Hydraulic Drive
Each of the flocculator paddles shall be driven
by properly sized hydraulic motor connected to
a vertical shaft through a gear box. The verti-
cal drive shaft shall be in an assembly designed
to take the axial thrust and movements exerted by
the paddle mechanism and prevent these eccentric
loads from being transmitted to the drive motor
and gear box. The entire weight of the paddles
shall be supported by the thrust bearing assem-
bly.
The hydraulic motor shall be of the ball and pis-
ton type and shall be dynamically balanced for
smooth operation within the range of the required
operating speeds. The motor selected shall oper-
ate efficiently within required speed range under
continuous torque conditions. The drive units
shall be provided with a flow control valve,
pressure gauges, and reverse flow check valves as
shown on the hydraulic schematic.
All fluid drives shall be operated from common
power units, each rated at a minimum of 24 GPM,
at 1250 psi. The common power unit is described
in the section of these specifications for Rapid
Mix Equipment.
04 -16/35 1/81
04- 07.13.2 Piping System for Fluid Connectors
The piping system shall be of a closed loop de-
sign to minimize pressure losses within the
lines. Piping to each motor shall be 18 -8 Type
304 stainless steel rated at 4000 PSI. High
pressure flexible hydraulic lines shall complete
the connections to the motors. The flexible
hydraulic hose shall be Synflex 3130 SAE Spec.
No. 100R7 with compatible couplings of same pres-
sure rating. Each line shall be equipped with a
shut -off valve at the transition from hard piping
to the flexible lines. Low pressure motor case
drain lines shall be provided as needed back to
the reservoir. In order to assure a compatabil-
ity of design in the hydraulic system, all piping
for the system shall be provided by the mixer
manufacturer.
04- 07.13.3 Component Reliability
A complete standby pumping system as described
above shall be supplied, installed and connected
to the reservoir to provide complete component
reliability. A spare hydraulic motor of each
type and model provided shall be included as
spare parts.
04- 07.13.4 Paddle Arms
Each paddle arm shall be fabricated from steel
angle and shall bolt to the shaft attachment
plate with a minimum of three (3) 5/8" diameter
bolts. Additionally, there shall be furnished
diagonal angle bracing such that a rigid frame is
formed for attaching the redwood paddles. The
minimum member used for the frame shall be 2 x 2
x 1/4 steel angle and the ratio of unbraced
length to the least radius of gyration (for
angles about the Z -Z axis) shall not exceed 150
for any member. Each redwood paddle shall be
bolted in a vertical position against the paddle
arms with a minimum of four (4) 1/2" diameter
stainless steel bolts, nuts, and washers. All
steel will be hot dipped galvanized after fabri-
cation.
All structural steel used shall conform to ASTM
Designation A -36. All welding shall be contin-
uous seal welding to the latest AWS Standards and
shall be performed by certified welders. Wood
selected for paddles shall be 2 -inch nominal
thickness and minimum 6" nominal width select
clear heart redwood.
04 -17/35 1/81
04- 07.13.5 Sludge Recycle Propeller
•
The propeller shall be a marine type, designed to
produce high volume pumping capacity with a mini-
mum of turbulence. The propeller shall be de-
signed to produce a uniform velocity across the
entire diameter of the propeller. The propeller
shall be designed with blades having constant
pitch, variable angle of attachment and variable
width to provide the high flow and uniform velo-
city distribution. The assembled propeller shall
be attached to the shaft using a key, designed to
transmit the torque and support the weight of the
propeller. The assembly shall be hot dip galva-
nized after fabrication.
Propeller shall be sized to pump 200 gpm flow of
water and shall be hydraulically driven.
Each of the propellers shall be driven by a pro-
perly sized hydraulic motor connected to a verti-
cal shaft through a gear box. The vertical drive
shaft shall be in an assembly designed to take
the axial thrust and movements exerted by the
propeller mechanism and prevent these eccentric
loads from being transmitted to the drive motor
and gear box. The entire weight of the propeller
shall be supported by the thrust bearing assem-
bly.
The hydraulic motor shall be of the ball and pis-
ton type and shall be dynamically balanced for
' smooth operation within the range .of the required
operating speeds. The motor selected shall oper-
ate efficiently within required speed range under
continuous torque conditions. The drive units
shall be provided with a flow control valve,
pressure gauges, and reverse flow check valves as
shown on the hydraulic schematic.
All fluid drives shall be operated from common
power units, each rated at a minimum of 24 GPM,
at 1250 psi. The common power unit is described
in the section of these specifications for Rapid
Mix Equipment.
04 -18/35 1/81
04- 07.13.6 Performance and Design Requirements
The manufacturer shall furnish complete design
data demonstrating that the drive components will
deliver the required water horsepower to obtain
the G valves (velocity gradient) specified. The
calculations furnished shall include tip speeds,
paddle area, torque and horsepower computations,
allowances for mechanical efficiencies, and drive
horsepower selected. For purposes of design, the
total paddle displacement area shall be determin-
ed by multiplying the actual, not nominal, width
of each blade furnished by the total length.
Areas of other members such as paddle arms and
support bracing shall not be included.
Design data and computations upon which the de-
. sign of the paddle wheels are based shall be fur-
nished with the bid.
04- 07.13.7 Controls
Controls for the power supply shall be as speci-
fied in these specifications in the section for
Rapid Mix Equipment.
04 -07.14 Sample Lines
A minimum of five (5) sample lines shall be pro-
vided and installed in the reactor clarifier.
Sample lines shall be 18 -8, Type 304, 3/4" mini-
mum diameter tubing. The sample lines shall be
installed as follows: two (2) to the floccula-
tion zone; two (2) to the lower section of the
clarifier (sludge blanket area), and; one (1) at
the clarifier surface.
04 -08 FILTER EQUIPMENT
04 -08.1 General
This section of the specifications consists of
the equipment to be supplied for the filter. The
equipment shall be furnished by a manufacturer
having at least five (5) years experience manu-
facturing similar equipment. The manufacturer
must have furnished at least three (3) similar
installations, all of which to have been in oper-
ation at least two (2) years.
04 -19/35 1/81
No common walls will be provided between treated
filtered water and water in any prior state of
treatment or any backwash waste water.
Individual filter cell backwash initiation shall be
automatic by interval timing or by headloss over-
ride or by manual push- button as selected by the
operator. The headloss indicators shall be adjust-
able and shall have alarm contacts. Upon comple-
tion of the backwash cycle, independent of mode of
initiation of the backwash cycle, the unit shall
automatically return to service.
Each filter cell shall be capable of being back -
washed independently without interruption of normal
operation of any of the other filter cells.
The filter cells shall be designed such that no
more than three (3) cells have to be taken out of
service at one time for filter repair.
04 - 08.2 Equipment Data
Inlet Tel -Valve Size: 8 inches
Backwash Waste Valve Size: 16 inches
Effluent Valve Size: 18 inches
Backwash Line Size: 18 i�inches
Depth Anthracite Media: 18 inches
Depth Sand Media: 12 inc es
Depth Gravel (above top of underdrain): 6 inches
Size Drain Line: 3 inches
04 - 08.3 Filter Inlet Control Valve
Filter rate of flow control valves shall be tele-
scoping valves and shall be installed to mating
pipe, sized as shown on the drawings and shall be
the standard product of an original equipment manu-
facturer with proven experience in building similar
equipment. The telescoping valve shall be complete
with a flow control orifice with a maximum allow-
able flow of 5- GPM /S.F. of filter bed. The equip-
ment furnished shall be fabricated, assembled,
erected and placed in proper operating condition in
full conformity with detail drawings, specifica-
tions, engineering data, instructions, and recom-
mendations furnished by the equipment manufactur-
er.
04 -20/35 1/81
The telescoping valve shall be furnished as a com-
plete assembly including a receiving tube, stain-
less steel slip tube, flow control orifice in tube,
companion flange and seal, operating stem, opera-
tor, anchorage and fasteners.
The receiving tube shall be fabricated standard
weight steel pipe with nominally sized steel flang-
es on each end. The receiving tube shall be fur-
nished with attaching bolts and gaskets to mate
with the pipe shown on the plans. The receiving
tube shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrica-
tion.
The slip tube shall be fabricated of 14 gauge type
304 stainless steel rolled and welded to form the
required O.D. for a close fit to the receiving
pipe. After fabrication the weld bead shall be
ground flush and the tube polished smooth. A
stainless steel bail shall be welded to the slip
tube for attaching the lift rod. The bail shall be
mounted in a manner that will allow for the full
discharge around the circumference of the tube.
The top of the tube shall be adequately stiffened
to prevent deflection of the tube in raising or
lowering the tube. Neither the stiffening nor the
bail shall interfere with flow into the tube.
A minimum 1" diameter brass or stainless steel ris-
ing stem shall bolt to the bail.
Sealing of the slip tube with the receiving tube
shall be accomplished by a 1/2" square teflon pack-
ing ring retained in place by a specially machined
companion flange. The entire seal assembly shall
be built to close tolerances with mating parts
finished in a manner sufficient to prevent leakage
around the sliding joint. The seal shall be easily
replaceable in the field and the manufacturer shall
furnish one additional 1/2" square teflon packing
ring.
The slip tube shall be fitted with an orifice sized
to cause excessive headloss in the tel -valve when
flow though the tube reaches a valve equal to 5.0
gpm /ft. of filter area. A high water probe
shall be installed in the distribution trough which
will sound an alarm in the filter control panel
should this situation occur.
04 -21/35 1 /81
A control panel and high pressure air source shall
be furnished as specified. Solenoid valves shall
have epoxy encapsulated coils and be mounted on
junction boxes, tubed and wired to terminal blocks
to facilitate field installation. All valves shall
have manual operators also.
04 -08.4 Filter Media
The media for the filter units shall be obtained
from an approved source and shall be of first -
class quality, thoroughly washed and properly grad-
ed and shall include the supporting bed and filtra-
tion media in accordance with the following speci-
fications. A11•filter media shall be shipped in
one cubic foot bags, tagged as to the contents.
04- 08.4.a Supporting Bed
The filter shall be provided with a graded gravel
supporting bed consisting of properly graded layers
of gravel. The gravel bed shall be as follows:
Layer & Depth Passing Screen Retained on Screen
Bottom 10" 1/2" 1/4"
Next 3" 1/4" 1/8"
Top 3" $6 *12
There shall not be more than eight percent (8 %),
by weight, finer or coarser gravel than limits
specified above for each gravel.
The gravel shall consist of hard rounded stones
with an average specific gravity of not less
than 2.5. Not more than one percent (1%) by
weight of material to have a specific gravity of
2.25 or less. The gravel shall contain no more .
than two percent (2 %), by weight, of thin flat
or elongated pieces (pieces in which largest
dimension exceeds the smallest three times) as
determined by hand picking. Material to be free
of shale, mica, clay, sand, loam, calcareous or
organic impurities of any kind.
The porosity shall be not less than 35 percent
nor more than 45 percent.
04 -22/35 1/81
04- 08.4.b Filter Media
The procurement and installation of filtering
material shall be accomplished under the provi-
sions of AWWA Specifications B100 -72, as amended
by the specifications. The filter media shall
include two (2) layers, a top layer of anthra-
cite coal supported by a bottom layer of filter
grade sand.
04- 08.4.b.1 Anthracite
04- 08.4.b.2 Sand
The solubility as determined by AWWA B100 -72
shall not exceed ten percent (10 %) for gravel
3/8" and larger or five percent (5 %) for gravel
smaller than 3/8 ".
Anthracite filter media shall be furnished in a
single size range and installed in a single lay-
er 18" deep over the filter sand and shall be
obtained from approved sources normally engaged
in the preparation of filter media. The anthra-
cite shall have an effective size of 1.0 to 1.4
mm and a uniformity coefficient of 1.35 to 1.6.
The depth of anthracite shall be determined by
measurement after three (3) backwashes, at a
rate to allow 40% bed expansion and allowing the
bed to compact to slow closure of the backwash
valve.
The anthracite shall be specifically selected
and graded having a Mohr scale hardness of 3.0
to 3.75. The media shall be free of iron, sul-
phides, clay, shale, dirt and other extraneous
materials.
The solubility, when determined under AWWA B100-
72, shall be less than three percent (3 %).
The supporting bed of filter grade sand shall
have a depth of 12 ", shall be clean sand, unus-
ed, free from organic materials, calcium carbo-
nate or limestone, soapstone, or shale. The
sand shall have an effective size of 0.45 to
0.55 mm and uniformly coefficient of 1.24 to
1.37. The sand shall be carefully placed to
avoid damage to the filter underdrain system.
04 -23/35 1/81
Workmen shall not stand or walk directly on the
media but on a board which will sustain their
weight without displacing the media.
The solubility when determined under AWWA B100-
72, shall be less than five percent (5 %).
04 -08.5 Underdrains
The filters shall be equipped with false bottom
underdrains consisting of a folded 12 gauge Type
304 stainless steel plate. The underdrain plate
shall have 5/32" diameter holes uniformly spaced
at 1 -1/8" centers. Holes shall be drilled or
punched in the plate and shall be free from
burrs on both sides of the plate.
The underdrain plates shall be secured into
place by means of a clamping bar overlapping the
edge tabs of each plate and secured to'the floor
by 3/8" diameter x 4" long S.S. drill -in type
expansion anchors. The clamping bar shall be
3/16" thickness x 3" wide, 18 -8, Type 304 stain-
less steel.
The ends of the underdrain plates shall be posi-
tively sealed by welding a 12 gauge plate across
each end of the underdrain.
04 -08.6 Wash Water Troughs
Wash water troughs may be either stainless steel
or fiberglass at the Contractor's option. The
troughs selected shall conform to one (1) of the
following two (2) specifications:
04- 08.6.1 Stainless Steel Wash Troughs
The filter wash trough shall be formed from a
minimum 11 gauge (1/8 ") A.I.S.I. Type 304 stain-
less steel with a 2B mill finish. The top edge
of the trough shall have provision for mounting
an adjustable stainless steel weir and stiffen-
ing angle which shall be formed from a minimum 9
gauge Type 304 -2B stainless steel to a 4" x 2"
angle. The weir shall mount on the outside of
the trough with minimum 1/2" diameter fasteners
on maximum 12" centers. The weir trough will be
fitted with 1/2" diameter stiffening rods ex-
tending across the trough at 24 inches on cen-
ter. The rod shall pass through a 1" nominal
04 -24/35 1/81
Schedule 10 S.S. pipe sleeve cut to fit the
1
inside dimensions of the trough so that the
assembly braces the sides of the trough. All
fasteners, rods and washers shall be A.I.S.I.
Type 304 stainless steel.
The discharge end of the trough shall have a
' flange at the open end for mounting the trough
on the vertical filter wall. The opposite end
shall be blinded off with an end plate of a min-
' imum 10 gauge material welded to the trough.
Slotted mounting holes shall be provided to bolt
the blind end to the concrete basin, to allow a
minimum vertical level adjustment of one inch.
All anchorage shall be provided by the equipment
manufacturer and shall be A.I.S.I. Type 304
stainless steel.
The trough shall be designed to structurally
withstand all loads imposed during the backwash -
ing operation with substantially no deflections.
The trough shall be sized such that there is a
minimum 6" free discharge over the flat crested
weir at a backwash rate of 25 GPM /sq. ft. of
filter area. Also, there 'shall be a maximum of
3'0" horizontal travel from any point in the
filter to the trough edge.
04- 08.6.2 Fiberglass Wash Troughs
1 The filter wash troughs shall be laminated of
fiberglass reinforced polyester resin to an eve-
1
rage thickness of 1/4 ". The inside surface of
each trough shall have a smooth white gel coat
finish with no exposed glass fibers. The out-
' side surface of each trough shall be resin seal-
ed. All fasteners shall be 18 -8 Type 304 stain-
less steel.
1 The troughs shall have flat bottom and vertical
sides. Top edges of the troughs shall be
straight with no more than 1/16" deviation from
' a true plane. Longitudinal stiffening ribs
shall be integrally molded on the outside of the
troughs to assure rigidity. Sufficient plastic
1 spacer rods shall be included to maintain a uni-
form width over the length of the trough.
1
1 04 -25/35 1 /81
1
Troughs shall be designed to support the applied
water loadings at each location and shall be
made of laminate with the following physical
properties:
Tensile strength: 14,000 psi
Flexural strength: 25,000 psi
Flexural modulus: 1.0 x 10 psi
A 2" wide x 1/2" thick flange shall be molded to
the open end of the trough for mounting the
trough on the vertical filter wall. Slotted
holes shall be provided in the closed end to
allow a minimum vertical level adjustment of one
inch.
Troughs shall be set in place with weir edges to
elevations shown on plans. Weir edges should be
leveled to within 1/16" of level over their en-
tire length. Troughs shall be grouted in place
after leveling. Grout collars shall be provid-
ed.
04 -08.7 Filter Piping, Valves and Fittings
The filter piping and valves shall
as shown on the drawings and shall
the required valves for performing
return to service of the filters.
be of minimum size as indicated on
ings.
be arranged
include all
backwash and
Piping shall
the draw-
All piping and fittings necessary for the opera-
tion of the filter units shall be included.
Steel pipe and fittings shall be Mall Type con-
forming to AWWA C202, Grade B, requirements,
standard weight or minimum 0.25 inch wall thick-
ness.
Steel pipe flanges shall be ASTM A181, Grade I,
ASA B16.5, 150 lb., slip -on flat face type with
concentric serrated finish. Gaskets shall con-
form to AWWA C500, latest revision and shall be
rubber type.
Sleeve couplings shall be Smith Blair Type 411,
or equal, steel couplings with minimum 1/4" wall
thickness. Flanged coupling adapters shall be
Smith Blair Type 913, or equal, steel adapter
sized to fit the pipe supplied.
04 -26/35 1/81
All steel piping, fittings, and supports will be
hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. And
flanges will be checked to be installed square
and true prior to shipment to jobsite.
The gaskets and sealants shall be among those
listed under Category 14 of the "List of Accept-
ed Equipment for Interstate Carriers Use" as
published by the Public Health Service, U. S.
Department of Health, Education and Welfare.
Filter backwash control valves and filter efflu-
ent valves shall be sized and located as shown
on the drawings. Valves shall be wafer type,
rubber - seated butterfly valves conforming to
AWWA C504, latest revision. Valve shall conform
to AWWA Class 150B.
Filter backwash valves will be automatically
operated with double- acting pneumatic cylinder
actuators.
Filter effluent valves will be manually operated
with geared handwheel operators. Filter back-
wash valves to be lug style. Filter effluent
valves to be wafer style. Valves to have semi -
steel body with Nordel EPT shaft seals and resi-
lient seats. Valves to have semi -steel disc
with a welded nickel edge, 416 stainless steel
shaft and bronze bearings.
Solenoid valves shall have epoxy encapsulated
coils and be mounted on junction boxes, tubed
and wired to terminal blocks to facilitate field
installation. All valves shall have manual
operators also.
04 -08.8 Backwash Head Control Gate
A backwash head control gate shall be furnished
as shown on the project drawings. The gate sup-
plied shall be a downward opening special weir
type slide gate fabricated from stainless steel
or aluminum. The gate shall have special seal
along the invert and sides to prevent leakage
and shall be used as an adjustable weir. The
gate shall be sized to provide a clear opening
between sides of 4'0" and shall have a minimum
vertical adjustment of 5'0 ".
04 -27/35 1/81
The gate supplied shall be a Waterman Model R
Slide Gate or approved equal. The gate will be
equipped with a crank type geared operator with
operator stand, a stem cover, and a position
indicator. The control weir is adjustable in
elevation in order to change the filter backwash
head and rate.
The position indicator shall read in inches of
backwash head and indicate flow rates for back-
wash in GPM and GPM /SF. of filter bed.
04 -08.9 Filter Backwash Recirculation Pump
Refer to Section 06 - 06 - Backwash Return Pump.
04 -08.10 Filter Backwash Control Center
04- 08.10.1 General
The filter control station shall be assembled
and pre -wired at the factory and shall be ship-
ped to the jobsite as a complete unit, ready for
field installation. The control station will be
mounted on the treatment plant structure as
shown on the project drawings. In order to
assure that the control unit not be subject to
corrosion, the station will be housed in a
weather-tight panel.
04- 08.10.2 Backwash Control Sequence
The primary backwash control for the filters
will be a 7 -day timer which initiates the back-
wash cycle on individual filters at preset time
intervals. An adjustable high water (head loss)
indicator will be located in each individual
cell that will override the 7 -day timer signal
and initiate the backwash cycle in the particu-
lar cell with high water level.
Additionally, each cell will have a switch which
will allow the filter to be backwashed in a man-
ual mode.
Interlocks will be provided to prevent more than
one filter compartment from backwashing at the
same time in either automatic or manual mode of
operation. Signals from any of the individual
cells to backwash during the period any one cell
04 -28/35 1/81
is backwashing will be put into a holding mode
so that the backwash cycle of that cell will
start after completion of the cycle in pro-
gress.
Upon completion of the backwash cycle, indepen-
dent of the mode of initiation, the unit will
automatically return to service. Override of
the base backwash circuitry by high water back-
wash signal or by manual backwash operation will
automatically reset the normal sequence (inter-
val timed mode) backwash program to the begin-
ning of interval position.
04- 08.10.3 Backwash Operation Sequence
Individual compartment backwash initiation shall
be automatic by interval timer, automatic by
head loss override, or manual. The sequence of
events in the backwash cycle will be as fol-
lows:
1. Signal the filter backwash to waste valve to
open, and;
2. Start operation of a 0 -15 minute, adjustable,
duration timer which will control the dura-
tion of the backwash cycle for the cell.
The timer would, upon completion of the
backwash cycle duration;
3. Close the filter backwash to waste valve,
and;
4. At the end of this sequence, the controls
would reset to initial start position for
next complete backwash cycle.
04- 08.10.4 Backwash Control Equipment
The filter equipment manufacturer shall furnish
a complete filter control system, factory pre -
wired and tested, ready for field installation
and operation. A separate control panel shall
be furnished for each of the two (2) independent
tranes.
The backwash control panel shall be in a 24" x
48" x 9" pedestal mounted, weather -tight enclo-
sure and shall be a Preucon Model No. PC6614 or
04 -29/35 1/81
approved equal. The panel shall be complete
with a seven (7) day timer, bubbler tube type
liquid level sensors and level indicator, manual
controls, valve position, indicator, backwash -
in- progress indicators, limit switches, inter-
locks, interval timer, and required reset re-
lays. The panel face will have the following
items for each filter cell:
1 - Backwash Waste Valve Open Indicator
1 - Backwash Waste Valve Closed Indicator
1 - Liquid Level Alarm Indicator
1 - Liquid Level Indicator
1 - Backwash -in- Progress Indicator
1 - Manual Backwash Cycle Start Button
1 - Differential pressure sensor to gauge loss
of head in each cell
1 - Pressure gauge to indicate loss of head in
each filter cell
Individual components used in the panel will be
equal to the following:
- The manual start button shall be a Pneucon
Model CBU3A Flush -Head Pushbutton.
- Limit switches shall be Pneucon Model CLV5
heavy duty cam valve with spring return.
- Timer shall be Pneucon Model CTV.
- Step programmer shall be Pneucon Model CSP
Programmer.
- The control power valve shall be a 4 -way foot
mount Model 408E -1A9A spring return valve by
Automatic Valve Corporation.
- Actuators for filter inlet valves to be Alkon
Model D96- SE- DC -36, 3 -1/2" Bore, 36" Stroke.
- Actuators for filter backwash waste valves
shall be Alkon Model 408B35- 1A -9A.
04- 08.10.5 Instrument Air Compressor
The filter equipment manufacturer shall furnish
a skid mounted air compressor to supply instru-
ment air to all controls for the plant expansion
and for existing controls.
04 -30/35 1/81
The compressor supplied shall be an oil -less
twin unit model. The unit shall be a Gast Model
5HCD- 31- M500X, or equal. The unit will be a
twin cylinder unit, mounted on an 80 gallon ASME
tank. The compressor will be complete with a
3/4 HP, 1725 RPM, Single Phase, 230V, TEFC
motor. The compressor shall produce 2.5 CFM
free air at 100 psig. The compressor will
include thermal protection, filter, safety
valve, check valve, pressure regulator, and
repair kit.
The compressor shall be furnished with an air
dryer equal to Pneumatech Model 515 -A.
The Contractor shall supply air flow regulating
and air pressure reducing valves as required to
supply proper operating air to each valve.
04 08.10.6 Backwash Rate Indicator
A gauge shall be provided in the filter control
box that will indicate the level of water up-
stream of the control gate. The gauge shall be
calibrated and gauged to indicate backwash flow
to the filter cell in gpm /ft. . Calibra-
tion will be based on varified field tests con-
ducted by the manufacturer of the filter equip-
ment at the water plant upon completion of con-
struction and initiation of plant operation.
The price for these field tests will be included
in the manufacturer's equipment bid. The gauge
shall be readable from operating floor level.
04 - MISCELLANEOUS HANDRAILS, GRATING AND LADDERS
Miscellaneous grating, decking and handrails not
on steel bridges shall conform to the following
criteria:
Handrails shall be 1 -1/2" (nominal) x 42" high
two -rail aluminum handrails fabricated from
Schedule 10 aluminum pipe with a standard mill
finish. Fittings for handrails shall be alumi-
num alloy adjustable slip joint fittings. Hand-
rail posts mounted on horizontal surfaces of
concrete walkways or walls shall be mounted in
heavy duty cast aluminum bases, equal to Denier
*24 flanged base. Bases shall be anchored to
concrete with drill -in expansion anchors. Hand-
rail posts to be mounted on vertical walls shall
be mounted using a fabricated steel bent plate
bracket sized 2" x 6" x 8" long. The bracket
shall be drilled with four (4) 9/16" diameter
04 -31/35 1/81
04 -10.2 •
04 -10.3
holes, two (2) for mounting bracket to wall with
1/2" diameter drill -in anchors and two (2) for
fastening handrail to bracket with 1/2" diameter
machine bolts. Brackets are to be hot dipped
galvanized after fabrication.
Grating and decking shall be 3/16" thick bases x
1 -1/4" deep x 1" clear spacing. Grating shall
be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. Em-
bedment angles shall be provided where grating
is supported at the ends by concrete ledges.
Embedment angles shall be 1 -1/2" x 2" x 1/4"
steel angles with 1/2" diameter x 4" long bent
anchor bars at 1'6" on center. Embedment angles
shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrica-
tion. If intermediate support beams are requir-
ed to support grating, beams shall be minimum
1/4" thickness steel and shall be held in place
by clip angles fastened to concrete walls with
drill -in expansion bolts. Support beams and
attachment brackets are hot dipped galvanized
after fabrication. -
Ladders shall be steel construction and hot dip-
ped galvanized after fabrication; burrs shall be
removed prior to installation. Aluminum ladders
may be supplied.
04 -10 CLEANING AND PAINTING
04 -10.1 Cleaning
The equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and
prepared in the shop in accordance with this
specification and all scale, oxides, weld flux,
etc., shall be removed. All burrs, casting
scars, and sharp edges shall be ground smooth.
Galvanized Surfaces, Stainless Steel, and
Nonferrous Metals
Do not paint.
Motors, Pumps,
Components
Manufacturer's
prime coat and
enamel.
Control Boards, and Electrical
standard, but not less than one
two finish coats of machinery
04 -32/35
1/81
04 -10.4 Machined or Finished Steel and Iron Mechanism
Components
Coat with a rust - preventative compound.
04 -10.5 Iron and Mechanite Castings
Sandblast, "Commercial" Grade, and coat with
zinc chromate primer.
04 -10.6 Structural Steel Submerged
Items completely and partially submerged, or
subject to submergence, are defined as "submerg-
ed". Do not paint; leave bare for field sand-
blasting and painting. •
04 - 10.7 Finish Painting
Refer to Section 10 - Painting and Protective
Coatings for detail prime and finish painting.
04 - SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS
04 -11.1 General
The equipment manufacturer shall furnish com-
plete shop drawing information for approval
prior to any equipment fabrication. Shop draw-
ings must be approved prior to fabrication.
Submittals will include the following items:
a. Equipment drawings with dimensions, weights,
anchor bolt settings, pipe connections,
materials and protective coating specifica-
tions.
b. List of anchor bolts, sizes, lengths, etc.
c. Instrument catalog cuts, specification
sheets, wiring diagrams, and calibration
instructions.
d. Valve catalog cuts, dimensions, and material
specification.
e. Control schematics.
f. Complete assembly drawings.
04 -33/35 1/81
04 -11.2 Additional Information
After Engineer's review of shop drawings,
furnish in duplicate the following:
a. Within 15 days after receipt of Engineer's
review of shop drawings and data, submit a
manufacturing, assembly, shop testing, and
shipment schedules for each system.
b. Progress reports keyed to the above sche-
dules, including immediate notice of any
anticipated delays or improvements in sche-
dules.
c. Within 15 days after receipt of the Engi-
neer's review of shop drawings, critical
installation details including foundation
and /or anchor bolts.
d. Installation instructions in quadruplicate
for equipment, as applicable to this speci-
fic supply contract.
e. Any special instructions regarding care dur-
ing unloading, storage, and installation.
f. Specifications on required lubricants.
g. List of recommended spare parts in quotation
form including parts numbers, unit prices,
f.o.b. Owner's plant.
04 -11.3 Shop Drawings
Additional shop drawings as required per Section
13 - Shop Drawings.
04 -12 EXPERIENCE AND GUARANTEE
It is the intent of this specification that the
equipment and design of this plant shall be the
product of a manufacturer that is experienced in
the design, operation, and construction of water
treatment plants. Also, the equipment manufac-
turer is to guarantee the finished water quality
to meet the established Texas Department of
Health Standards and shall enter into a signed
agreement with the Engineer, Owner and State
Health Resources Department to that effect.
04 -34/35 1/81
04 -13 SERVICE
The equipment manufacturer shall provide the
services of a technical service representative
to inspect and adjust the completed installation
and to instruct the Owner's personnel in the
care and operation of the equipment specified
herein.
The manufacturer shall maintain a service organ-
ization available on call with spare parts from
local stock.
All equipment provided under this specification
shall be guaranteed against defects of material
and workmanship for a period of one (1) year
from date of final acceptance.
Field service to be provided shall include three
(3) days, three (3) trips for adjustment of the
reactor clarifier equipment, three (3) days,
three (3) trips for adjustment of the filter
equipment and backwash controls, and three (3)
days and three (3) trips for instructing the
operator.
Field service time is not intended to include
any time in the field required to correct fabri-
cation or installation errors, and any charges
resulting from time required for this must be
resolved between the manufacturer and /or equip-
ment supplier and the General Contractor.
The equipment manufacturer shall coordinate all
field service trips with the General Contractor
and the Engineer.
04 -14 WATER PLANT OPERATING CONTROLS
Refer to Section 11 for water plant operating
controls.
04 -15 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The lump sum price bid for the plant equipment
shall include all labor, equipment, materials,
and incidentals required to fabricate and in-
stall the plant equipment, complete with all
specified appurtenances as shown on the con-
struction plans and herein specified.
04 -35/35 1/81
1
SECTION 05 - METAL TREATMENT PLANT BUILDING
1 05 -01 GENERAL
1
1 ,
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
05 -02 REINFORCED CONCRETE FOUNDATION
The building manufacturer shall supply a foundation
design to support the building. The foundation
shall be designed by a Registered Professional
Engineer in the State of Texas experienced in foun-
dation design. See Appendix for Soil Report. The
foundation design included in the Plans is a mini-
mal design without consideration of the building
structure. The building foundation design shall
modify the design presented in the Plans, as re-
quired.
05 -03 STEEL
These Specifications describe a 45' x 90' metal
building at the Water Treatment Plant in Round
Rock, Texas. The work includes site work, founda-
tion and building construction and plumbing, elec-
trical and mechanical installations. The Contrac-
tor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment,
tools and all incidentals for accomplishing the
work as shown on the Plans and as described in
these Specifications.
The building manufacturer shall coordinate with the
Contractor and Electrician for the addition of
framing, where necessary, to mount and support con-
trol panels.
Reinforced concrete shall conform to Section 03.
Steel bars form reinforcing shall conform to the .
current Specifications for "Billet -Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement" ASTM Designation A -15,
Structural and Intermediate Grades, and when placed
in the work shall be free from dirt, rust, mill
scale, grease, oil, or other foreign matter that
will reduce the bond. All steel shall be domes-
tic.
05 -1/19 1 /81
1
05 -04 SITE WORK
1 05 -04.1 General
The Contractor shall grade the site so that the
floor slab shall be level or sloped as shown on the
Plans. Fill material shall be imported as requir-
ed, and such fill material shall have a plasticity
index of not more than 16. Fill material and floor
subgrade shall be compacted to 95% of maximum den-
, sity at optimum moisture in accordance with AASHO
T -99.
05 -04.2 Site Work
1 Site work shall be as described in Section 02 -
EARTHWORK.
1 05 -05 FLOOR SLAB
' 05 -05.1 General
It shall be Contractor's responsibility to ensure
' that the floor slab is laid to the proper grade.
The Owner will set a bench mark, if not already set
at the site, for the slab and a location stake for
one corner of the slab. It shall be the Contrac-
tor's responsibility to locate the other corners so
that building dimensions and angles are correct. A
grade beam shall be around all sides, and tie beams
' shall be under interior walls. The floor slab
shall be 6 inches thick and shall be reinforced by
No.. 3 bars spaced 18 inches apart each direction'.
1 Reinforcing steel shall be held in position by sup-
porting chairs or by other means as approved by the
Engineer.
1 05 -05.2 Concrete
Concrete work shall be as described in Section 03 -
CONCRETE.
05 -06 BUILDING
05 - 06.1 General
' The building shall be 45 feet wide and at least 90
feet long (45' x 90') with a clear span throughout
and shall have an eave height of 16'0" and shall
have a roof slope as shown on the Plans. Framing
1 05 -2/19 1/81
1
shall be of steel in accordance with AISC and AISI
design and gauge specifications anchored to slab
with 5/8" bolts. Covering shall be 26 gauge multi -
rib galvanized steel panels, long continuous
length, with 1/4" hexagonal head, cadmium - plated,
self- tapping screws with steel back neoprene wash-
ers. Gables shall be flashed with galvanized box -
type facia trim. Weather -seal box gutters shall be
provided.
Galvanized steel for gutters, downspouts, trim,
flashing, and other miscellaneous uses shall be 26
gauge or heavier and shall conform to ASTM A -446,
1.25 ounce coating and shall be white. Eaves gut-
ters, 4 -1/2" x 6 ", shall be formed to match the
sculptured profile of the gable facia and equipped
with heavy gauge, galvanized adjustable supports of
24 -inch centers. Square downspouts shall be equip-
ped with wall attachments, 45 elbows at the floor
line and precast concrete splash blocks. Gutters
shall be installed over each door.
Metal wall and roof panels shall be coated on both
sides with heavy -duty rolled on color in a shade
selected by the Engineer. Color coatings on the
exterior side of the panels shall have a 5 -year
performance rating. The interior side of the
panels shall have a white wash coat.
The roof shall have standard ribbed white plastic
skylights as shown on the building Plans.
The building shall include one (1) circular turbine
ventilator with 20" throat, bird - screens, and ad-
justable dampers, chain operated from plant floor.
Two (2) overhead doors, 12 feet wide by 12 feet
high (12' x 12') shall be provided, located as
shown on the Plans. The doors shall be rolling
door type, interior face mounted with chain hoist,
Model FN2, Overhead Door Corp., Dallas, Texas, or
approved equal.
The building shall include an "I" beam above the
chlorine storage area complete with trolley and
3 -ton hoist with required electric controls for
operation from the floor.
05 -06.2 Design Criteria
(a) Structural Mill shapes and welded plate sec-
tions shall be designed in accordance with the
05 -3/19 1/81
latest edition of AISC, "Specification for the
Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural
Steel for Buildings ". Cold formed steel mem-
bers shall be designed in accordance with the
latest edition of AISC, "Light Gauge Cold -
Formed Steel Design Manual ".
(b) Roof line load shall be applied to the hori-
zontal roof projection and shall be 20 psf. A
design wind loading of 25 psf shall be applied
to the primary framing and bracing in accor-
dance with the MBMA "Recommended Design Prac-
tices Manual ". A design wind pressure 25 psf
shall be applied to the wall panels and girts.
The structure shall be designed to withstand
an uplift pressure of 31.25 psf.
(c) The building manufacturer shall furnish a let-
ter of design certification with the seal of a
Registered Professional Engineer in the State
of Texas. This certification shall be submit-
ted prior to commencement of construction.
05 - 06.3 Structural Framing
(a) Primary and secondary structural framing shall
be shop fabricated and field bolted. If re-
quired for minor modification of secondary
framing or for field located a ccessories,
field cutting, drilling and welding, shall be
noted on drawings of building manufacturer.
(b) Steel structural members fabricated from plate
or bar stock shall have the flanges and webs
joined on one side of the web by a full pene-
tration continuous automatic submerged arc
welding process and shall have a minimum yield
strength of 42,000 psi (ASTM A -529). Subject
to approved design stress analysis on frame
prior to fabrication.
(c) Hot rolled sheet, plate and strip used in
welded plate sections shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A -36, A -529, A -572 Grade
42, or A -570 Grade E, as required by design.
Hot rolled sheet and strip used in cold formed
members shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM A -245 Grade E, or A -570 Grade D, with a
minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi.
05 -4/19 1/81
(d) Cold formed sections shall be manufactured by
precision roll or brake forming.
(e) Shop connections shall be welded in accordance
with the AWS Standard "Structure Welding Code"
latest edition. Welders and the welding pro-
cess shall have been previously certified by
an independent testing laboratory. Flange to
web welds shall be by hand arc process. Butt
welds in flange and web plates shall be full
penetration.
(f) •Field connections shall be bolted. High
strength bolts shall be installed by the turn
of the nut method. Bolts shall be:
Primary connections - High Strength Bolts;
ASTM A - 325
Secondary connections - Machine Bolts;
• ASTM A -307
(g) Primary framing shall be either welded built -
up sections or structural mill shapes, either
constant or tapered section.
(h) Purlines, girts and eave struts shall be eith-
er cold formed or structural mill sections.
(i) Base angles for attaching the bottom of the
wall panels will be continuous and anchored to
the concrete foundation.
(j) Flange bracing shall be cold formed and shall
laterally brace the inside unsupported flange
of primary framing as required by the design.
(k) Framed openings shall be structurally framed
as required by the design loads.
(1) Shop painting. All fabricated structural
steel, after inspection for accuracy of fabri-
cation, shall be cleaned to remove loose mill
scale, rust, flux, dirt, and other foreign
matter, and receive one coat of shop primer.
05 -07 METAL BUILDING ACCESSORIES
05 -07.1 Personnel Doors
Door frames shall be furnished with weathertight
head and jamb trim. Door leaves and frames shall
05 -5/19 1/81
be bonderized and painted one coat rust inhibitive
quality primer, neutral tan color, oven dried, and
conforms to ASTM specifications #D -714 and #B -117
for humidity cabinet and salt spray tests. Finish-
ed paint coat shall be two coats of enamel to match
building.
Door leaves: Door leaves shall be standard duty,
seamless hollow steel construction conforming to
commercial standard CS242 -62, U. S. Department of
Commerce, and the Steel Door Institute Specifica-
tions for Type I Classification. Door leaf shall
be 3' -0" x 7' -0" x 1 -3/4" with No. 20 gauge, roller
leveled, prime quality, cold rolled, seamless,
steel face sheets. Door leaf core shall be one
piece honeycomb securely bonded to both face
sheets. Door leaf edges shall be mechanically in-
terlocked. Door leaves shall be mortised for
4 -1/2" template hinges and prepared for government
series 160 type. locksets.
Door frames: Door frames shall be 16 gauge steel,
with 2" face, 5 -3/4" deep. Door frame corners
shall be mitered on knock -down frames. Hinge jambs
are mortised for 4 -1/2" x 4 -1/2" template hinges.
Lock jambs are prepared for government series 160
lock strike. Two rubber door silencers shall be
furnished for strike jambs or frame heads.
Hardware: Hinges shall be 4 -1/2" x 4 -1/2" by 10
gauge, full mortise, plain bearing, steel prime
painted, three per door leaf. Lockset shall be
standard duty, bronze plated, keyed alike, govern-
ment series 160 A or equal. Adequate door stops
shall be provided.
05 - 07.2 Overhead Door Openings
Overhead door openings shall include a cold- formed
structural framed opening and weathertight head and
jamb trim. All necessary framing and hardware for
installation and operation of the doors will be
provided by the door manufacturer.
05 -07.3 Aluminum Windows
Windows shall conform with all requirements of the
A.A.M.A. 302.9 -1972 (Architectural Aluminum Manu-
facturers Association), master specifications DH -A2
HP and HS- B1 -Hp, and ANSI A134 -1 -1972. Type and
sizes as shown on the drawings shall be furnished
with all necessary hardware.
Materials: All structural members of windows shall
be of extruded aluminum 6063 -T5 alloy, .062" thick
05 -6/19 .1/81
Windows shall be horizontal or vertical slide win-
dows as shown on the Plans. Slide windows' sash
shall not be removable and shall slide on extruded
rigid vinyl glides. Sash checkrail shall be tubu-
lar hollow extrusions for additional strength.
Glazing shall consist of S.S.B. glass.
Removable half screens shall be provided with
fiberglass mesh.
05 -07.4 Skylights and Wallights
Translucent skylight and wallight panels shall be
moulded to the configuration of the covering and
shall be of polyester base fiberglass reinforced.
The skylights and wallights shall be white with an
approximate light transmission of 60% and heat
transmission of 30 %. Skylight(s) shall be provided
in locations as shown on the Plans.
05 -07.5 Hoist
within commercial tolerances and A.A.M.A. specifi-
cations. Structural aluminum shall have ultimate
tensile strength of 22 ksi, and a yield strength of
16 ksi. Glass shall comply as to ratings of design
pressure in high wind zone areas. Exposed surfaces
of all aluminum members are to have a Class I ex-
truded mill finish.
Standard duty skylights and wallights shall be
0.060 inch nominal thickness conforming to Commer-
cial Standard CS 214 -57, Type II, Fire Retardant,
U. S. Department of Commerce.
The building manufacturer shall provide for addi-
tional support and supply an "I" beam with maximum
flange width of 4 to 6 inches and the carrying
capacity of a minimum of 3 -tons; to be installed
above the chlorine storage area.
05 -07.6 Exhaust Fan
Exhaust fan shall be 24" size with 3/4 H.P., 950
RPM, 220 V., single phase, complete with fan
housing, gravity wall shutters, complete in place,
wind master Acme Engineering & Manufacturing Corp.,
Fan Model #DC24H, or approved equal.
05 -7/19 1 /81
05 -08 CHLORINATION ROOM
05 -08.1 General
The chlorination room shall be finished with an
interior metal panel both ceiling and walls. The
ceiling and walls shall be insulated per Section
15 -09.
05 -09 INSULATION
05 -09.1 General
This Section includes partition insulation neces-
sary to insulate walls and ceiling in the metal
control building.
05 -09.2 Metal Building
The roof and outside walls shall have a 1 - 1/2"
thick fiberglass blanket - type insulation with a
minimum "R" value of 5 and a 0.004" vinyl vapor
barrier facing on one side. Insulation shall be
supported between steel members by a 2" galvanized
wire mesh.
05 -10 CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK
05 -10.1 General
The work covered under this section shall include
the construction of the partitions within the metal
building.
05 -10.2 Standards
Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable
portions of Standards listed.
- American Plywood Association, APA (DFPA).
- American Wood Preservers Institute, AWPI.
- Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, SPIB.
05 -10.3 Protecting
Handle carpentry items to avoid injury to persons
and to avoid damage to materials or to work in
place. Satisfactorily repair or remove and replace
work that has been damaged.
05 -8/19 1/81
Provide temporary bracing, shoring, rails, guards
and covers, as necessary to prevent damage or in-
jury.
Secure partially erected framing during interrup-
tions in erecting. Remove ladders when carpentry
work is not in progress.
05 -10.4 Delivering and Shoring
Store to prevent damage to materials or structure.
Store wood to prevent absorption of excessive mois-
ture.
05 -10.5 Materials
Framing Lumber: Grade marked, SPIB, No. 2 Southern
Yellow Pine (SYP) or West Coast Douglas Fir, mois-
ture content under 19 %.
Partition Framing: Nominal 2" x 4" or 2" x 6 ", as
noted on the Plans, 24" o.c., "Stud Grade West
Coast Douglas Fir or SYP ", 19% moisture content
maximum.
Laboratory and Bath Wall & Ceiling Finish: Walls
and ceiling shall be drywall construction. Wall
and ceiling drywall will be provided under the
"Drywall" section of the specifications. Drywall
will be 5/8" thickness, or 1/2" x -rated at all
walls.
Bath Door and Trim:
Hardboard Faced Doors: 1 -3/8" thick, hollow core
with 1/8" tempered hardboard facing meeting Commer-
cial Standard CS 251 -63. Factory finished.•
Door Jambs and Trim; Baseboard: All material shall
be "C" or better Western Pine. Unpainted jambs and
door trim shall be provided. Field finish to match
cabinets per Section 11, laboratory equipment here-
in, or factory finished as selected by the Engi-
neer.
Laboratory and Bath Window Trim:
treatment for all windows shall
at jamb and sills. Sills shall
coat glaze coating, silicone or
Cabinets and Interior Details:
Laboratory Equipment for custom
05 -9/19
The basic window
be gypsum returns
receive one (1)
equal.
See Section 12,
cabinets.
1/81
Medicine Cabinets: Kent Model L- 1028 -A, Lighted:
Basic 28 -1/8" width x 21" overall size, with two
14" x 16" plate glass sliding mirror doors; stops
and pulls; adjustable aluminum sleeves; surface
mounted; self- contained full width top incandescent
light fixture providing indirect lighting; manufac-
tured by Kent Corporation.
05 -10.6 Execution
Framing: Fasten wood plates to masonry and con-
crete with approved power studs or with 1/2" anchor
bolts not more than 48 inches apart. Set pole
plates on 15# builders felt, or provide wolmanized
plates.
Install anchored grounds, blocking, nailers, and
supports necessary for fixtures, shelving, cabinets
and accessories.
Install furring and blocking as indicated or as
necessary to attain design conditions. Install
items specified in other sections as furnished for
installing with framing and carpentry work.
Cut members to fit closely and fit square on bear-
ings. Set members plumb, level, true to a line, or
as indicated. Set horizontal or sloping members
with crown side up..
Install manufactured items according to manufactur-
er's recommendations.
Double studs at sides of openings, triple studs at
corners. Space studs not more than 24 inches on
centers. Use single plate at bottom and double
plate at top.
Use two 2 -inch x 6 -inch headers over openings up to
5 feet of clear span. Use two 2 -inch x 8 -inch
headers from 5' to 7' of clear span. Use two
2 -inch x 10 -inch headers from 7' to 9' of clear
span. Use two 2 -inch x 12 -inch headers from 9' to
11' of clear span. For spans more than 11' clear,
use built -up bracing or trussing as indicated.
Laboratory and Bath Interior Trim: Miter standing
trim at corners. Use spline joint or clamp nails.
Cope running trim at internal corners and miter at
external corners. Return exposed ends of moulds to
05 -10/19 1 /81
match face profile. Splice with butt joints over
solid bearings and nail securely. Splices not
permitted in sections less than 8 feet long.
Set exposed nail heads to receive putty or filler.
Sand trim to eliminate marks and defects that could
affect finish.
Cutting and Repairing: Do not cut installed mater-
ials and items without prior approval.
Cutting, when approved, and repairing shall be done
by the trade that installed the original work and
shall be done to avoid damage to adjacent work.
Repair work, that will remain exposed, in a manner
that will not be obvious as a patch. Remove and
replace work that cannot be satisfactorily repair-
ed
05 - 10.7 Cleaning
Remove soil, stain, and extraneous materials caused
by millwork handling from adjacent surfaces.
Remove foreign matter and clean millwork to satis-
factorily receive specified finish. Remove soil
and stain that could adversely affect finish.
Remove and replace materials and items from which
soil, stain, and foreign matter cannot be satisfac-
torily removed. Repairs that appear obvious as a
patch will not be acceptable.
05 - PARTITION INSULATION
05 - 11.1 General
This section includes partition insulation neces-
sary to insulate walls and ceilings in laboratory,
control room, and restroom.
Materials:
Blown -in Insulation:
Hollow cellulose fibers with adhesives: 3 -1/2" at
walls R -
Loose -fill blown -in: 6 -1/2" at ceiling R -30
Thermo Con or approved equal, representative -
Thermal Products, Inc., 909 McPhaul, Austin, Texas,
phone 836 -3485.
05 -11/19 1 /81
Installation:
Blown -in Insulation:
The hollow cellulose fibers shall be blown -in where
indicated on the Plans; install in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
Where blown insulation is provided, tag "R" valve
at attic access.
05 -12 DRYWALL
05 -12.1 General
Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable
portions of standards listed.
Gypsum Association. GA
Gypsum Drywall Contractors International. GDCI
05 -12.2 Surface Preparation
Examine surfaces that are to receive drywall.
Check size, spacing, and alignment of supports.
Report unsatisfactory conditions.
Do not start drywall work until unsatisfactory con-
ditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with installation of drywall materials
will be construed as evidence of acceptance of con-
ditions under which drywall work will be done.
05 -12.3 Materials
Basic Materials: by U. S. Gypsum Company or
National Gypsum Company. 5/8" thickness on walls
and 1/2" on ceiling tapered edge.
Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's origi-
nal, unopened labeled containers or packages.
Arrange deliveries to provide sufficient quantities
to permit continuity for any phase of work.
Store and handle drywall materials to prevent dam-
age to materials or to work in place and to elimi-
nate unnecessary fire hazard. Store drywall mater-
ials in dry, weathertight, ventilated spaces.
05 -12/19 1 /81
05 -12.4 Field Workmanship
Cut wallboard by scoring and breaking, or by saw-
ing. Work from face side. Scribe wallboard to fit
abutting surfaces.
Apply wallboard to ceilings and soffits before ap-
plying to vertical surfaces.
Install wallboard with long edge perpendicular to
supporting members. Use longest pieces practic-
able. Stagger joints on opposite sides of wall.
Provide support for all edges.
Butt joints loosely over supports. Sand edges that
have been cut. Cut neatly around outlet boxes and
switches. Drive nails to slightly dimple surface
but not to break paper.
Install according to wallboard manufacturer's re-
commendations, except when in conflict• with speci-
fied requirements.. Install items specified in
other sections as furnished for installation in
drywall.
Use metal beads at external corners and tape rein-
forcement at internal corners. Use casing bead
where drywall abuts another material.
Apply joint compound sufficiently thick to hide
board surface at internal angles and butt - joints.
Cover nail heads and depressions with compound.
Apply tape to angles and joints, squeeze out excess
compound, and cover tape with compound.
When first coat
coat with edges
coat.
When second coat
coat of compound
has thoroughly
tapered beyond
has thoroughly
tapered beyond
dried, apply second
edges of first
dried, apply thin
edges of second
coat.
Sand finished work to smooth surface, true to a
plane.
Apply beads, reinforcement, casings, and edgings
according to manufacturer's directions and as indi-
cated.
05 -13/19
1 /81
05 -12.5 Cleaning
Remove soil, stain, and extraneous materials caused
by installing of drywall materials from adjacent
surfaces.
Clean and properly prepare drywall surfaces to re-
ceive specified finish.
Remove and replace items and materials that cannot
be satisfactorily cleaned.
05 -13 CAULKING
05 -13.1 General
This section includes caulking, sealing and other
related items necessary to complete project. In-
clude as the major part of the work: sealing of
joints between exterior perimeters of door frames,
window frames, louver frames, and other items
occurring in openings in exterior walls. All other
exterior sealing as required to provide weather -
tight conditions in exterior walls. Caulking
around perimeters of interior door and window
frames. All other interior caulking.
05 -13.2 Guarantee
The cauling and sealant applicator shall furnish to
the Owner, a written guarantee covering all defects
of materials and workmanship that occur within a
period of one year from the date of final comple-
tion of the building. Should any leaks or other
defects in materials or workmanship develop within
this time the caulking and sealant applicator shall
be bound by the guarantee to make all necessary
repairs and replacement at no cost to the Owner.
05 -13.3 Materials
Exterior sealant for general use shall be gun -
grade, one -part acrylic based, liquid polymer
sealant meeting Federal Specification TT -S- 00230;
equal to "Mono - Lasto- Meric" by Tremco Manufacturing
Company.
Interior caulking compound for general use shall be
gun -grade elastic compound, meeting Federal Speci-
fication TT- C -598B; equal to "Synthetic Resin" by
the Tremco Manufacturing Company.
05 -14/19 1/81
05 -13.4 Installing
Compound shall generally be applied by means of
hand guns, without smearing of adjacent surfaces.
Sufficient pressure shall be used to solidly fill
all voids and joints.
Caulk joints before final coat of paint is applied
to adjacent surfaces.
Saddles or thresholds of exterior doors shall be
set in full bed of exterior sealant not less than
3/8 inch thick. Clean off excess compound after
installing.
05 -13.5 Cleaning
Adjacent materials which have been soiled by the
work of this section shall be cleaned immediately.
Particular care shall be taken to avoid staining
any part of exposed finished work. Any damage to
such work shall be made good at no cost to the
Owner.
Remove all cartons, debris, emptied tubes, etc. as
the work progresses, and finally at completion of
caulking and sealing work.
05 -14 TEXTURE
05 -14.1 Surface Preparation for Texture Walls
(Manufacturer's Written Recommendations are Approv-
ed)
Materials:
Cement - Sheetrock finisher - U. S. Gypsum Co.
Tape - Cloth fabricon 2" wide - U. S. Gypsum Co.
Equal materials are approved.
Mixing: Powdered cement mixed with water to con-
sistency thinner than putty, covered with wet cloth
and allowed to stand an hour before using. No mix-
ture more than two days old shall be used. Ready
mixed materials are approved.
Method of Application: Butter all joints, edges,
and corners with cement and cover immediately with
tape. Force cement well into fabric mesh with put-
ty knife. Sand lightly to remove bumps. Paint
05 -15/19 1/81
entire joint with cement. Paint all imperfections,
rough places, and nail heads with cement. Sand
entire wall smooth.
Required Results: Smooth, plane surface with no
visible seams of defects.
All drywall ceilings and walls shall be surface -
treated as specified above.
05 -14.2 Texture
Materials: Texture: U. S. Gypsum Co., brought to
site in original container. (or equal)
Required Results: Even surface without variation
in texture, gloss, or other appearance.
Mixing: Texture powder and water mixed to consis-
tency thinner than putty and allowed to stand one
hour. Apply texture immediately.
Texture shall be Orange Peel pattern. Submit two
samples for Engineer's approval.
Where Used: All exposed sheetrock surfaces in lab-
oratory and bath.
Remove soil stain, and extraneous materials caused
by installing of drywall materials from adjacent
surfaces.
05 -15 INTERIOR PAINTING
05 -15.1 Materials
Brand, grade and color must be approved by the
Engineer.
All paint shall be brought to site in original con-
tainer.
05 -15.2 Conditions
a. Surfaces shall be clean, smooth, and free from
dust.
b. Knots and sappy spots shall be coated with
shellac at least ten hours before first coat is
applied.
c. Prefinished cabinetwork and fixtures shall be
protected with drop cloths.
05 -16/19 1/81
d. No interior painting shall be done until
building is thoroughly dry.
e. No outside painting shall be done in frosty,
foggy, or excessively dusty or damp weather.
05 -15.3 Puttying
a. Putty shall be applied after primer and when-
ever else required.
b. Thoroughly work putty into all nail holes,
joints, splits, checks, and other defects.
05 -15.4 Method of Application of Paint
a. Paint shall not be thinned in excess of the
printed directions of the manufacturer.
b. Spread evenly and brush out thoroughly, leaving
the finished surface free from drop, ridges, waves,
laps, and brush marks.
c. Each coat of paint shall have a slight varia-
Lion of color to distinguish it from the preceding
coat.
d. Allow each coat to dry thoroughly.
05 -15.5 Color
Color schemes will be prepared by the Engineer.
Variations from scheme required by Owner shall be
approved by Engineer or Contractor. Costs in addi-
tion to contract required by changes which necessi-
tate additional costs shall be submitted to Con-
tractor for approval before change is made.
05 -15.6 Clean -Up
Upon completion, thoroughly clean all glass, injur-
ed surfaces and grounds and replace any damaged
work of this or other trades caused by painting
operations.
05 -15.7 Schedule
Exterior Wood - None.
Exterior Doors - Pre- finished, furnished with metal
building.
Exterior Metal - (Not including factory finish).
05 -17/19 1/81
Interior Trim and Doors - 2 Cts. Latex Enamel.
Interior Walls - 2 Cts. Latex Enamel.
05 -16 FLOOR COVERING
05 -16.1 General
Floor covering shall be limited to the laboratory,
office, and bathroom.
05 -16.2 Materials
Type: Resilient
Color: As selected by the Engineer. Submit color
samples.
Adhesives: As recommended by manufacturer.
05 - 16.3 Installation
As recommended by manufacturer's specifications for
installation.
05 -16.4 Scope
Laboratory and Bath: Vinyl Asbestos Tile - 1 /8"
thickness equal to Kentile.
05 -17 BEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
05 -17.1 General
The heating and air conditioning unit be in-
stalled in the laboratory as shown on the Plans.
The unit shall be a ceiling mounted unit 220 V., 1
phase.
05 -17.2 Materials
The unit shall be a 1 -1/2 ton heating and cooling
system, manufactured by Lennox, Payne or approved
equal.
Load Calculations - Equipment supplier shall pro-
vide Form J. National Environmental Contractor's
Association for the unit to Engineer for approval
prior to construction.
Approval: Submit catalogue information on equip-
ment to Engineer for approval prior to installa-
tion.
05 -18/19 1/81
05 -17.3 Installation
The ceiling mounted unit shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's specification
and at location as shown on the Plans. Insulated
ducts shall be sized by the manufacturer for air
delivery to the restroom and to the laboratory with
return air from the laboratory. Condensation drain
line shall be plumbed to restroom vent pipe.
05 -18 PLUMBING
05 -18.1 General
Plumbing shall be done in accordance with Section
07 - PIPE AND PIPING. Plumbing fixtures and acces-
sories shall be as specified in drawings on Plumb-
ing Fixture Schedule and Plumbing Accessory Sche-
dule.
05 -18.2 Clean -Up
At the completion of construction a house cleaning
or building maintenance service shall wash, wax or
otherwise clean according to the type of surface
involved, all types �f floors, glass, interior
tiled or glazed walls, trim, plumbing fixtures and
other soiled surfaces directed by the Engineer.
This service is not to be construed as releasing
the Contractor or anyone under his direction, from
the protection, care and cleaning -up as required in
the General Provisions.
05 -19 ELECTRICAL WORK
All electrical installations shall comply with the
National Electrical Code. Electrical work shall
include all items of labor and material required
for a complete installation. Circuit breaker
panels shall be provided as required.
05 -20 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The lump sum price bid for the metal plant building
shall include all labor, equipment, materials, and
incidentals required to fabricate and install the
building, complete with concrete foundation, under-
ground electric service, water, sewer and drain
piping, and all specified appurtenances as shown on
the construction plans.
05 -19/19 1/81
SECTION 06 - WATER PLANT EQUIPMENT
06 -01 GENERAL
The General Contractor shall provide material,
equipment, labor and appurtenances as required to
furnish and install chemical feed equipment, flow
metering and monitoring equipment, flow control
equipment, and chlorination equipment as shown on
the drawings and as specified herein.
In order to assure unit responsibility for the pro-
cess flocculant feed system, a single supplier
shall be responsible for assembly of all components
and providing an integral chemical feed unit. The
components covered by this requirement will include
the chemical dry feeder, the storage bin, the con-
veyor screw, the chemical mixer, the chemical feed
pumps, the common base and support system, and all
controls for automatic operation.
06 -02 ALUM FEED EQUIPMENT
06 -02.1 Aluminum Sulfate Feed Equipment
Suitable chemical feed equipment for feeding the
treatment process flocculant shall be provided and
installed as per this section of the specifica-
tions. The flocculant to be used in the process
will be Aluminum Sulfate.
The chemical system shall be designed for the fol-
lowing criteria:
Plant Flow, Qd 6.0 MGD
Maximum Dosage Rate 30 mg /1
Average Dosage Rate IT mg /1
Minimum Dosage Rate mg /1
Expected Concentration Alum TIT
Expected Flocculant Solubility TTU to 3.0
lbs /gal
Chemical batch mixing shall be automatic, and shall
be as described below.
Dry chemicals will be stored in elevated storage
bin and will be automatically loaded into the hop-
per of a volumetric type dry feeder. Level control
devices will be placed in the chemical solution
mixing tank to sequence the chemical batch mixing
process.
06 -1/21 1/81
The low level control device, which will be set at
mid -depth of the storage tank, will provide a sig-
nal that will actuate a solenoid valve on the make -'
up water line and start the volumetric dry feeder,
vibratory storage bin, and the mixer. The water
fed into the chemical storage tank will be provided
with a back .flow preventer, a diamond port flow
control valve and a flow meter capable of reading
from zero to ten (10) gallons per minute. The
water and chemical dry feeder shall be adjustable
to provide from 1.0 to 3.0 pounds dry chemical per
gallon of water.
An upper level control device, which will be set
approximately nine (9) inches below the top of the
tank, will provide a signal to close the solenoid
valve on the make -up water line and shut -off the
dry feeder, vibratory storage bin, and mixer. The
mixer shall also be controlled by timer and shall
automatically shut -down after lapsed time. The
mixer shall also be provided with an override func-
tion with a 24 hour time clock and 0 -15 minute ad-
justable interval timer'to periodically start to
assure mixture is kept in solution. All chemical
feed functions will have a manual override by a
H.O.A. selector switch for manual operation of any
phase of the program. The program will be provided
with an automatic reset to reset all functions to
the start position for the next cycle•. The equip-
ment to be supplied this item shall include:
A 500 gallon capacity fiberglass chemical solution
mixing and storage tank, sized approximately 4'6"
diameter x 5'0" high shall be utilized. The tank
shall be provided with connecting fittings for
make -up water, drain and pump suction. A structu-
ral steel base for mounting the chemical solution
mixing and storage tank, chemical feed pumps, and
volumetric dry feeder shall be provided. The base
shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.
A top mounted mixer with a stainless steel shaft
and propeller shall be provided. The mixer shall
be a direct drive, single speed type with a one
H.P., Single Phase, 240V, TEFC motor. The propel-
ler shall be maximum diameter. The shaft and pro-
peller shall be Type 316 stainless steel. The
shaft shall be minimum 1" diameter x 48" long.
06 -2/21 1/81
A suitable steel frame, mounted on the chemical
tank steel base, shall be provided for the purpose
of mounting the mixer and the chemical dry feeder
and support for the storage bin. The frame and
base shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrica-
tion.
A chemical feed pump assembly shall be provided
mounted on a single drip proof base fabricated of
corrosion resistant materials. The assembly shall
consist of two identical chemical feed pumps, one
for use as the primary feed pump and the other for
stand -by use, suction piping, strainer, all neces-
sary piping, valves and fittings to provide change
over of pumps or to allow removal of one pump from
the system,, and chemical solution feed piping from
the chemical feed pump discharge to the raw water
line as shown on the project drawings. The chemi-
cal feed pumps will be set up to start and stop
with the operation of the raw water pumps. Refer
to Section 11 for water plant operating controls.
The chemical feed pumps shall be capable of provid-
ing 920 gpd to 5000 gpd solution feed rates, by
manually varying the pump Stroke length or changing
pulley arrangements, against a total head of 100
psig. The pumps shall be the dual head type with
PVC heads and a minimum 3" diaphragm. The stroke
length of the pumps shall be adjustable over a 10
to 1 range with a slide rule type scale graduated 0
to 100% and a vernier. A knurled nut shall be pro-
vided on the crank shaft to lock the crank in posi-
tion to prevent creeping once the stroke length is
set.
Each pump shall be Wallace & Tiernan Model 44 -125,
or approved equal and shall be driven by a 1725
RPM, Single Phase, 240V, NEMA I, O.D.P., minimum
1/2 H.P., induction motor.
The dry feeder shall be the screw -type volumetric
feeder with automatic start -stop and a percent
timer control. The capacity shall be adjustable
from 16 to 50 cubic feet per hour. The operating
range shall be 20:1, expandable to 60:1 by changing
belt position on the 3:1 ratio, 4 -step drive pul-
ley. The feed rate control shall be manual via an
adjustment knob with the dial calibrated 0 -100% of
feeder capacity. The feeder will have 4" stainless
steel screw, fiberglass hopper, BUNA N hopper wall
agitators, and stainless steel hopper bottom trough
and discharge spout. The feeder will be provided
storage hopper with access platform as shown on the
project drawings.
06 -3/21 1/81
The dry feeder shall be Wallace & Tiernan Series
32 -005 with automatic start -stop control, or ap-
proved equal, and shall be driven by a Single
Phase, 240V, NEMA I, O.D.P., 1/4 H.P. induction
motor.
06 -02.2 Chemical System Water Supply and Chemical Feed
Piping
A fresh water supply line shall be provided and
shall be. connected to the chemical solution tank as
shown on the Project Drawings. Piping shall be
Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC). The line
will be provided with a back flow preventer, a
solenoid valve, a diamond port flow regulating plug
valve and a flow meter.
All chemical feed piping from the feed pumps to the
injection point will be Schedule 40 polyvinyl chlo-
ride (PVC).
06 - 02.3 Chemical Storage Bin
A suitable storage bin shall be provided for stor-
age of the dry aluminum sulfate. The bin shall
have a minimum capacity of 200 cubic feet. The bin
shall be the static type with an attached vibrating
bin bottom. The contact materials shall be Type
304 stainless steel. The unit shall be 60 -inch
diameter and equipped with a 1 -1/2 H.P., Single
Phase, 240V, totally enclosed, non - vented motor.
The bin shall be coated inside and out with the
manufacturers standard food grade epoxy paint.
A combined live bin volumetric screw feeder by a
single manufactuer will be acceptable for use on
this project.
The bin will be as manufactured by Vibra Screw,
Inc., or equal.
06 -02.4 Screw Conveyor
A suitable screw conveyor shall be provided to con-
vey the aluminum sulfate from storage dock level
into the top of the dry chemical storage bin. The
lower end of the conveyor will be recessed into the
floor of the concrete storage dock, and will be
provided with a hopper for loading the dry chemical
from sacks into the hopper. The inlet hopper shall
be flush mounted on the dock floor so that spills
may be easily swept into the hopper. The unit
shall be designed so that the grit screw and hous-
ing can be totally removed for maintenance. The
06 -4/21 1 /81
grit screw shall be the inclined type with a flang-
ed tubular housing. The housing shall be minimum
3/16" steel plate.
The screw conveyor shall be designed to meet the
following criteria:
Screw Pitch Diameter
Shaft Diameter
Angle of Incline
Minimum Flight Thickness
Minimum Motor Horsepower
6 " (minimum)
1 - 1/2" (minimum)
45" (maximum)
3'/8" base 3/16" tip
2.0
The conveyor and all bearings shall be specifically
designed and fabricated for the intended service,
conveying dry aluminum sulfate.
All mild steel shall be hot dipped galvanized after
fabrication.
The screw conveyor shall consist of a single heli-
coid flighting welded to a 2" ID Schedule 40 steel
pipe with a solid steel stub shaft. The flights
and shaft shall be abrasion resistant and shall
have a Rockwell C hardness of 65 -68. The screw
shall have full pitch flighting.
The screw conveyor shall be driven by a reducer
mounted at the end of the screw connected directly
to the screw shaft. The reducer shall be•driven
via a V -belt drive by a minimum of 2 H.P., TEFC
motor, with a 1.15 service factor and Class B
insulation. The gear reducer shall be designed
with an ACMA service factor of 2.0. The reducer
shall include an integral thrust bearing, seal
gland, and drive shaft.
The screw conveyor shall be controlled by an off -on
push button switch mounted on the screw housing
adjacent to the hopper per the Plans.
06 -03 POLYMER OR pH CONTROL FEED EQUIPMENT
06 -03.1 Feed Equipment
Suitable chemical feed equipment for feeding the
treatment process flocculant aid or pH control
shall be provided and installed as per this section
of the specifications.
06 -5/21 1/81
The chemical system shall be designed for the fol-
lowing criteria:
Plant Flow, Qd
Maximum Dosage Rate
Average Dosage Rate
Minimum Dosage Rate
6.0 MGD
mg /1
13 mg /1
I mg /1
Chemical batch mixing shall be manual and shall be
as described below.
The water fed into the chemical storage tank will
be provided with a back flow preventer, a diamond
port flow control valve and a flow meter capable of
reading from zero to ten (10) gallons per minute.
The mixer shall be controlled by timer and shall
automatically shut -down after lapsed time. The
mixer shall also be provided with an override
function with a 24 -hour time clock and 0 -15 minute
adjustable interval timer to periodically start to
assure mixture is kept in solution. All chemical
feed pumps will have a manual override by a H.O.A.
selector switch for manual operation of any phase
of the program.
The tank shall be a 500 gallon capacity fiberglass
chemical solution mixing and storage tank, sized
approximately 4'6" diameter x 5'0" high. The tank
shall be provided with connecting fittings for
make -up water, drain and pump suction. A structu-
ral steel base for mounting the chemical solution
mixing and storage tank and chemical feed pumps
shall be provided. The base shall be hot dipped
galvanized after fabrication.
A top mounted mixer with a stainless steel shaft
and propeller shall be provided. The mixer shall
be a direct drive, single speed type with one H.P.,
Single Phase, 240V, TEFC motor. The propeller
shall be maximum diameterz The shaft and propeller
shall be Type 316 stainless steel. The shaft shall
be minimum 1" diameter x 48" long.
A suitable steel frame, mounted on the chemical
tank steel base, shall be provided for the purpose
of mounting the mixer. The frame and base shall be
hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.
06 -6/21 1/81
A chemical feed pump assembly shall be provided
mounted on a single drip proof base fabricated of
corrosion resistant materials. The assembly shall
consist of two identical chemical feed pumps, one
for use as the primary feed pump and the other for
stand -by use, suction piping, strainer, all neces-
sary piping, valves and fittings to provide change
over of pumps or to allow removal of one pump from
the system, and chemical solution feed piping from
the chemical feed pump discharge to the raw water
line as shown on the project drawings. The chemi-
cal feed pumps will be set up to start and stop
with the operation of the raw water pumps. Refer
to Section 11 for water plant operating controls.
The chemical feed pumps shall be capable of provid-
ing 920 gpd to 5000 gpd solution feed rates, by
manually varying the pump stroke length or changing
pulley arrangements, against a total head of 100
psig. The pumps shall be the dual head type with
PVC heads and a minimum 3" diaphragm. The stroke
length of the pumps shall be adjustable over a 10
to 1 range with a slide rule type scale graduated 0
to 100% and a vernier. A knurled nut shall be pro-
vided on the crank shaft to lock the crank in posi-
tion to prevent creeping once the stroke length is
set.
Each pump shall be Wallace & Tiernan Model 44 -125,
or approved equal and shall be driven by a 1725
RPM, Single Phase, 240V, NEMA I, O.D.P., minimum
1/2 H.P., induction motor.
06 -03.2 Chemical System Water Supply and Chemical Feed
Piping
A fresh water supply line shall be provided and
shall be connected to the chemical solution tank as
shown on the Project Drawings. Piping shall be
Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC). The line
will be provided with a back flow preventer, a
diamond port flow regulating plug valve and a flow
meter.
All chemical feed piping from the feed pumps to the
injection point will be Schedule 40 polyvinyl chlo-
ride (PVC).
06 -7/21 1 /81
06 -04 CHLORINATION SYSTEM
06 -04.1 Chlorinator
The Contractor shall supply and install two (2)
Wallace & Tiernan Series V -800 Remote Vacuum Chlo-
rinator, or approved equal. They shall be solu-
tion -free vacuum - operated, wall- mounted type. The
rotameter shall have capacity of 500 pounds of
chlorine per 24 hours. Feed range shall be 20 to
1. The V -notch method of control shall maintain
the set feed rate within 4 %.
Operating components shall be housed in a modular
cabinet with corrosion - resistant, vinyl enamel
finish. Spring - loaded valve shall maintain a con-
stant vacuum downstream of the orifice. It also .
shall admit air if excess vacuum develops. This
air shall not pass through the rotameter. The
valves shall be separate valves. They shall have
sealed, diaphram units with Acme - thread sockets for
removal and replacement without tools.
They shall have remote mounted standby chlorine
pressure relief valve with tie connector with auto-
matic switchover vacuum regulation check unit.
Check units will be provided with ton container
adaptor, heaters and drip leg.
The rotameter shall have a 10 -inch, linear scale.
Its graduations and float shall be in contrasting
colors for easy reading. The metering device shall
be a V -notch Variable Orifice. It shall consist of
a plastic plug with a V- shaped groove which moves
in a fitted plastic ring. The aspirator -type in-
jector shall provide the operating vacuum and pre-
vent backflow of water into the chlorinator.
Operation shall require no auxiliary water and no
drain. A chlorine vacuum gauge at the gas inlet
shall be included.
The following accessories shall be included:
1) 2 - 500 ppd rotameter
2) 2 - 250 ppd rotameter
3) Fixed throat injector
4) Vent screen
5) Extra gaskets, lubricant, wrenches and
instructions
06 -8/21 1 /81
06 -04.2 Housing
The above equipment shall be housed in a chlorina-
tor housing as shown on the Plan.
06 -04.3 Strip Heater
A 2000 watt wall mounted strip heater shall be fur-
nished and installed in the chlorination room as
shown on the Plans. The heater shall have a wall
mounted thermostatic control.
06 -04.4 Exhaust Fan
Exhaust fans shall be 10" shutter mounted exhaust
fan capable of 300 cubic feet per minute discharge
in free air, with 1/20 H.P. motor, gravity wall
shutters, wall collar, safety guard, DynaMaster fan
Model F1OAG -1, Acme Engineering &.Manufacturing
Corp., 115 volt, 60 hertz, or approved equal.
06 -04.5 Gas Mask
6) Trunions, as noted on Plans
7) 4 one ton chlorine cylinders (full) shall
be supplied (material and deposit paid)
by the contractor at start -up of the
plant and shall remain the property of
the Owner.
8) 2 - 8000 lb. Scales
9) 3 -ton electric chain hoist, with motoriz-
ed Trolley Type
10) 110V. service to each heater at automatic
switchover.
11) 2 - Chlorine leak detectors
12) 1 - Cylinder Pick -up bar
A gas mask shall be furnished and installed in the
chlorine storage area as shown on the Plans, and
shall be complete with wall mounted enclosure. The
mask shall be self- contained positive pressure hel-
met, with its own compressed air supply and full
face - piece. Three (3) spare air supply cylinders
should also be supplied. The helmet and air supply
shall meet all EPA requirements.
06 -04.6 Chlorination Solution Water Supply
A chlorinator shall be connected to the plant water
service line as shown on the Plans.
Piping within chlorination room shall be polyvinyl
chloride pipe (PVC) Schedule 40. ,Chlorine solution
06 -9/21 1/81
line shall be PVC Schedule 40. Water supply line
from water supply may be polyethylene per Section
07 -09.2. Exposed piping at treatment plant shall
be standard galvanized iron pipe or PVC with ap-
proved thermo protection. All valves shall be
thermoplastic ball valves and shall be true union
design of PVC material. All other valve and fit-
tings within the chlorination room or in contact
with chlorine solution shall also be of PVC mater-
ial.
06 -04.7 Electrical Chain Hoist.
An electric chain hoist with motorized trolley type
shall be supplied with the capacity of 3 -tons. The
hoist shall be a ESM Electric Chain Hoist, motoriz-
ed trolley type, single speed, standard lift
height, standard push button cord length as manu-
factured by Harrington Peerless Hoist Products or
approved equal.
06 -04.8 Chlorinator Operating Controls
The chlorinators water supply shall be controlled
by electric solenoid valves set to start and stop
with the raw water pumps. Refer to Section 11 for
water plant operating controls.
A time delay of 0 -15 minutes shall be provided for
the post chlorinator solenoid valve.
06 -04.9 Chlorine Leak Detectors
Two (2) chlorine leak detectors shall be supplied
and installed at location shown on Plans. The
chlorine leak detectors shall be Series 50 -125
Chlorine Detector, panel mounted, Wallace and
Tiernan, or approved equal.
06 -04.10 Weight Scales
Two (2) weight scales shall be supplied and in-
stalled in the chlorine storage areas. The scales
shall be dial scales, floor mounting, 8000 lb.
capacity, with cradle for holding two (2) 1 -ton
'chlorine containers on each scale, Fairbanks, or
approved equal.
06 -05 TURBIDIMETERS
One (1) Each "Surface Scatter 5 ", Catalog No.
15625, or equal, turbidimeters in weather tight
06 -10/21 1/81
1
NEMA 4 enclosures shall be provided as shown on the
drawings. The meters shall monitor the filtered
water. The meters shall indicate and record, on a
strip chart recorder, the turbidity of the filtered
water. The recorder shall be located in the labor-
atory office. Each shall be complete with high
alarm contacts. All piping to the meter and drain
piping will be provided as shown on the drawings.
06 -06 SELF PRIME LIFT STATION
06 -06.1 General
The packaged sewage system for mounting directly on
' a 6 foot diameter wet well and shall be as manufac-
tured by Smith Pump Company, Waco, Texas, or ap-
proved equal. It shall include all needed equip -
1 ment factory installed on a common steel cover and
the equipment shall be protected by a fabricated
house that shall slide back for easy access to
pumps and controls.
1 The equipment shall include two self - priming sewage
pumps with motors V -belt driven as required, all
piping and valves ready to connect suction pipes
and to discharge main, all electrical control
equipment, blower, heater and internal wiring.
' System to be as shown on Drawings.
06 - 06.2 Operating Conditions
Each pump shall have a capacity of 100 GPM pumping
raw unscreened sewage at a total head of 44 feet.
Total suction lift shall be 18 feet. Pump to oper-
ate at a speed of 1750 RPM and motor shall be rated
3 H.P.
1 06 -06.3 V -Belt Drive Pumps
For V -belt drive the pump shall be provided with a
1 bearing bracket that supports pump shaft. The
shaft shall be sealed with two mechanical seals
with an oil chamber between the seals. The sta-
tionary seal ring for both seals shall be ceramic
and the rotating seal ring for both seals shall be
carbon.
' A stainless steel sleeve shall be used over the
shaft at the impeller.
1
' 06 -11/21 1/81
The impeller shall screw into the shaft and shall
be locked with socket head screw and.washer.
Pump shaft shall be movable from the pulley end so
that impeller clearance can be adjusted without
using gaskets or shims or dismantling pump.
The motor shall be mounted over the bearing bracket
and shall be supported by a frame mounted to the
station cover.
Frame shall have a movable motor support base so
that belts can be tightened when required.
The motor shall be horizontal NEMA frame and shall
be open drip proof. The motor rating shall be 3
H.P., 1750 RPM, 60 Hz, 230/460 Volts, 3 Phase.
Pump shall operate at 1750 RPM. Proper sheaves and
belts shall be supplied to operate the pump at spe-
cified RPM.
06 - 06.4 Mounting Cover
Pumps, piping, electrical controls, blower and
heater shall be mounted on a common gas tight steel
cover. Cover shall be provided with lifting lugs
for installation. Concrete wet well shall be 6
feet inside diameter. A manhole shall be provided
in the cover outside the house area for access to
the sump.
06 -06.5 Piping
Piping shall be 4 -inch standard pipe size. A com-
bination check and shut off valve shall be provided
for each pump.
The common pump discharge shall extend down through
the cover and shall terminate in a standard pipe
flange for connecting to discharge main.
The suction of each pump shall be connected to a
short length of pipe to extend through the cover,
suction pipes to terminate in a standard flange
below the cover for connecting suction piping.
Steel pipe shall be used for suction piping in the
sump. Suction piping.shall extend to within 6
inches of sump bottom. All piping and valves shall
be of the flanged type.
06 -12/21 1/81
06 -06.6 Pump House
A fabricated steel pump house shall be provided to
cover pumps and equipment. The house shall slide
horizontally on rollers so that it can be lifted
off for installation of equipment and for checking
equipment after installation.
One end wall of the house shall be permanently at-
tached to cover and shall be rigidly supported to
the piping. The electrical control box, heater,
blower and service light shall be mounted on the
inside of this wall. The control box shall be
mounted on the outside of the wall.
The light shall be operated by a circuit breaker in
the control panel.
The alarm light shall be mounted on the outside of
the wall and to be turned up so that the light will
be visible in all directions.
The house shall and other end wall shall be remov-
able as a unit by sliding back on rollers attached
to sump cover.
When house is in the closed position, a lock bolt
shall extend through the stationary end wall for
locking with a padlock.
06 -06.7 Electrical Control Panel
All electrical equipment for controlling pumps
shall be mounted in a NEMA III enclosure and to be
mounted on outside of back wall of house. The
panel shall be Model 02031 -011. Electrical rating
shall be for 230/460 Volt, 3 Phase, 60 Hz, power
for 3 H.P. duplex operation.
Electrical equipment shall include a circuit break-
er for each pump, a circuit breaker for the blower,
a circuit breaker for the heater, and a circuit
breaker for the service light, a magnetic contactor
for each pump, a 3 -leg overload block for each pump
and an alternating relay. A terminal block shall
be furnished for connecting level controls.
A hand - off - automatic switch and run light shall be
supplied for each pump.
06 -13/21 1/81
06 -06.8 Level Controls
06 -06.9 Alarm
Elapsed time meters shall be provided for each
pump.
A 3KW transformer shall be provided to supply 115
volt power for blower, heater and service light.
Control circuit shall be 24 volts.
The sump level shall be controlled by Hydr -O -Matic
Model 3900 Mercury tube float type level switches..
The controls shall be supported by the control cord
with a weight attached to the cord to hold control
at proper level in the sump. Height of control
shall be adjusted at the sump cover and a separate
removable plate shall be furnished in the cover so
that controls can be removed for service as requir-
ed.
Three level controls shall be used for the duplex
operation of the pumps. The lower control shall
turn off the pumps; the first middle control shall
start the pump and alternate pumps on each succes-
sive cycle; the upper override control shall start
both pumps if level rises to this height.
A red flashing alarm light shall be provided. This
light shall be controlled by a 3900 level switch
mounted in the sump, and to be adjustable for
height at the sump cover.
The flasher unit for the light shall be of the
solid state type with no moving contacts. Alarm
shall be mounted in NEMA III enclosure and to be
attached to outside wall of house so that it is
visible in all directions.
06 -06.10 Blower and Heater
A squirrel cage blower with a capacity of 270 CFM
at 0.5 inches of water pressure shall be provided
for ventilation. The blower shall be thermostati-
cally controlled for operation at a turn on temper-
ature of 80 °F. (adjustable). The blower discharge
shall be in the stationary wall and shall be
screened. The inlet from the blower shall be over
the pumps and in the end wall through screened
louvers. A 1500 watt electric heater shall be pro-
vided to heat pump house. The heater shall be
06 -14/21 1/81
thermostatically controlled for a turn -on tempera-
ture of 40 ° F. (adjustable).
' 06 -06.11 Painting
Lift station equipment, pipe and fittings conform
to Section 10 - Painting and Protective Coatings.
The interior of the lift station wet well shall be
painted with three (3) coats of "Inertol ", or ap-
proved equal, by the pipe manufacturer in accor-
dance with the paint manufacturer's recommenda-
tions. Inertol shall not be applied until the pipe
has been cured for at least seven (7) days. The
first coat shall consist of five (5) parts of Iner-
tol Standard and one (1) part of Inertol Thinner
*1000. The second and third coats shall be Inertol
Standard. Each coat shall be thoroughly dried for
at least four (4) hours before the next coat is
applied. Inertol containing pinholes, scratches,
etc., shall be rejected or the Contractor shall, at
his expense, repaint the area that is affected with
three (3) coats of Inertol as described above.
06 -06.12 Payment
The lump sum price bid for the lift station shall
include all labor, equipment, materials, and inci-
dentals required to fabricate and install the lift
station complete with wet well, piping and under-
ground electric service from control house, paint-
ing, along with all specified appurtenances as
shown on the construction plans, at the proposed
site.
06 -07 FLOW MEASUREMENT AND RECORDING
06 -07.1 General
•
The Contractor shall furnish and install a Venturi
flow meter and accompanying flow indicator, totali-
zer- recorder in each location and size as shown on
the Plans. The recorder shall be located in the
graphic display panel as described in Section 17.
06 -07.2 Universal Venturi Tube, Static Inlet Tap Design
The metering primary shall be of the pressure dif-
ferential producing type utilizing pure static
pressure sensed at the inlet and throat. Devices
amplifying the differential by causing change in
06 -15/21 1/81
the direction of the flow at the cross sections
where inlet and /or throat static pressure is sensed
shall not be considered. The inlet section shall
be comprised of the cylindrical section of similar
diameter as the pipe in which the high pressure tap
is installed and shall incorporate a hydraulic
shape employing at least two vena contractae to
condition the flow pattern before it enters the
throat tap section. The laying length of the
throat shall be at least 0.6 times the throat dia-
meter. The low pressure tap shall be installed in
this section. The outlet cone shall be truncated
having an included angle of 10 degrees. The dif-
ferential pressure shall indicate flow change only.
Devices employing entire or partial Pitot effects,
amplifying differential and introducing unwanted
noise shall not be acceptable. The tube coeffi-
cient shall be constant for pipe Reynolds number of
75,000 and greater and independent of beta ratio.
The tube shall be constructed of cast iron, ASTM
Tentative Specification for Gray Iron Castings for
Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, Designation
Al26 - 61T, Grade B. The throat liner shall be con-
structed of bronze, ASTM Standard Specification for
Stem and Valve Bronze Castings, Designated B61 -63.
The ends of the tube shall be as indicated in the
tabulation. The entire tube, excepting the throat
liner and vent bushings shall be coated as indicat-
ed in the tabulation. The metering element shall
not have debris collecting cavities or annular
chambers but shall have a single pressure connec-
tion at•the inlet and throat. In addition, vent
ports and drains shall be included on a 90- degree
plane to the metering tap. The manufacturer shall
furnish certified data substantiating tube propor-
tions and performance. The data shall include co-
efficient values and tolerance; effects of upstream
configurations; head loss as a function of the
velocity head expended; and proof that coefficient
is independent of beta and line size. The accuracy
shall be + 0.75% of actual rate of flow correspond-
ing to the differential produced, over the range
indicated in the tabulation. The tube shall be a
BIF Model 181 or approved equal product.
06 -07.3 Flow Transmitter
The transmitter shall be actuated by an integral
mercury U -tube manometer having provision for field
06 -16/21 1 /81
1
,
1
,
,
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
range change from 20 to 320 inches of water differ-
ential. The manometer wells shall be of steel hav-
ing a capacity of not less than 7 pounds of triple
distilled mercury. An internal check valve system
shall protect the mercury supply from excessive or
reverse differential. The mercury wells shall be
equipped with air vent valves, a piping manifold
with bypass valve and a hydraulic test head device
for checking calibration in the field. The mano-
meter shall drive a large diameter float mechanism
• having positive, no backlash, positioning of the
output shaft. The output motion shall drive the
time pulse mechanism through a linkage having a
self - locking range adjustment. The transmitter
shall operate on 115 V., 60 Hz through an internal
switch and fuse module. The time pulse mechanism
shall consist of a synchronous motor driven func-
tion generating cam, a rate arm, magnet rocker bar
and a hermetically sealed glass enclosed signal
switch. The output shall be a time pulse signal
directly proportional to flow. The pulse cycle
shall be as indicated in the tabulation. The
transmitter shall have a micrometer type zero ad-
justment. The components shall be contained in a
molded high impact plastic case forming a NEMA 4
enclosure. The wells and back plate shall be fin-
ished in charcoal gray and the case in light beige.
The maximum differential pressure and flow rate
shall be as indicated in the table. The accuracy
shall be + 0.5% of maximum rate over a 10:1 range.
The transmitter shall be a BIF Model 231 -21 or ap-
proved equal product.
06 -07.4 Receiver - "B" Case - Time
The receiver shall be actuated by any standard time
pulse input signal. The electronic circuitry shall
be of solid state components. The electronic cir-
cuit shall convert the time pulse signal to a bi-
nary count which is transduced into a dc voltage
proportional to the input signal. The dc signal
shall drive a servo positioner by means of a closed
loop circuit. The servo shall drive the various
mechanisms of the instrument. The positioner shall
remain motionless unless there is a change in the
measured variable. All components within the re-
ceiver shall be of modular construction with each
circuit card plugged into a mother board which
shall be wired directly to an internal terminal
strip with color coded wire. The circuit shall be
06 -17/21 1/81
equipped with zero and span adjustments. The
necessary dc power supply for the signal circuit
shall be an integral part of the receiver and com-
patible with commercial telephone requirements.
The entire mechanism shall be mounted on a swivel
plate with magnetic latch making all components
completely serviceable from the front of the in-
strument. Internal wiring shall include on -off
switch and fuse. The mechanism shall be contained
in a steel case with pressed steel door, forming a
NEMA 1 enclosure. The charts shall be nominally 12
inches in diameter, driven by a synchronous motor
and have equally spaced graduations over the full
range. The inking system shall be of the capillary
"fine line" type having a nominal 30 day supply.
The chart speed and graduations shall be as indi-
cated in the table. The indicator shall be nomi-
nally 10 inches long, with separate door opening,
and silk screen processed black graduations on
white background. The totalizer shall be of the 7
digit cyclometer type with 1/4" white numerals on
black background. The multiplier for all readout
functions shall consist of the addition of ciphers
only. The accuracy of the indicator and recorder
portion of the instrument shall be + 0.5% of full
scale over a 10:1 range. The totalizer accuracy
shall be + 0.5% of actual rate of flow. The re-
ceiver shall be a BIF Model 235 -01 (TIR) or approv-
ed equal product.
The recorder shall be located in the graphic
display panel.
06 -08 PLANT WATER SERVICE METER
The Contractor shall supply and install one plant
water meter with valves, fittings and vault per
Plans. The meter shall be a W -350 DR Turbo - Meter,
Rockwell Meters, or approved equal, with magnetic
drive, flange fittings and direct reading register
in gallons.
06 -09 DRINKING FOUNTAIN
The drinking fountain shall
ratory adjacent to the sink
The drinking fountain shall
6 -GPH, Model No. S5C, Stock
Grainger, Inc., or approved
06 -18/21
be located in the labo-
, as shown on the Plans.
be a floor Model,
No. 2W155, W. W.
equal.
1/81
06 -10 RATE OF FLOW CONTROLLER AND $RESSURE REDUCER
A rate of flow control level and pressure reducing
valve shall be furnished and installed as shown on
the Engineer's Drawings. The rate of flow control-
ler shall be supplied with a control panel for two
(2) rate of flow selections: 3 - MGD (2100 GPM); 6
- MGD (4200 GPM) and shut -off with a 0 -5 minute
delay timer. The shut -off function shall be con-
trolled with the plant operating controls. The
valve shall open upon raw water pumps starting and
shut -off with raw water pumps stopping. The con-
trol panel shall be located in the graphic display
panel.
The valve shall maintain a constant rate of flow
regardless of fluctuations in upstream pressure.
The valve shall be a hydraulically operated, pilot -
controlled, diaphram type valve. The main valve
shall have a single removable seat and a resilient
disc. The valve stem shall be guided at both ends
by a bearing in the valve cover and an integral
bearing in the valve seat. No external packing
glands are permitted. The diaphram shall not be
used as a seating surface, and there shall be no
pistons operating the main valve or any pilot con-
trols. The pilot control shall be a direct - acting
diaphram valve designed to close when the actuating
differential increases beyond the spring setting.
The actuating differential pressure shall be pro-
duced by a thin -edge orifice plate installed in an
orifice flange at the valve inlet. The valve to be
supplied shall be equal to a Cla -Val Model 40GE-
06BC. The valve supplied shall be minimum 16"
diameter and shall produce a pressure loss across
the valve of not more than 7.5 psi at a peak plant
flow of 4200 GPM.
06 -11 FLOW & LEVEL RECORDERS
06 -11.1 General
Provide material and services necessary to furnish,
install and place in service a complete system of
recorders as described herein for the water treat-
ment plant.
Use this item with Section 09 for general electri-
cal construction.
06 -19/21 1/81
06 -11.2 Level Recording - Rabbit Hill Standpipe &
Business Highway 81 North Standpipe
The Booster Pump Station Contractor shall furnish
and install a Bristol Model 0G534M -15 Transmitter
or approved equal at the Rabbit Hill Standpipe site
and a Bristol Model IMIM 500 G13R3 or approved
equal receiver - recorder inside the booster pump
station with an auxiliary electrical contact for
the Water Treatment Plant Contractor to make con-
nection for a signal to the Rabbit Hill Standpipe
recorder in the water treatment plant building.
Provide a Bristol Series 4330 Dynamaster Servo
Recorder or approved equal in the water treatment
plant building with all wiring and relays as re-
quired.
A Bristol Model 0G534M -15 Transmitter exists at the
Business Highway 81 North Standpipe. The Booster
Pump Station Contractor shall furnish and install a
Bristol Model IMIM 500 G13R3 or approved equal
receiver - recorder or a Bristol Series 4330 Recorder
or approved equal inside the booster pump station
with an auxiliary electrical contact for the Water
Treatment Plant Contractor to make connection for a
signal to the Business Highway 81 North Standpipe
recorder in the water treatment plant building.
Provide a Bristol Series 4330 Dynamaster Servo
Recorder or approved equal in the water treatment
plant building with all wiring and relays as re-
quired.
06 -11.3 Flow Recording - Booster Pump Meter
The Booster Pump Station Contractor shall furnish
and install a Rockwell W -5500 DR /HSP Flow Meter
with Model 1000 ACT -PAK Totalizer /Flow Indicator
with an auxiliary contact located inside the boos-
ter pump station building. Provide a Rockwell
Model 1000 ACT -PAR Totalizer /Flow Indicator in the
water treatment plant building with all wiring and
relays as required. Water treatment plant building
is located within 600 feet of booster pump station
building so that Belden 8770 cable may be used to
carry signal without requiring a secondary trans-
mitter. The flow rate indicator shall be a 3 -1/2"
wide scale horizontal panel meter to read in "gal-
lons per minute" from 0 to 7000 GPM. The re -set-
table totalizer shall read in "gallons ". Provide
panel brackets for recess mounting in a graphic
display panel.
06 -20/21 1/81
06 -11.4 Tests
Provide one year's supply of extra charts and ink
for recorders.
Provide the services of a manufacturer's serviceman
to adjust and test the recorders and flow indica-
tor
06 -12 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The lump sum price bid for the plant equipment spe-
cifically itemized in the bid proposal shall in-
clude all labor, equipment, materials, and inciden-
tals required to fabricate and install the equip-
ment, complete with all specified appurtenances as
shown on the Construction Plans and herein speci-
fied. Items not specifically itemized shall be
included in plant equipment bid item.
06 -21/21 1/81
SECTION 07 - PIPING
07 -01 GENERAL •
07 -01.1 Work Included
All labor and materials to complete all work as
shown on the Drawings or specified.
07 -01.2 Care of Pipe Coating and Lining
Pipe shall be so handled that the coating or lining
will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the
coating or lining is damaged, the pipe shall be
subject to rejection.
07 -01.3 General Requirements for Alignment and 'Grade
The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the re-
quired lines and grades with fittings and valves at
the required locations; spigots centered in bells;
and all valve stems plumb.
The inside of the pipe wall at the bottom of the
installed pipe shall slope continuously in the
direction indicated and shall be located on the
invert elevations indicated within 0.01 foot for
gravity piping and within 0.03 foot for all other
piping.
07 -01.4 Deviations Occasioned by Other Structures
Wherever obstructions not shown on the Plans are
encountered during the progress of the work and
interfere to such an extent that an alteration in
the Plans is required, the Engineer shall have the
authority to change the Plans and order a deviation
from the line and grade, or arrange with the owners
of the structures for the removal, relocation, or
reconstruction of the obstructions. If the change
in Plans results in a change in the amount of work
by the Contractor, such altered work shall be done
on the basis of payment to the Contractor for extra
work under the requirements of the General Condi-
tions, or credit to the Owner for less work. No
deviations shall be made from the line and grade
without the written consent of the Engineer.
07 -1/14 3/81
07 -01.5 Excavation for Piping
Excavation for piping shall be in accordance with
the applicable requirements of Section 02 herein.
07 -01.6 Interruption of Service
No drainage channel storm sewer, or other utility
shall be put out of service without written appro-
val of the Engineer and /or Owner.
07 -01.7 Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall submit and obtain approval of
shop and material details of pipe and fittings be-
fore the materials are manufactured. See Section
16, herein for items requiring approval.
07 - 01.8 Insulated Fittings
Pipe, flanges, and fittings exposed above grade and
located outside of a wall shall be electrically
insulated or insulated per Section 07 -07.
07 -01.9 Threads
American Standard Pipe thread shall be used for
I.P.S. threaded work. No screwed pipe joints shall
be caulked or screwed up with rope or packing of
any kind. Burrs formed by cutting tools shall be
reamed out and, before installation, each section
of pipe shall be examined to see that it is clean
and clear. Pipes shall be free from tool marks.
When erecting plated, polished, or soft -metal pip-
ing, friction wrenches shall be used exclusively.
In "marking up" screwed joints, Crane or Key White
thread lubricant shall be used and applied to male
threads only.
07 -01.10 Supports and Anchors
Pipe supports, unless otherwise shown on the Draw-
ings, shall be provided at the base of all risers,
at intervals not to exceed 5 feet on all runs of
pipe 2 inches and smaller in diameter. Pipe run in
groups shall be spaced equally and kept parallel
throughout the length of the run. Pipe abutting
walls or ceilings shall be supported by Unistrut
P1000 channels, Figure 650 pipe clamps and hanger
rods if necessary.
07 -2/14 3/81
07 -02 MATERIALS
07 - 02.1 General
For pipe over 2 inches, hangers shall be Grinnel
Company No. 260.
For pipe 2 inches and less, hangers shall be Grin -
nel Company No. 97. All items shall be galvaniz-
ed.
Pipe supports shall be Grinnel Company No. 264,
complete with proper size extension pipe and floor
flange.
Expansion bolts and inserts driven into concrete
slabs for pipe hangers shall be installed without
injury to the structure.
Anchorage shall be provided for fittings where
there is danger of pulling joint when under pres-
sure.
Piping material shall be as herein specified unless
otherwise shown on the Plans. Standard Specifica-
tion designations shall be the latest published
designations. Coatings shall be specified in Sec-
tion 10.
07 -02.2 Asbestos - Cement Pipe (ACP)
Shall conform to AWWA C -400 and shall be a minimum
of Class 200.
07 -02.3 Steel Pipe
Pipe 6 inches in diameter and smaller shall be
designated black steel pipe (BS), galvanized steel
pipe (GS), and Schedule 80 seamless steel pipe (Sch
80 Seamless) and shall be manufactured in accor-
dance with ASTM A -120. The minimum class 'pipe
shall not be less than Schedule 40.
07 -3/14 3/81
Fittings shall be 150 pounds and threaded, unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings. Unions larger
than 2 -1/2 inches shall be standard flanged
unions. Welded fittings shall conform to ASTM
A - 234 with a wall thickness equal to, or greater
than the pipe wall. Mitered fittings shall conform
to AWWA C -208. Flanges shall be ASA -150. Welding
shall be in accordance with AWWA C -206.
Pipe larger than 6 inches shall be designated STL
and shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA
C - 201 or 202. Fittings shall be steel welded fit-
tings ASTM A -234 with a wall thickness equal to or
greater than the pipe wall. Mitered fittings shall
conform to AWWA C -208. Flanges shal=l be in accor-
dance with AWWA C -207, hub type. Welding shall be
in accordance with AWWA C -206.
Pipe 8 to 12 inches shall be Schedule 40; 14 to 28
inches shall be Schedule 10; and 30 inches and
larger shall have a wall thickness of 5/16 inch
(0.312 ").
07 -02.4 Cast Iron Pipe (CIP)
Shall be manufactured in accordance with ASA A -21.6
Cast Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds,
or ASA A -21.8 Cast Iron Centrifugally Cast in Sand -
lined Molds. All cast iron pipe shall have a bitu-
minous coating inside and outside in accordance
with ASA A -21.4 standard thickness. Fittings shall
be in accordance with ASA A -21.10 or AWWA Class D
for bell and spigot, and mechanical joint; ASA
A -21.11 for lock -type push -on joints; and ASA
B -16.1 for flanged joints, Class 125. The class of
the pipe shall be as designated on the Drawings and
in no case less than Class 150.
Requirements common to all cast iron pipe:
- Hammer Test: The pipe and fittings shall be in-
spected for defects and, while suspended above
ground, be rung with a light hammer to detect
, cracks.
- Cutting Pipe: The cutting of pipe for inserting
valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done
in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage
to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a
smooth end at right angles to the axis of the
pipe.
07 -4/14 3/81
The flame- cutting of pipe by means of oxyacetylene
torch shall not be allowed.
07 -02.5 Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP)
Pipe shall be centrifugally cast ductile iron with
the pipe barrel meeting all quality requirements of
AWWA Specification C -151. Ductile iron pipe shall
have a bituminous coating inside and outside, in
accordance with AWWA C -104 standard thickness.
Fittings shall be the same as specified for cast
iron pipe. The class of the pipe shall be desig-
nated on the Drawings and in no case less than
Class 50.
07 - 02.6 Cast Iron Soil Pipe (CISP)
Shall conform to ASTM A -74 and to ASA A -40.1. They
shall be extra heavy weight and shall be coated
with coal, tar, pitch, or varnish. Fittings shall
conform to ASA B -16.
Joints in cast iron hub - and - spigot soil pipe shall
be of lead and picked oakum. Not less than one and
one -half (1 -1/2) inches of lead room shall be left
after caulking with oakum, and this space shall run
full with lead in one pouring. After cooling, the
lead shall be tightly caulked in the joints. All
dirt and dust shall be removed from the hubs and
spigots before jointing. Lead shall be poured so
that after caulking it will finish flush with the
hub. At least two (2) ounces of pure soft pig lead
for each joint to each inch diameter of the pipe
shall be used.
Caulder couplings or rubber sleeves with stainless
steel bands shall be used with plain -end pipe.
07 - 02.7 Copper Pipe (CU)
Shall be ASTM B- 88 -51, Type L. Pipe 1/2 inch in
diameter and larger shall be "hard- drawn" and
smaller than 1/2 inch shall be annealed. Fittings
1/2 inch and larger shall be streamline solder -
•joint fittings and smaller than 1/2 inch shall be
flared. Connections to other piping, tanks, and
pumps shall be made with dielectric unions.
In "making up" joints in copper tubing lines, only
torches for that purpose may be used. Common blow
torches will not be permitted.
07 -5/14 3/81
07 -02.8 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC)
Polyvinyl chloride pipe for chlorine solution shall'
conform to Commercial Standard CS207 -60, Type 1,
with a minimum wall thickness corresponding to
Schedule 40 unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
Jointing shall be in accordance with the manufac-
turer's recommendations. For buried water pipe,
where approved by the Engineer, polyvinyl chloride
pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM 1784 -601 and
ASTM D- 2241 -64T may be used. Threaded pipe shall
- be Schedule 80 pipe. The minimum class pipe shall
be Schedule 40.
07 - 02.9 Polyethylene Pipe (PE)
Water laterals or service connections shall be con-
structed of copper tube standard ultra - high molecu-
lar weight high density polyethylene plastic pipe,
meeting or exceeding PE 3306 of Commercial Standard
255 - 63 and has NSF approval; or Polybutylene plas-
tic pipe which shall meet or exceed ASTM D -2666 and
has NSF approval.
07 -02.10 Corrugated Plastic Pipe (Perforated)
Corrugated plastic pipe shall be light - weight poly-
ethylene construction and conform to Commercial
Standards CS228 -61. The pipe shall have 1/2 inch
perforations, 6 holes per foot. The pipe shall be
Channel Flow Type as manufactured by Hancor, Inc.,
Findlay, Ohio.
07 -02.11 Flexible Couplings (FC)
Shall be sleeve -type, with the stop removed in the
middle ring. Couplings located underground shall
be Smith -Blair 431 for the sizes provided therein.
Otherwise, underground couplings shall be Smith -
Blair 411 or Dresser Style 38 with a fusion epoxy
coating. Above ground couplings shall be Smith -
Blair 411 or Dress Style 38.
07 -02.12 Flanged Coupling Adapters (FCA)
Flanged coupling adapters, with anchor studs and /or
harnesses as indicated on the Drawings, shall be
Smith -Blair 912 or Christy Metal Products, Inc.,
Type 2011 for nominal diameters from 3 to 12 inch-
es. For diameters greater than 12 inches, adapters
07 -6/14 3/81
Anchorage across flexible coupling with bent rods
will not be permitted.
07 -02.13 Gaskets
All gasket material shall be Crane's "Cranite" 1/16
inch asbestos sheet packing. Gaskets shall be
coated with thread lubricant when being installed.
Flange bolts shall conform to ASTM A -307.
07 -02.14 Concrete Steel Cylinder (CSC)
Concrete steel cylinder pipe shall conform to
A.W.W.A. C -301.
07 -03 PLUMBING
07 -03.1 General
The Contractor shall furnish and install all pip-
ing, valves, fittings, and accessories to provide a
complete plumbing installation as shown on the
Plans and as specified. All materials shall be new
and undamaged, and shall conform to the Specifica-
tions and to applicable codes.
07 -03.2 Rules and Regulations
All work and materials shall be in full accordance
with the latest rules and regulations of the
National Fire Prevention Association and the State
Fire Marshal; the safety orders of the State Divi-
sion of Industrial Safety; the National Electric
Code; the Uniform Plumbing Code, published by the
Western Plumbing Officials Association; and other
applicable local or state laws or regulations.
Nothing in the Drawings or Specifications is to be
construed to permit work not conforming to these
codes.
When the Specifications call for materials or con-
struction of a better quality or larger sizes than
required by the above mentioned rules and regula-
tions, the provisions of these Specifications shall
take precedence over the requirements of the said
rules and regulations.
The Contractor shall furnish, without any extra
charge, any additional material and labor when re-
quired by the compliance with these rules and regu-
lations, though the work be not mentioned in these
particular Specifications or shown on the Draw-
ings.
07 -7/14 3/81
Spaces are provided in the design for the construc-
tion of the building to install the plumbing work
and the Contractor shall keep all pipe within the
furring lines established on the Drawings, unless
pipes are shown exposed.
All pipes shall be run in the approximate locations
shown and shall be of sizes given on the Drawings.
Unless otherwise shown, pipelines shall be run
parallel to, or at right angles to, the structure.
Piping must be offset wherever necessary to obtain
head room. In all cases, pipelines shall be in-
stalled to conform to the actual conditions found
in the building such as offsetting to clear struc-
tural members, etc.
Holes for pipes through walls, domes, or ceiling
shall be lined with 24 -gauge galvanized steel
sleeves with one -half inch (1/2 ") flanges each end.
Where all posed pipes pass through walls, ceilings,
or floors, they shall be fitted (in lavatory and
chlorine rooms) with chrome - plated plates. Plates
must be securely held in position, allowing enough
clearance to care for expansion.
Pipes through the roof shall be flashed and made
watertight using SEMCO 6 pound seamless lead flash-
ing with six inch (6 ") skirt- and -caulk type counter
flashing sleeve.
Wherever changes in sizes of piping occur, the
changes shall be made with reducing fittings, as
the use of bushings will not, in general, be per-
mitted. Eccentric reducing fittings shall be used
wherever necessary to provide free drainage of
lines.
All "horizontal" drainpipes within the building
shall have a minimum of one - quarter -inch (1/4 ")
pitch per foot, unless other marked or required to
obtain the indicated inverts.
' Cleanouts shall be installed where required or
where indicated on Drawings. No cleanouts or
valves shall be installed in inaccessible places.
Where valves, traps, or cleanouts are installed in -
furred ceilings or walls, the Contractor shall fur-
nish and install access plates and frames in the
furring.
07 -8/14 3/81
The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all plumbing
fixtures and trim free from rust, dirt, etc., be-
fore any covering or painting is done or the system
put in readiness for final inspection.
The Contractor shall protect all vitreous- finished
surfaces of fixtures with heavy paper plaster here-
on, or by other means, throughout the period of
construction.
The piping system shall be flushed out until it is
thoroughly clean in the judgement of the Engineer.
All openings into pipes shall be effectively capped
to keep foreign matter out while under construc-
tion.
After the completion of all work, all resulting
debris shall be removed to leave the entire work in
a complete and undamaged condition and the system
adjusted to proper operation.
07 -03.3 Materials
Fixtures: Fixtures are specified on the Plans.
07 -04.1 General
Floor Drains and Traps: Floor drains shall be cast
iron as manufactured by number as shown on the
Drawings. Traps shall be cast iron and shall be
installed as near as possible to the unit which
they service.
Dielectric Fittings: Shall be provided wherever
dissimilar metals are connected.
07 -04 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE LINES
All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined
for defects and no piece shall be installed which
is shown to be defective. Special care shall be
taken to avoid leaving bits of wood, dirt, and
foreign particles in the pipe.
Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign
material from entering the pipe while it is being
placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot
place the pipe in the trench without getting earth
into it, the Engineer may require that, before low-
ering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, tightly
07 -9/14 3/81
woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed
over each end and left there until the connection
is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying
operations, no debris, tools, clothing, or other
materials shall be placed in the pipe.
At times when pipelaying is not in progress, the
open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight
plug or other • means approved by the Engineer.
Pipe shall be laid with the bell ends or coupling
ends facing in the direction of the laying unless
directed otherwise by the Engineer or specifically
indicated on the Drawings.
All pipe shall be carefully placed and supported at
the proper line and grade, and shall be sloped to
permit drainage. Minor adjustment may be necessary•
to avoid architectural and structural features.
Major relocations shall be approved by the Engi-
neer. Minimum earth cover shall be 30 inches, un-
less otherwise shown on the Drawings.
Sufficient screw unions, flanges joints, or flex-
ible couplings shall be used to allow the conven-
ient removal of any run of pipe without removing
adjacent runs or equipment. Where practicable,
make -up joints have been indicated on the Drawings;
however, omission of these joints from the Drawings
does not excuse the Contractor from their installa-
tion. • Whenever a pipe larger than 3 inches in dia-
meter is cast or grouted in place and passes from
concrete to earth, a flexible coupling must be used
on the earth side. Bare metal pipe passing from
concrete to earth shall be wrapped with Scotch Wrap
50 for 3 inches each side of the concrete face on
the earth side.
Air piping from the air supply (compressor and
receiver) to electric solenoid air control valve
shall be galvanized iron pipe per Section 07 -02.3.
Air piping from the electric solenoid air control
valve to the pneumatic valve shall be copper pipe
per Section 07.02.7. Size of copper pipe per valve
manufacturer's recommendations.
07 - 05 INSTALLATION OF GRAVITY LINES
Wherever possible, the Contractor shall avoid the
distribution of pipe to the trench site too far in
advance of the laying operations. The Contractor
shall exercise care in the unloading of the pipe so
as to avoid damage caused by the unloading opera-
tions.
07 -10/14 3/81
Immediately preceding the laying of a length of
sewer pipe, it shall be visually checked for dam-
age, defects, and to ensure that the inside of the
pipe is clean and free from debris.
Both bell and spigot shall be clean before the
joint is made, and care shall be taken that nothing
but the joint- making material enters the joint.
If water is encountered in the trench, it shall be
kept below the bottom of the bell of the pipe.
Should the water, through neglect or otherwise,
rise in the trench before the jointing operation is
completed, the anular space in all pipe so affected
shall be freed of all water and foreign matter and
thoroughly cleaned before completing the jointing
operation.
When pipe laying is not in progress, the forward
end of the pipe shall be kept effectively closed
with an approved temporary barricade.
07 -06 CLEANING, TESTING AND DISINFECTION
07 -06.1 General
Pressure and gravity lines shall
foreign matter and tested in the
the satisfaction of the Engineer
corrected or, in the case of the
be brought within the allowable
tractor's expense.
The Contractor shall furnish the
labor, equipment, and materials,
the Engineer in making tests of
tem before the system is placed
connected to other lines.
07 -11/14
07 -06.3 Disinfection
be cleaned of all
presence and to
. Leakage shall be
sewer lines, shall
limit at the Con-
necessary pumps,
and shall assist
the completed sys-
in operation or
07 -06.2 Cleaning
The gravity and pressure lines shall be flushed
clean prior to testing or disinfection.
Potable water systems shall be disinfected in ac-
cordance with AWWA C -601 "Procedure for Disinfect-
ing Water Mains ".
3/81
07 -06.4 TESTING
07- 06.4.1 Tests or Water Mains
All testing of pipe shall be done under the super-
vision of the City, and the Contractor shall fur-
nish all equipment and materials for the testing
and shall perform such tests as described as fol-
lows:
a) Duration - The duration of the hydrostatic test
shall be a minimum of four (4) hours.
b) Pressure - The pipeline shall be tested so that
tre`ssure at the lowest point in the test
section is at least 100 %, but not greater than
120% of the pipe pressure class of the pipe,
and the minimum pressure at the highest point
in the test section is not less than 85% of the
pipe pressure class of the pipe.
c) Allowable Leakage - The maximum allowable leak-
age for push -on joints is the number of gallons
per hour as determined by the following formu-
la:
where:
L = ND
3,700
L = Allowable leakage in gallons /per hour
N = Number of joints in the length of pipe
tested
D = Nominal diameter of the pipe in inches
P = Average of the maximum and minimum pres-
sures within the test section in psi.
d) Filling Rates - Maximum filling rates in gal-
lons per minute equivalent to filling veloci-
ties of 1 foot per second, for pipes flowing
full.
07 -12/14 3/81
Nominal Size Flow Rate Q (gpm)
4 9.8
6 14.7
8 19.6
10 24.5
12 29.4
14 34.3
16 39.2
18 44.1
20 49.0
24 58.8
27 66.1
30 73.4
33 80.8
36 88.1
42 102.8
48 117.5
07- 06.4.2 Air and Gas Piping
Air and gas piping shall be tested for a period of
four (4) hours at 100 psi or 1.5 times the operat-
ing pressure, whichever is greater. There shall be
no drop in pressure allowed.
07- 06.4.3 Chlorine Solution Piping
Chlorine solution piping shall be tested with air
for a period of four (4) hours at a pressure of 100
psi. There shall be no leakage allowed.
07- 06.4.4 Gravity Lines
No pressure test shall be required.
07 -06.5 Marking Tape
Detectable mylar marking tape will be installed
over all non - metallic pipe lines. Care will be
taken to insure that the buried marking tape is
mylar encased aluminum foil. Test data for the
tape will be provided on request.
07 -13/14 3/81
07 -07 PIPE INSULATION
07-07.1. Insulation'
The insulation shall be pre - molded sectional ure-
thane pipe covering with an All Service Jacket
(ASJ) manufactured by Southwest Insulators, Inc. or
approved equal. Fittings shall be mitered sections
of the same insulation material wrapped with glass -
fab and sealed with a primer coat of Foster 30 -36
and finished with a final coat of Foster 60 -26. In
lieu of mitered fittings, fittings can be wrapped
with a fiberglass wrap and finished with a pre -
molded PVC fitting cover and sealed with a coat of
Foster 60 -26.
07 -07.2 Outside Piping
All outside insulation piping shall be finished
with 15 lb. roofing felt staped on 2" centers with
all longitudinal and butt seams overlapping a mini-
mum of 2" and sealed with Foster 60 -26 weather-
proofing. 36" Black Glass Fab may be substituted
in lieu of 15 lb. roofing felt.
07 -07.3 Valves
Valves and flanges shall be insulated with prefab-
ricated urethane insulation covers as manufactured
by Southwest Insulators, Inc. Covers shall be
wired in place. -A11 voids shall he made solid by
pouring liquid urethane in the valve and flange
covers. The covers shall be finished with black
glass fab and sealed with a coat of Foster 60 - 26
weatherproofing.
07 -08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No separate payment for work performed under this
item. Include cost of same in Contract prices bid
for item of which this work is a component part, or
include in yard piping.
07 -14/14 3/81
SECTION 08 - VALVES, GATES AND APPURTENANCES'
1 08 -01 GENERAL
' 08 -01.1 Scope
Work Included: The Contractor shall furnish and
' install the valves, valve boxes, stops, and gates
as specified in their respective locations as de-
lineated on the Drawings or as required for the
proper functioning of each section of pipeline con-
1 cerned.
08 -01.2 Standard Requirements
1 In general, all valves 2 -1/2 inches and smaller in
diameter shall be provided with screwed ends and
' all valves larger than 2 -1/2 inches in diameter
shall have flanged or bell ends unless otherwise
indicated on the Plans or in these Specifications.
' Flanges shall be dimensioned, faced, and drilled to
the 125 -pound "American Standard". All mechanical
joints shall conform to ASA Specifications A -10 and
A -11 to fit the piping. The dimensions of the
sockets of hub and gate valves shall conform to the
dimensions for Class "D" special castings as re-
quired by the AWWA Standard Specifications for cast'
1 iron pipe and special castings. All necessary
caulking materials, gaskets, bolts, and nuts shall
be provided.
Valves shall be carefully installed in their re-
spective positions, accessible for operation and
repair. Unless specified in Drawings, valves shall
'
be of the same sizes as the pipelines in which they
are installed and stems shall not be installed
pointing down. Valves shall be left in satisfac-
tory operating condition, free from all distortion
and strain. The valves or gates shall be connected
to floor stands where required. All stem guides
1 shall be accurately aligned and secured.
Valves shall be supplied with suitable operating
keys, levers, handwheels, or chain operators as re-
quired.
All valve operators shall turn in a counterclock-
1 wise direction to open the valve.
All valves located in the plant shall have graduat-
1 ed dial for accurate metering.
08 -1/6 9/80
08 -01.3 Testing
All valves shall be tested in place so far as prac-
ticable under the conditions specified and any de-
fects revealed in valves or connections under test
shall be corrected.
08 -01.4 Protection and Painting
Floor stands, hydraulic cylinders, valves, and
gates shall be protected at all times, both before
and after erection until the completion of the
work, from rust or other damage. After installa-
tion, all valves except bronze valves and those
underground shall be painted in accordance with the
painting requirements of the pipelines of which
they are a part, and the same color as the pipe.
Bright or rubbing parts shall not, however, be
painted, but shall be protected with an approved
lubricant.
08 - 02 VALVES
08 -02.1 Gate Valves
All double disc gate valves shall have their stems
in a vertical position or designed for proper oper-
ation in the positions shown on the Drawings and
shall have the same clear internal diameter as the
pipe on which they are placed.
All double disc gate valves located above ground,
or in building and pumping station, shall be out-
side screw and yoke, operated with a handwheel or
hydraulic cylinder. -
Al1. double disc gate valves, 2 -1/2 inches and larg-
er, located underground shall be nonrising stem
equipped with square operating nut. Gate valves
installed below ground shall be provided with valve
boxes and removable covers.
All gate valves 2 -1/2 inches in diameter and small-
er shall be brass with rising stems, a double disc,
and parallel seats, and for a working cold water
pressure of 200 pounds and a saturated steam pres-
sure of 125 pounds. These gate valves shall be
screwed unless otherwise shown in Drawings and
shall be Crane Valves No. 430 as manufactured by
the Crane Company, San Francisco, California, or
Stockham No. B -114 as manufactured by Stockham
Company, Inc.
08 -2/6 9/80
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Gate valves larger than 2 -1/2 inches shall be
flanged, faced, and drilled, iron body, bronze -
mounted, parallel seat, double disc, eccentric stem
nut, bottom.wedge type, outside screw, and yoke,
operating with handwheel or hydraulic cylinder - or
hub end, nonrising stem with square operating nut
as required by location. These valves, 2 -1/2 inch-
es and larger, shall conform to AWWA C -500 with "0"
ring seal. Valves 14 inches and larger shall be
equipped with bypasses to conform to AWWA C -500.
08 -02.2 Check Valves (Water Service)
All check valves shall be of a type that will oper-
ate in the position shown on the Drawings. Assur-
ance must be given by the manufacturer that the
check valves will function without slamming when
operating in the locations and with the head condi-
tions shown on the Drawings. Check valves that do
not.meet and perform to these requirements will be
rejected.
On lines 2 inches and under, check valves for water
shall be Stockham Figure B -345, Kennedy No. 444, or
Grove Chex -flo Model 61.
On lines larger than 2 inches, check valves for
water shall be List 23, Chapman Nonslam, cast iron
tilting disc valves, as manufactured by the Chapman
Division of Crane Company, Clayton Valve No. 60P,
81B, 91 and 92L as manufactured by Cla -Val Com-
pany.
08 -02.3 Plug Valves
Valves shall be of the non - lubricated, eccentric
type with resilient faced plugs and screwed, flang-
ed, or mechanical joint ends as shown on the Draw-
ings. Bodies shall be semi -steel with raised
seats. Seats in valves shall have a welded -in
overlay of high nickel content on all surfaces con-
tacting the plug face. Valves shall have perma-
nently lubricated, stainless steel bearings in the
upper and lower plug stem journals. All valves
shall be of the bolted bonnet design. All 4 - inch
and larger valves shall be designed so that they
can be repacked without removing the bonnet and the
packing shall be adjustable. All exposed nuts,
bolts, springs, and washers shall be zinc plated.
Flanged valves shall be faced and drilled to ANSI
125 /150 -pound standard. Flanges of valves through
12 -inch shall have face -to -face dimensions of stan-
dard gate valves.
08 -3/6 9/80
Manual valves shall have lever or gear actuators
and tee wrenches, extension stems, floor stands,
etc.,, as indicated on the Drawings. All valves 8
inches and larger shall be equipped with gear actu-
ators. All gearing shall be enclosed in a semi -
steel housing and be suitable for running in a lub-
ricant with seals provided on all shafts to prevent
entry of dirt and water into the actuator. The
actuator shaft and the quadrant shall be supported
on permanently lubricated bronze bearings. Actua-
tors shall clearly indicate valve position and an
adjustable stop shall be provided to set closing
torque. All exposed nuts, bolts, and washers shall
be zinc plated.
Valves and gear actuators for buried or submerged
service shall have seals on all shafts and gaskets
on the valve and actuator covers to prevent the
entry of water. Actuator mounting brackets for
buried or submerged service shall be totally en-
closed and shall have gasket seals. All exposed
nuts, bolts, springs and washers shall be stainless
steel.
08 -02.4 Hose Valves (Hose Bib)
Hose valves shall be 3/4 inch in size and shall be
rough brass and bronze composition disc Crane No.
58, or equal.
08 -02.5 Globe and Angle Valves
Globe and angle valves, bronze with threaded ends,
composition disc, and for a working pressure of 200
pounds cold water. The design of the valves shall
be such that the area of the port opening, when
valve is wide open, is not less than the area of
the pipe in which the valve is installed. The
valves shall be as manufactured by the Crane Com-
pany, San Francisco, California, or equal.
08 -02.6 Chlorine Valves
Valves for dry chlorine gas service shall be ball
valves rated for 300 pounds, carbon steel body in
accordance with ASTM A -105, screwed -end connection,
monel ball and stem, teflon seating, and seals per
Chlorine Institute Pamphlet No. 6. Valves shall be
as manufactured by WKM Division of ACF Industries
or the Jamesbury Corporation, or equal.
08 -4/6 9/80
Valves for chlorine solution shall be thermoplastic
ball valves, true union design of PVC material with
teflon seats and viton seals as manufactured by
Cabot Piping Systems or Grinnel- Saunders diaphram
valves as supplied by the Grinnel Company, or
equal.
08 -02.7 Air Line Valves
Air line shut off valves at each distribution air
line shall be DeZurile eccentric plug valves with
resilient face, series 100 or WKM ball valves. At
the centrifugal blowers, valves shall be Hoffman
butterfly valves, flanged. Check valves at the
blowers shall be Hoffman flanger, discharge check
valves, or equal.
08 -02.8 Pressure Relief Valve
The pressure relief valve shown on the Plans shall
be pipe size as shown on the Plans, Clayton Model
50 or Clayton Model 50A, as noted on Plans, as
manufactured by Cla -Val Company, Newport Beach,
California, or equal.
08 -02.9 Butterfly Valves
Butterfly Valves shall conform to requirements of
AWWA C -504 and shall be DeZurik, or equal, with
cast iron body and a moulded rubber seat, recess
mounted.
Valve operation shall be capable of holding the
valve in any position between open and closed with-
out creeping or fluttering. Buried valves shall
have sealed grease packed gear-operating nut with
suitable stem extension to within one foot of the
ground surface and tee wrench. Interior valves
shall be equipped with gear units and handwheels.
Pneumatic operators shall be supplied per the valve
manufacturer's recommendations.
08 -02.10 Valve Boxes
Valve boxes shall be furnished and installed on all
buried valves. Boxes shall be either cast iron or
precast concrete as shown on the Plans.
Cast iron valve boxes shall be firmly supported,
centered, and plumb over the operating nut and up-
per portion of the valve with the valve box cover
flush with the finished grade. Cast iron valve
boxes shall be Iowa F -2450 of Mueller H -10360 with
extension pieces as required.
08 -5/6 9/80
The concrete box and extension shall be firmly sup-
ported, centered, and plumb over the valve. The
box and extensions shall be a Model 3RT as manufac-
tured by Brooks Products, or equal.
Valve boxes located in unprotected areas shall be
equipped with a 3 inch thick foam insulation layer
attached to the underwise of the valve cover. The
insulation material shall be approved by the Engi-
neer.
08 -02.11 Backflow Preventer
The backflow preventer valve assembly shall be the
pipe size and at location as shown on the Plans,
Clayton Model D -2 as manufactured by Cla -Val Com-
pany, or approved equal.
08 -02.12 Pressure Regulator
The pressure regulating valve shall be a pressure
reducing valve the pipe size and at the location as
shown on the Plans, Clayton 90G -01 series, set for
100 psi delivery pressure, as manufactured by Cla-
Val Company or approved equal.
08 -02.13 Pneumatic Operators
Cylinders shall be suitable for operation with min-
imum 50 psi, pneumatic supply. Piston rods shall
be chrome plated. Cylinder pivots shall have bear-
ings. All cylinder actuators shall be provided
with stationary supply connections and flexible
cylinder supply lines to allow rigid supply piping
to the valve. Valves shall be furnished complete •
cylinder and 4 -way solenoid. Solenoid shall be
120/60/1 a.c., NEMA IV, and shall include speed
control and manual override.
All valves and actuators shall be FIG 632 as manu-
factured by DeZurik, or approved equal.
08 -03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No separate payment for work performed under this
Item. Include cost of same in Contract prices bid
for item of which this work is a component part, or
include in yard piping.
08 -6/6 9/80
1
SECTION 09 - - ELECTRICAL
1 09 -01 SCOPE
' The work covered by this section of the Specifica-
tions consists of furnishing all labor, equipment,
supplies, and materials, including cutting, channel-
' ing, and chasing, necessary for the installation of
a complete system for power and lighting and other
systems as indicated, electrical service connections
and electrical equipment, in strict accordance with
this section of the Specifications and the applic-
able drawings, and subject to the terms and condi-
tions of the Contract.
' 09 -02 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
The following Specifications and standards shall
form a part of these Specifications:
1 National Board of Fire Underwriters, National
Electric Code (Current Edition)
' Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (Standards)
09 -03 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The electrical division of the work is a part of the
general contract, and the general conditions, in-
cluding and supplementary general conditions, which
' precede the main body of the Specifications and
shall govern all materials and labor to be furnished
under this section of the Specifications and all
procedures.
09 -04 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
' The Specifications are accompanied by Plans showing
the location of all outlets and the details of the
proposed electrical installation. The Drawings and
these Specifications are complimentary, each to the
other and what is called for by one shall be as
binding as if called for by both. The Contractor
' shall, upon completion of the electrical installa-
tion, provide the Engineer with drawings and details
of electrical work that differs from the Contract
Documents. In case of conflict in the Drawings and
1 09 -1/9 1/81
1
the Specifications, the one requiring the larger
capacity or better quality shall govern. All equip-
ment requiring electrical power, specified under
this or other sections of the Specifications or
Drawings shall be connected complete. The Contrac-
tor's electrician shall notify the building manufac-
turer of any additional frame work necessary to sup-
port the control panels per the Drawings and Speci-
fications.
09 - 05 CODES, PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
The installation shall comply with all local and
state laws applying to electrical installation, and
with the regulations of the latest issue of the
National Electrical Code, where such regulations do
, not conflict with the laws and local ordinances now
in effect. These regulations shall be considered as
minimum requirements. The Drawings show the instal-
lation as it shall be installed with the minimum re-
quirements of the codes above as a base, and all
cost incident thereto shall be included in the Con-
tractor's Bid. The Contractor shall obtain all per-
mits and licenses required by the local ordinances
and shall include the costs of all such permits, re-
quired for this •installation in his bid. Upon com-
pletion of the work, the Contractor shall furnish
the Engineer a certificate of final inspection and.
approval from the appropriate local inspection au-
thority.
09 -06 PROGRESS AND GUARANTEE
The Contractor shall coordinate the progress of the
electrical work with the progress of the work of the
other trades on the job, and shall complete the
electrical installation as soon as the condition of
the building will permit. The Contractor shall•
leave the entire electrical installation in proper
working order and shall, without additional charge,
replace any work or material which develops defects,
except from ordinary wear and tear, within one (1)
year from the date of the Owner's acceptance of the
building.
09 -07 CUTTING: REPAIRING
The Contractor shall do all cutting, channeling,
patching, etc., incidental to the electrical work.
He shall arrange with the General Contractor for all
necessary work openings or chases.
09 -2/9 1/81
09 -08 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
All materials shall be new and shall conform with
the standards of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. in
every case where such a standard has been establish-
ed for the particular type of material in question.
All work shall present a neat and mechanical appear-
ance when complete and shall be executed in a work-
manlike manner. In all cases the work shall be done
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
09 -09 CONDUIT SYSTEM
All above ground wiring installed on the project
shall be run in an enclosed system of conduit unless
specifically provided or necessitated otherwise by
the conditions of the installation. Unless provided
otherwise, all conduit shall be galvanized, heavy -
wall, rigid metallic with fittings of corresponding
quality and design as manufactured by Triangle, Nat-
ional Electric or approved equal of sufficient size
to meet code requirements for the conductors to be
installed, but in no case smaller than 1/2 ". The
conduit system shall be arranged and installed in
such manner as to give the facility the utmost de-
gree of reliability and maintenance -free operation.
The conduit shall have an appearance of having been
constructed by competent workmen. Kinked conduit,
conduit inadequately protected or swabbed, careless-
ly threaded and joined do not give such reliability
and maintenance -free operation and will not be ac-
cepted.
All conduit runs shall be exposed on walls and
underside of roof slabs, unless indicated otherwise.
All conduit runs shall be made parallel or at right
angles to the building lines. All conduit ends
shall be reamed out after threading and kept corked
and dry during construction. All conduit shall be
swabbed out before the wires are pulled in and no
lubricant shall be used except powdered soapstone.
Bends in rigid conduit shall be made with an approv-
ed bending device unless factory bends are called
for. Pipe sleeves of min. #22 gauge galvanized
steel shall be installed for all conduit that pass
through concrete floors or walls. The sleeve shall
be properly secured in place with approximately 1/4"
space between each sleeve and the surface of the
pipe. Where conduits enter the building underground
09 -3/9 1/81
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1,
1
1
1
from outside, I.P.S. wrought iron sleeves shall be
used. The space between the sleeves and the conduit
shall be caulked with a suitable plastic expandible
compound that will prevent the entrance of mois-
ture.
All conduit shall be equipped with double locknuts
and steel body, plastic insulating bushings where
such conduit enter panelboards, pull- boxes, junction
boxes, wireways and the like. All conduit that en-
ter into equipment free of the metal cabinet work
and also where indicated, shall be equipped with a
grounding type insulated bushing. A copper ground-
ing conductor shall be bonded to the cabinet frame-
work and to the grounding lug of the insulated bush-
ing. Conduit shall enter all panelboards, pull -
boxes, junction boxes, outlet boxes and the like
straight and true. Conduit installed cocked or not
plumb will not be accepted and work so installed
shall be replaced by the Contractor.
Neoprene jacketed metallic - flexible conduit shall be
used to extend conduit connections to all motors and
other comparable pieces of equipment or as indicated
on the Drawings. The length of flexible connection
shall not be less than 24 inches.
All underground wiring will be placed in direct bur-
ial PVC rigid conduit using an approved grounding
conductor installed in accordance with the recommen-
dations of the manufacturer. A 2" thick cap of 1500
psi concrete will be poured over the underground
conduit. The top of the concrete cap will have 24"
of cover.
09 -10 CONDUCTOR
A complete system of conductors shall be installed
in the raceway systems. Conductors, unless other-
wise indicated, shall be thermoplastic - insulated
type THW. Home runs may be combined in one conduit,
provided all connections are in accordance with
National Electrical Code requirements and the maxi-
mum unbalanced current in the neutral does not ex-
ceed the capacity of the conductor. All conductors
to be copper.
09 -4/9 1/81
09 -11 ELECTRICAL SERVICE SYSTEM
The primary and secondary lighting and power service
will be as indicated on the Drawings. The Electri-
cal Contractor shall furnish and install the service
and the service equipment as shown on the Drawings.
The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install
all enclosed safety switches complete with the fuses
where shown on the Drawings. Items installed out-
side shall be "raintite ".
09 -12 GROUNDING SYSTEM
The conduit systems and neutral conductor of the
wiring system shall be grounded. The ground connec-
tion of the electrical system neutral and conduit
system shall be made at the main service switch. A
bard copper ground conductor, sized in accordance
with the National Electrical Code shall be provided.
Secondary equipment in isolated locations shall be
effectively bounded and permanently grounded. The
ground shall serve for both the electric and equip-
ment when applicable.
09 - TEMPORARY POWER
Temporary power shall be provided by the Contractor.
09 -14 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Outlets shall be installed in the locations shown on
the Drawings. The Contractor shall study the con-
struction plans in relation to the spaces surround-
ing each outlet in order that his work may fit other
work required by these Specifications. When neces-
sary, the Contractor shall relocate outlets so that,
when fixtures or other fittings are installed, they
will not interfere with other work or equipment.
Zinc - coated or cadmium plated sheet steel boxes
shall be used unless otherwise specifically noted or
required. Boxes shall be installed in rigid and
satisfactory manner. Switch, telephone and recep-
tacle outlet boxes, except where otherwise specified
or required, shall be steel 2- inches deep. Switch
and receptacle boxes containing not more than one
device and no splices or tape may be of the "Handy"
or "Universal" type.
Pull boxes shall be constructed of code -gage galva-
nized sheet metal, of not less than the minimum size
recommended by the National Electrical Code. Boxes
shall be furnished with screw - fastened covers.
09 -5/9 1/81
09 -15 BRANCH CIRCUITS
Branch - Circuit conductors shall not be smaller than
No. 12 AWG, except that conductors for branch cir-
cuits whose length from panel to center of load ex-
ceeds 100 feet shall not be smaller than No. 10 AWG.
Conductors for control circuits may be No. 14 AWG.
Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to out-
.let, and no splices shall be made except within
outlet or junction boxes. Junction boxes may be
utilized where required. Wire connectors of insu-
lating material or solderless pressure connectors,
properly taped, shall be utilized for all splices in
wiring where possible. Soldered joints insulated
with tape shall be kept to a minimum. Vinyl plastic
tape will be used where required.
09 -16 WIRING DEVICES
(a) Duplex convenience receptacles shall be rated 20
amperes at 125 volts. Bases shall be constructed of
gray pheonolic composition. Receptacles shall be
both back and side wired. Mounting straps shall have
plaster ears. Receptacles to be of the grounding
type, specification grade. All receptacles shall
have a separate ground wire from the grounding screw
to a grounding stud in the outlet box.
(b) Wall switches shall be of the silver contact "A"
type. •Switching mechanism shall'be complete within
itself and shall not depend on mounting straps as a
functional part of the switching action. All switch-
es shall be specification grade. Switches shall be
AC rated for 20 amperes or as noted. Single pole and
three -way switches shall be rated 125 volts and shall
have an ampere rating for the connected lamp loads.
No switches shall be located behind doors without
specific written authorization by the Engineer.
09 -17 LIGHTING FIXTURES
Fixtures shall be as specified on the Drawings, or
approved equals. All fixtures shall be furnished
complete with all fittings, parts and stems shall be
of the same manufacturer as the fixture on which they
are used and shall be installed strictly according to
the manufacturer's recommendations and /or as specifi-
cally detailed on the Drawing. Any deviations from
these specifications without specific approval from
the Engineer will be remedied without charge by the
Contractor. All fluorescent ballasts to be "P" rated
(G.E., Westinghouse, or Jefferson). All ballasts to
be CBM, SPF, "A" sound - rating.
09 -6/9 1/81
09 -18 LAMPS
Lamps shall be furnished and installed by the
Contractor. Incandescent lamps and fluorescent
tubes shall be as manufactured by Westinghouse, G.E.
or Sylvania. Flourescent tube color shall be cool
white.
09 -19 OTHEP,SYSTEMS
Other systems shall be as specifically indicated on
the Drawings. All empty conduits shall be provided
with $9 iron pull wire.
09 -20 ELECTRICAL POWER EQUIPMENT
09 -20.1 Control Equipment
The Contractor shall furnish and install all motor
starter and electrical control equipment as noted on
the Drawings. All starters furnished shall be of
the same make.
09 -20.2 Control Wiring
The Contractor shall furnish and install all wir-
ing.
All control wiring shall be tagged in each box and
at each termination. The controls shown on the
Drawings are for the convenience of the Contractor
and may not be complete in all details for the
equipment selected for installation. The Contractor
shall coordinate all work and equipment installation
to insure that all components of electrical control
system will perform their intended function.
All control wiring shall be installed in strict ac-
cordance with this and other paragraphs of the elec-
trical specification.
Motor Disconnect Means: Each motor shall be provid-
ed with a disconnecting means even though not indi-
cated on the Drawings. A switch with bus fuse hold-
ers and fusetrons (sized according to actual motor
rating) shall be provided at each motor (each under-
ground conductor shall be fused). Switches of 30 to
400 ampere capacity shall be of the enclosed, quick -
make and quick -break type, hou'sepower rated. Swit-
ches shall disconnect all ungrounded conductors.
09 -7/9 1/81
Lightning Arresters shall be furnished on the secon-
dary service of each project. Such lightning arres-
ters shall be Thyrite type, G.E. 9L15BCC003 or ap-
proved equal suitable for the particular installa-
tion. Lightning arresters shall also be provided on
motor feeders of motors 10 H.P. or greater.
Transformers may be required on certain installa-
tions where operating voltages other than that fur-
nished by the power company are required. In such
cases, the Contractor shall furnish and install the
necessary transformer(s) which shall be Dry -Type
General- Purpose of proper type and size for the in-
tended load as manufactured by G.E. or approved
equal.
Phase Monitoring Relays shall be furnished for all 3
phase motors 10 HP or larger to protect the motors
from a phase unbalance or phase reversal on the 240
or 480 volt, 3 phase, 4 -wire incoming power service.
Install the relays in the pump motor starter enclo-
sures or in a separate enclosure.
Cutler - Hammer Type "P ", Catalog 4D60 -N, or approved
equal, monitoring relays shall be installed.
09 -21 ELECTRIC MOTORS
Electric motors shall be of the size and voltage
shown on the Plans and shall conform to the stan-
dards of the American Institute of Electrical Engi-
neers. - Enclosures for motors shall be waterproof
except for motors located within the Plant Building.
For motors connected to pumps or drive units, the
motor shall have thrust bearings of adequate capa-
city to safely carry the weight of rotating parts
and any unbalanced thrust. Motors shall be General
Electric, Westinghouse or Reliance or approved
equal.
09 -22 SHOP DRAWINGS
Complete electrical and dimensional drawings, along
with a detailed functional description shall be
provided prior to fabrication for approval by the
Consulting Engineer. Complete catalog literature
detailing component capabilities shall also be
included. Refer to Section 13 - Shop Drawings.
09 -8/9 1/81
09 -23 EQUIPMENT FINISH
All cubicles, cabinets, enclosures, brackets, doors,
panels, hinges, and other items are to be thoroughly
cleaned and a phosphotizing treatment shall be ap-
plied prior to the application of any paint. The
phosphotizing shall chemically convert the metallic
cabinets to a non - metallic phosphate coating. After
the phosphotizing treatment has been applied, the
primer will be sprayed on to a minimum thickness of
1 mil. and flash baked for five (5) minutes at 300
degrees F. Paint applied over untreated metal is
not acceptable. Finish coats will then be applied
over the baked on enamel to a thickness of 1 -1/2
mils. The units must then be rebaked thirty (30)
minutes at 300 degrees F. or adjusted equivalent.
At least two (2) colors shall be selected by the
Engineer from the equipment manufacturer's standard
chart of at least fifteen (15) colors.
09 -24 GUARANTEE
All control equipment shall be guaranteed against
defects in material and workmanship for a period of
one (1) year from the date of system acceptance.
09 -25 HEATING EQUIPMENT
Electric unit space heaters shall be furnished and
installed at such locations as are shown on the
Plans or as otherwise specified. Heaters shall be
7,500 watt units manufactured by one of the follow-
ing: ILG, Wesix, Electromode, Nu -Tone, Chromolox,
or approved equal of the size indicated. Heaters
shall be fan circulating type suitable for contin-
uous operation with thermostatic controls and mount-
ing brackets suitable for the particular installa-
tion. Where a choice of more than one voltage is
available, the unit shall be selected for the volt-
age most advantageous to the Owner based on effi-
ciency, reliability and general adaptability to the
situation.
09 -26 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No separate payment for work performed under this
Item. Include cost of same in Contract prices bid
for item of which this work is a component part.
09 -9/9 1/81
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION 10 - PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS
10 -01 GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,
and equipment necessary to provide painting and
protective coatings for the following items as spe-
cified herein. Preparation and application of pro-
prietary coatings specified herein shall be in
strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommen-
dations and as supplemented by these Specifica-
tions.
10 - 02 SCOPE OF WORK
It is the purpose of this Specification to outline
to the Contractor the necessary procedures for ob-
taining proper coating and painting application to
achieve satisfactory performance of the materials
under actual operating conditions.
Materials, surface preparation and application of
the materials are outlined in detail and specified
only as a guide to the Contractor. All painting
and coating shall be done strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions and shall be
performed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
In all cases of dispute concerning material,.sur-
face preparation or application of materials, the
Engineer or coating manufacturer's interpretations
and recommendations shall take precedence.
The paints and paint products of Kopper Company,
Inc. Pittsburgh, Pa., mentioned in the following
Specification are set up as standards of quality.
The usual or approved equal" clause shall apply.
All materials shall be brought to the jobsite in
the original sealed and labeled containers of the
paint manufacturer and shall be subject to inspec-
tion by the resident engineer on the job, or his
appointed representative. Colors, where not speci-
fied, shall be as selected by the Engineer.
All protective coatings and paints shall be stored
in enclosed structures to protect them from the
weather and from excessive heat or cold. Many
paint materials are flammable and must be stored so
as to conform with the County and State safety
codes for flammable paint materials. All emulsion-
10 -1/6 9/80
10 -03 PREPARATION OF SURFACE
10 -03.1 Metal
type coatings must be protected from freezing wea-
ther. All pyrolytic or thermosetting coating
materials must be protected from heat in excess of
the manufacturer's printed instructions or recom-
mendations so as to eliminate the setting reac-
tion.
No exterior or interior coating shall be done under
conditions which jeopardize the appearance or qual-
ity of the coating in any way. The Engineer shall
have the right to reject all material or work that
is unsatisfactory.
All ferrous metal to be primed in the shop shall
have all rust, dust, and scale, as well as all
other foreign substances, removed by sandblasting
or pickling. Sandblast surfaces to the equivalent
of a commercial blast surface in accordance with
National Association of Corrosion Engineers Stan-
dards NACE No. 3 or Steel Structures Painting Coun-
cil Specifications SSPC -SP6 and leave clean, dry
and ready to receive prime coat. Cleaned metal
shall be primed or pretreated immediately after
cleaning to prevent new rusting. All ferrous
metals not primed in the shop shall be sandblasted
in the field prior to application of the primer,
pretreatment, or paint. All non - ferrous metals,
whether to be shop or field primed, shall be sol-
vent cleaned prior to the application of the pre-
treatment and /or primer. In addition, galvanized
surfaces which are to receive Bitumastic No. 300 -M
as the finish coats shall be sandblasted to provide
a profile or "tooth ".
All exposed cast iron pipe, fittings, and valves
which are coated with asphaltum varnish, shall also
be cleaned to the equivalent of "commercial" sand-
blasting before painting.
After erection or installation of shop- coated metal
work, clean and retouch all rust spots, all places
where paint has been rubbed or scraped off, and all
field rivet and bolt heads and nuts. After pre-
viously applied paint has hardened, and when sur-
faces to receive succeeding coats of paint have
been perfectly cleaned and dried, apply paint in
10 -2/6 9/80
10 -03.2 Concrete
All concrete surfaces to be treated shall be clean
of all dust, form oil, curving compounds and other
foreign matter. Before applying paint or coatings
to a concrete surface the surface must either be
etched with a 20% muriatic solution or sweep sand-
blasted. Surfaces poured with concrete containing
an admixture or hardener or which are finished with
a steel trowel, may require sweep sandblasting or
"double etching" with a 20% solution of muriatic
acid before painting.
After acid etching, all surfaces should be flushed
copiously with water and allowed to dry thoroughly.
Prior to painting, all concrete surfaces shall be
clean, dry and free of dust, oil, grease or any
other foreign contaminants.
10 -03.3 Wood
10 -04.2 Wood
accordance with Section 10 -04 - Painting Schedule
set out below. Allow 5 days for hardening of final
coat before placing in water.
Wood surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and free
of all foreign matter, with cracks and nail holes
and other defects properly filled and smoothed.
Wood trim shall be sandpapered to a fine finish and
wiped clean of dust.
10 -04 PAINTING SCHEDULE
10 -04.1 Concrete and Concrete Block
Where specifically called for on the Plans the ex-
terior and interior, above grade, surfaces of
structures above shall be covered with one (1) coat
of Koppers Concrete and Masonry Filler applied at
100 square feet per gallon and two (2) coats of
Koppers 600 Acrylic Emulsion applied at the rate of
200 square feet per gallon per coat. Color shall
be noted on the Plans, Koppers Semi - Gloss.
All wood surfaces, except redwood, shall receive
one (1) coat of Kopper's 625 Undercoater applied at
400 square feet per gallon and two (2) coats of
Rustarmor 500 - Koppers Co. enamel applied at 500
square feet per gallon.
10 -3/6 9/80
1 10 -04.3 Metals
General: Prior to application of primer, all gal-
I
vanized surfaces, non - ferrous metals, and cast iron
piping shall be treated with Koppers 40 Passive-
tor.
'
Non - submerged, exposed metal surfaces, including
but not limited to hydrants, pipes, motors, valves,
I machinery, etc., shall be covered with one (1) shop
coat of Koppers 654 Primer applied so as to achieve
a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils and two
I (2) coats of Koppers Glamorglaze 200 Epoxy applied
so as to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of
1.5 mils per coat. Color shall be noted on the
I Plans.
Non - submerged below grade metal surfaces which will
be subject to moisture and condensation, including
'
but not limited to machinery, pump suction, piping
and pumps, shall be coated with two (2) coats for a
total of 35 dry mil thickness of Bitumastic 50 -
' Koppers applied at 60 square feet per gallon.
Submerged or intermittently submerged metal surfac-
1 es including, but not limited to weirs, troughs,
valves, rotary arm in clarifier, clarifier inlet
baffle and support structure, filtration system,
I etc., shall be primed with one (1) coat of Koppers
294 Epoxy Primer applied so as to achieve a minimum
dry film thickness of 1.5 mils and two (2) coats of
Koppers 200 HB Epoxy applied so as to achieve a
I
minimum dry film thickness of 6.0 mils per coat..
If metal is not shop painted, field sandblast to
near -white finish in accordance with NACE No. 2 .
I Standards or SSPC -SP10 surface preparations speci-
fications. After sandblasting apply one (1) coat
of Koppers 294 Epoxy Primer so as to achieve a min-
' imum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils and two (2)
coats of Koppers 200 HB Epoxy so as to achieve a
minimum 4ry film thickness of 6.0 mils per coat.
All sandblasted surfaces should be primed the same
I day they are blasted. Any blasted surfaces allowed
to sit unprimed overnight should be reblasted prior
to priming. Color shall be Dawn Blue #328.
I 10 -05 APPLICATION OF PAINT
I On metal surfaces, the painter shall apply each
coat of paint at the rate specified by the manufac-
turer to achieve the minimum dry mil thickness re-
quired. If material has thickened or must be di-
luted for application by spray gun, the coating
1 10 - 4/6 9/80
1
,1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
.
1
shall be built up on the same film thickness
achieved with undiluted material. In effect this
means one (1) gallon of paint as originally fur-
nished by the manufacturer must not cover a greater
square foot area when applied by spray gun than
when applied unthinned by brush. Deficiencies in
film thickness shall be corrected by the applica
tion of an additional coat of paint. On concrete,
application rates will vary according to surface
texture; however, in no case shall the manufactur-
er's stated coverage rate be exceeded. On porous
surfaces, it shall be the painter's responsibility
to achieve a protective and decorative finish
either by decreasing the coverage rate or by apply-
ing additional coats of paint.
Apply paint only when temperature and atmospheric
conditions are favorable to drying, and are such to
preclude condensation on surfaces to receive paint.
Do not apply paint when either surface•or ambient •
temperatures are less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit,
or when temperature drop of 20 degrees, or below 50
degrees Fahrenheit is forecast. Do not apply paint
to surfaces upon which there is frost or moisture,
nor during misty or rainy weather unless specific
approval is given.
Do not apply finish field painting to machinery,
equipment, or piping until operational testing has
been completed.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, imme-
diately upon completion of the job, certification
from the manufacturer indicating that the quantity
of each coating purchased was sufficient to proper-
ly coat all surfaces. Such certification shall
make reference to square footage figures provided
to the manufacturer by the Contractor.
Drying time shall be construed to mean "under nor-
mal conditions ". Where conditions are other than
normal because of the weather or because painting
must be done on confined spaces, longer drying
times will be necessary. Additional coats of paint
shall not be applied, nor shall units be returned
to service until paints are thoroughly dry.
After installation of machinery and electrical
equipment, check base coats carefully and retouch
all damaged surface areas. Do not paint name-
plates, serial number bases, chrome or bronze trim,
or any rotating parts. Clean off any excess paint
10 -5/6 9/80
that impairs convenient removal of covers on gaug-
es, instrumentation, or other equipment fitted with
doors or covers.
Thinners: Where thinning is necessary, only the
products of the manufacturer furnishing the paint,
and for the particular purpose, shall be allowed, ,
and all such thinning shall be done strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, as
well as with the full knowledge and approval of the
Engineer.
Colors: Unless specified on the Plans or elsewhere
in these Specifications, color of the painted sur-
faces shall be selected by the Engineer.
Upon completion of the protective coating and
painting, the Contractor shall remove all surplus
materials and rubbish and remove all spattered
material from surfaces where its presence is objec-
tionable. All coated or painted surfaces shall be
free from abrasion or other blemish when the pro-
ject Is ready for final acceptance by the Engi-
neer.
10 -06 WORKMANSHIP
All work shall be done by skilled craftsmen who are
qualified to perform the required work and shall be
done in a manner comparable to the best standards
of practice found in the trade. All materials
shall be evenly applied so as to be free from sags,
runs, crawls, wrinkles, holidays, or any other ap-
plication defects. All coats shall be of the pro-
per consistency and properly brushed out so as to
show the minimum of brush marks. All coats shall
be thoroughly dry before the succeeding coat is ap-
plied. All coats that are intended to hide shall
be given another coat if the coating does not pro-
perly hide the undercoat.
10 -07 PROTECTION OF WORK
Full protection shall be given other work from
damage by use of clean drop cloths during the time
that the paint is being applied.
10 -08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No separate payment for work performed under this
item. Include cost of same in Contract price bid
for items of which this work is a component.
10 -6/6
9/80
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION 11 - CONTROL SYSTEM - RAW WATER INTAKE SYSTEM,
WATER TREATMENT PLANT, AND BOOSTER PUMP
STATION
This item describes the control systems for
each of three different contracts to define the relationship
of each contract to the other and to outline each Contrac-
tor's responsibilities.
11 -1 RAW WATER PUMP CONTROL SYSTEM
11 -1.1 General
All items described in Paragraph 11 -1 shall be
provided by the Raw Water Intake System Contractor.
Provide material and services necessary to
furnish, install, and place in service a complete system of
automatic controls using leased telephone lines as described
herein, for the three raw water pumps.
Use of this item with Specification Section 09
for general electrical construction.
11 -1.2 Telemetering System
Telemetering controls shall be as manufactured
by B/W Controls or approved equal. Components for the float -
less liquid level control system include but are not limited
to B/W F-750 Transmitters, stainless steel wire suspension
electrodes, flanged electrode holders, relays, circuit break-
er panels, meter loops, wiring, conduit, enclosures, and
other items to provide for a functioning installation as
described herein and as shown,on the Plans.
The intended performance of the control system
is described as follows:
Three Raw Water Pumps (Located at Lake
Georgetown)
The on -off operation of the three (3) raw
water pumps shall be automatically controlled by liquid level
in the 1,000,000 gallon clearwell located at the water treat-
ment plant in Round Rock. The on -off raw water pump opera-
tion - a programmable sequencer as manufactured by Eagle Sig-
nal Corp. shall be provided to automatically alternate the
operation of the three raw water pumps. Electrodes within
the clearwell shall automatically control the on -off opera-
tion of the raw water pumps in conjunction with the alterna-
tor. The Water Treatment Plant Contractor shall connect a
11 -1/8 3/81
hand - off - automatic switch in the treatment plant for each of
the three raw water pumps to the raw water pump controls pro-
vided by the Raw Water Intake System Contractor inside the
booster pump station building for an override of the hand -
off- automatic switch on the raw water pump starters at Lake
Georgetown.
Provide control wiring to each of the three
automatic pump control valves in the concrete vault at Lake
Georgetown.
11 -1.3 Coordination with Other Contractors
At the booster pump station located at the
water treatment plant site, empty conduit with pull wires
shall be provided by the Booster Pump Station Contractor from
the booster pump station building to the clearwell and from
the telephone junction box on the exterior service pole to
the booster pump station building. Provide wiring and elec-
trodes for the raw water pump control system from inside the
booster pump station building to inside the clearwell and to
the exterior service pole. Utilize a spare 120 volt, single
phase, circuit breaker inside the booster pump stationbuild-
ing provided by the Booster Pump Station Contractor for con-
trol power. Provide an enclosure for the raw water pump re-
lays and mount on an interior wall of the booster pump sta-
tion building. Provide auxiliary electrical contacts on the
raw water pump controls inside the booster pump station
building for the Water Treatment Plant Contractor to connect
to for operation of the plant equipment and the graphic dis-
play panel in the plant.
11 -1.4 System Start -Up
Provide the services of a technician exper-
ienced in this type of automatic control system to be respon-
sible for the proper start -up and operation of the controls.
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate the
work with the electric and telephone utility companies who
will be providing service to these facilities, as well as
other Contractors as designated by the Engineer.
11 -1.5 Data To Be Furnished
Furnish the following for approval: descrip-
tive data for the specified instruments and control schema-
tic.
11 -2/8 3/81
11 -1.6 Measurement and Payment
No separate payment for work performed under
this item. Include cost of same in contract prices bid for
item of which this work is a component part.
11 -2 WATER TREATMENT PLANT CONTROL SYSTEM
11 -2.1 General
Performance specifications for water treatment
plant control system. All items described in Paragraph 11 -2
shall be provided by the Water Treatment Plant Contractor.
11 -2.2 Water Treatment Plant Equipment
Water treatment plant equipment controlled by
clearwell water level electrode probes includes:
Raw Water Intake Pumps (not a part of this
contract)
Chlorinators, both pre and post
Chemical Feed Pumps
Hydraulic Pumps - which operate rapid mixers,
flocculator mixers and clarifier drives
Automatic Flow Control Valve at Inlet to
Plant
11 -2.3 Wiring Connection at Booster Pump Station
The Raw Water Intake System Contractor shall
provide auxiliary contacts in the control cabinet for the
Plant Contractor inside the booster pump station building.
These contacts will be utilized by the Plant Contractor to
install his control wires for the treatment plant control
system. The control wires shall be provided in amounts and
sizes of conduit as required between the booster pump station
and the treatment plant control building. The Booster Pump
Station Contractor shall stub an empty 8" sleeve for conduits
to the exterior of the booster pump station building for the
Plant Contractor to utilize. The signal shall turn on the
treatment plant equipment when set in automatic mode.
11 -2.4 Start -Up Operating Sequence
11 -2.4.1 Water level in plant clearwell drops.
11 -2.4.2 Low water level probe in plant clearwell sig-
nals raw water pumps, automatic flow control
valve and plant equipment to start.
11 -3/8 3/81
11 -2.4.3 Hydraulic pumps start with raw water pumps.
Hydraulic pumps operate rapid mixer, floccula-
tors, and clarifier scraper drive units.
11 -2.4.4 Manually set pre and post chlorinators for
flow rate. Solenoid valves open with raw
water pumps start.
11 -2.4.5 Manually set chemical feed rate. Start with
raw water pumps.
11 -2.5 Shut -Down Operating Sequence
11 -2.5.1 Clearwell fills.
11 -2.5.2 High water probe in clearwell signals plant
equipment, automatic flow control valve and
_raw water pumps to stop. Pre - chlorinator
solenoid valve closes, post - chlorinator sole-
noid valve has a 0 -15 minute time delay which
is actuated at plant shut down, chemical feed
and hydraulic pumps stop.
• 11 -2.6 Measurement and Payment
No separate payment for work performed under
this item. Include cost of same in contract prices bid for
item of which this work is a component part.-
11 -3 CONTROL SYSTEM FOR BOOSTER PUMPS, CONTROL
VALVES AND EXISTING BOOSTER & WELL PUMPS
11 -3.1 General
All items described in Paragraph 11 -3 shall be
provided by the Booster Pump Station Contractor.
Provide materials and services necessary to
furnish, install, and place in service a complete system of
automatic controls using leased telephone lines as described
herein, for the booster pump station, automatic solenoid
valve and vault assembly, isolation valve and vault assembly
#1, isolation valve and vault assembly #2, two existing boos-
ter pumps located at the Westinghouse Road Pump Station and
two existing well pumps located near Chisholm Trail.
Use this item with Specification Section 09
for general electrical construction.
11 -4/8 3/81
11 -3.2 Telemetering System
Telemetering controls shall be as manufactured
by Bristol Instruments or approved equal, and by B/W Controls
or approved equal. Components for the floatless liquid level
control system include but are not limited to Bristol trans-
mitters, receivers and controllers, B/W F -750 transmitters,
stainless steel wire suspension electrodes, flanged electrode
holders, relays, circuit breaker panels, meter loops, wiring,
conduit, enclosures, and other items to provide for a func-
tioning installation as described herein and as shown on the
Plans.
The intended performance of the control system
is described as follows:
. 11 -3.2.1 Three Booster Pumps (Located at the Booster
Pump Station - 1981)
The on -off operation of the three (3) booster
pumps shall be automatically controlled by liquid level in
three (3) different tanks.
1) Existing 500,000 gallon Rabbit Hill Stand-
pipe
On-off booster pump operation - a tele-
metering system as manufactured by Bristol
Instruments or approved equal shall be
provided to automatically operate and
alternate the three booster pumps. Refer
to Item No. 16 of the Booster Pump Station
- 1981 Specifications for description.
The Water Treatment Plant Contractor shall
connect a hand - off - automatic switch for
each of the three booster pumps to the
booster pump controls provided by the
Booster Pump Station Contractor inside the
booster pump station building for an over-
ride of the hand - off - automatic switch on
the booster pump starters in the booster
pump station building.
2) Proposed 1 million gallon clearwell
Low level override protection - a B/W or
approved equal electrode system shall be
provided.
11 -5/8 3/81
3) Existing 750,000 gallon Business Highway,
81 North Standpipe
On -off booster pump operation with low
level in this standpipe - a two -pump timed
sequencer by Eagle Signal Corp. with a B/W
electrode system or approved equal shall
be provided to start the two pumps at dif-
ferent times upon signal from the stand-
pipe. One of the three booster pumps is
excluded from this mode of operation.
11 -3.2.2 Level Recording in the Existing 750,000
Gallon Business Highway 81 North Standpipe
The level of water in this reservoir shall be
continuously recorded with a Bristol or approved equal tele-
metering system as described in Item No. 16 of the Booster
Pump Station - 1981 Specifications.
11 -3.2.3 Isolation Valve & Vault•Assembly #1 (I.V. -1)
The open -close operation of I.V. -1 shall be
automatically controlled by liquid level in one tank.
1) Existing 750,000 gallon Business Highway
81 North Standpipe - open -close operation.
A B/W or approved equal telemetering sys-
tem shall be provided.
11 -3.2.4 Isolation Valve & Vault,Assembly #2 (I.V. -,2)
The open -close operation of I.V. -2 shall be
automatically controlled by liquid level in one tank. A B/W
or approved equal telemetering system shall be provided.
• 11 -3.2.5 Automatic Solenoid Valve & Vault Assembly
(ASV -1)
The open -close operation of ASV -1 shall be
automatically controlled by liquid level in one tank. A B/W
or approved equal telemetering system shall be provided.
11 -3.2.6 Existing•1000 GPM Booster Pumps at
Westinghouse Road Pump Station
The on -off operation of the two booster pumps
currently has a telemetering system that uses liquid level
control in the existing 500,000 gallon Rabbit Hill Standpipe
and low -level override protection in the existing 100,000
11 -6/8 3/81
gallon ground storage tank at the Westinghouse Road Pump Sta-
tion. This sytem shall not be revised.
11 -3.2.7 Existing 750 GPM Well Pump at Chisholm Trail
Well Pumping Plant #1 and Existing 300 GPM
Well Pump at Chisholm Trail Well Pumping
Plant #2
The on -off operation of the two well pumps
currently has a telemetering system installed in January
1981, that uses liquid level control in the existing 750,000
gallon Business Highway 81 North Standpipe and low -level
override protection in each well. Check out the operation of
this system when the new system is put into operation.
11 -3.3 Provisions by Booster Pump Station
Contractor for Coordination with
Raw Water Intake System Contractor
and Water Treatment Plant Contractor
The Booster Pump Station Contractor shall pro-
1 vide empty conduits and pull wires at the booster pump sta-
tion building for use by the Raw Water Intake System Contrac-
tor as described in Paragraph 11 -1 herein and as shown on the
Plans. The Booster Pump Station Contractor shall provide an
8" sleeve in the floor to the exterior of the booster pump
station building for use by the Water Treatment Plant
Contractor in installing conduit and wiring to the water
treatment plant and such auxiliary contacts and other items
as described in Paragraph 11 -2 herein and as shown on the
Plans.
11 -3.4 System Start -Up
Provide the services of a technician exper-
ienced in this type of automatic control system to be respon-
sible for the proper start -up and operation of the controls.
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate the
work with the electric and telephone utility companies who
will be providing service to these facilities.
' 11 - 3.5 Data To Be'Furnished
Furnish the following for approval: descrip-
tive data for the specified instruments and control schema-
tic.
1
1
1
1
11 -7/8 3/81
11 -3.6 Measurement and Payment
No separate payment for work performed under
this item. The Contractor shall supply and install all
necessary conduit, control wire, connections, and other elec-
trical equipment as required to control the plant equipment
and the graphic display panel. Include cost of same in con-
tract prices bid for item of which this work is a component
part.
11 -8/8 3/81
1
SECTION 12 - LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
12 -01 GENERAL
' The work covered by this section consists of fur-
nishing all materials, accessories, equipment,
tools, transportation, services, labor, and per-
1 forming all operations to furnish and install lab-
oratory furniture, equipment and supplies in accor-
dance with this section of the specifications and
applicable drawings and subject to the terms and
conditions of the Contract.
The furniture to be provided for this laboratory
shall conform to the specifications listed below.
The specifications shall insure that the equipment
shall be of the highest grade in materials, finish,
and workmanship. All materials used shall be the
best of its kind and all construction details shall
be in conformity with the best practices in the
industry.
12 -02 MATERIALS
1 Fabricate all cabinets to recognized industry stan-
dards for "custom grade" using ash with transparent
finish on all exposed surfaces.
1 Fabricate all cabinets in face -frame design with
reverse -bevel doors and drawer fronts.
12 -03 CONSTRUCTION
t For actual fabrication and installation of labora-
tory cabinetry, use only personnel who are tho-
roughly trained and experienced in the products
involved and in the recommended methods for their
fabrication and installation.
All finished carpentry shall produce joints true,
' tight, and well nailed with all members assembled
in accordance with the drawings.
' All joints shall be made to conceal shrinkage;
miter all exterior corners; cope all interior
corners; miter or scarf all end -to -end joints.
All trim shall be installed in pieces as long as
possible, jointing only where solid support is
obtained.
1
1 - 12 -1 /6 1/81
1
12 -05 SIDES
All trim shall be nailed with finish nails of pro-
per dimension to hold the members firmly in place
without splitting the wood.
All screws shall be screwed, not driven, except
that wood screws may be started by driving and then
screwed home.
12 -04 FINISHING
All wood surfaces shall be thoroughly sandpaper
finished as required to produce a uniformly smooth
surface, always sanding in the direction of the
grain, except that no wood shall be sanded which is
designed to be left rough. No coarse grained sand-
paper mark, hammer mark or other imperfection will
be permitted. Finish with two (2) coats of poly-
urethane.
Base cabinet wall and floor unit sides shall be of
finish grade pine plywood.
12 -06 BOTTOMS
Interior bottoms of all cabinets and cases shall be
of finish grade pine plyboard. Exposed undersides
of all -hung cases shall be finished as outlined
above.
12 -07 WOOD DOORS AND DRAWER FACINGS
All wood doors and drawer facings shall be ash for
transparent finish on all exposed surfaces. Hand-
les shall be brushed aluminum finish, commercial
standard grade.
12 -08 DRAWERS
Drawer bodies shall be finish grade pine plyboard.
All drawers shall be mounted on channel shaped
slides with four rollers supporting the drawer.
Drawers shall be easily removable.
12 -09 COUNTERTOPS
All laboratory tops shall be molded from a modified
epoxy resin that has been especially compounded and
cured to give optimum physical and chemical resis-
tance properties. All items are to be completely
12 -2/6 1 /81
oven cured prior to shipment. Tops are to be a
uniform mixture throughout their full thickness and
depend upon a surface coating for chemical or stain
resistance. Tops shall be black in color and pos-
sess high resistance to mechanical and thermal
shock. Countertops must be 3/4" thick. Counter-
tops shall be sized to fully cover the cabinets
furnished.
12 -10 SINHS & TROUGHS
All sinks shall be a specially formulated modified
epoxy resin, compounded and cured to produce maxi-
mum physical and chemical properties. They shall
be non - glaring, black with all inside corners cov-
ed. Bottom to be pitched to the drain outlet.
They shall possess a high resistance to mechanical
and thermal shock. Further, they shall have a non-
absorbent surface with a high resistance to heat.
12 -11 BACKSPLASHES
Backsplashes shall be constructed of a black, ther-
mosetting resin and shall be highly reistant to
wear and corrosive solutions. Height of splashes
shall be as shown on the Plans.
12 -12 LABORATORY FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall install one custom model Labo-
ratory. Equipment will be required as listed be-
low.
12 -13 GENERAL TESTS
The laboratory shall be fully equipped with chemi-
cals, glassware, and apparatus in order to conduct
the following record tests:
12 -13.1 gH
12 -13.2 Alkalinity
12 -13.3 Total Chlorine Residual
12 -13.4 Turbidimeter
12 -13.5 Jar Test (Floc Test)
12 -3/6 1/81
All record tests shall be performed, with the
equipment provided, using methods specified by the
U. S. Environmental Protection Agency in Title 40,
Code of Federal Regulations, Part 136.
12 -14 FURNITURE AND FIXTURES
Furniture and fixtures shall be provided for the
laboratory as shown on the Plans.
12 -15 MAJOR EQUIPMENT, GLASSWARE AND PLASTICWARE,
APPARATUS, CHEMICALS AND MISCELLANEOUS SUPPLIES
12 -15.1 General
The following equipment, apparatus, glassware and
chemicals shall be provided:
12 -15.2 Major Equipment
pH Meter - Hach Catalog No. 18800 -00
Alkalinity Test Kit - Hach Catalog No. 1433 -00
Total Chlorine Residual - Hach Catalog No. 14542 -00
Turbidimeter - Bach Catalog No. 18900 -00
Jar Test (Floc Test) - Hach Catalog No. 15057 -00
Laboratory Balance - Hach Catalog No. 14760 -00
12 -15.3 Glassware and Plasticware
Description Quantity
Beaker, 250 ml., BG 8
Bottle, 500 ml., Polyethylene Wash 2
Flask, Volumetric, 1000 ml., PC 1
Graduated Cylinder, 25 ml., PMP 2
Graduated Cylinder, 100 ml., PMP 1
Graduated Cylinder,' 500 ml., PMP 1
Graduated Cylinder, 1000 ml., PMP 2
Pipette, Mohr, 1 ml., BG 4
Pipette, Mohr, 5 ml., BG 4
Pipette, Mohr, 10 ml., BG 4
Pipette, Mohr, 10 ml., Large Tip, BG 1 _
Tube, Centrifuge, 15 ml., Conical,
Graduated, BG 4
Material Legend for Glass and Plasticware:
PE - Polyethylene
PP - Polypropylene
PMP - Polymethylpentene
AP - Acrylic Plastic
12 -4/6
SAN - Styrene -
Acrylonitrile
PC - Polycarbonate
BG - Borosilicate Glass
FG - Flint Glass
1/81
1
12 -15.4 Apparatus
I Description Quantity
I Pans, Aluminum Weighing, 6 cm. f 100
Pipette Filler, Bulb Type, 3 Valve 2
Thermometer, Armor Jacketed, 0 ° C. -50 ° C. 2
' Timer, Mechanical, 0 -120 minute 1
12 -15.5 Chemicals
1 Description Quantity
Buffer Soln., pH 4 1 qt.
'
Buffer Soln., pH 5 1 qt.
Buffer Soln., pH 6 1 qt.
Buffer Soln., pH 7 1 qt.
I Buffer Soln., pH 8 1 qt.
Buffer Soln., pH 9 1 qt.
Buffer Soln., pH 10 1 qt.
I Chlorine (Free) Powder Pillows 200
Chlorine (Total) Powder Pillows 200
I 12 -15.6 Miscellaneous Supplies
Description Quantity
1 Detergent, Lab Grade 1
Eye Wash Safety Station 1
Sludge Judge #H2233, 15' Water Core
I Sampler 1
Sludge Judge #H2235, Case 1
Extension Section #H2237 1
1 Sludge Judge by MASCO, P. 0. Box 3837, 1524
Prinston Avenue, Modesto, Cali. 95352, phone #(209)
529 -6957.
12 -16 PERFORMANCE
I The Contractor shall guarantee that the equipment
and materials included in the Contract and specifi-
cations shall give proper and continuous service
I under all the conditions of service required and
specified, or which may be reasonably inferred from
the specifications.
1 12 -17 DELIVERY
' A representative of either manufacturer or the sup-
plier shall unpack and inspect all items furnished
1 12 -5/6 1/81
and shall instruct operating personnel in the use
of the equipment. Instruction shall be given to
conduct the test as shown in Standard Methods, 15th
Edition.
12 -18 LABORATORY MANUALS
The successful Contractor shall provide one (1)
copy of each of the manuals listed below as part of
the laboratory equipment.
One (1) - Manufacturer's Laboratory Manual.
One (1) - Current Edition of Standard Methods 15th
Edition.
12 -19 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No separate payment shall be made for this item and
all costs in connection therewith shall be included
in the appropriate bid item.
12 -6/6 1/81
SECTION 13 - SHOP DRAWINGS
13 - GENERAL
Without limiting the requirements of any other Sec-
tion in these Specifications, six (6) sets of Shop
Drawings shall be submitted by the Contractor for the
equipment listed below. Shop drawings shall be sub-
mitted in accordance with General Conditions of these
Specifications.
Water Treatment Plant and Equipment
Electric Controls, Wiring Diagrams, and Motor
Control Center
Air Compressors
Hydraulic Pumps, Motors, Valves and Piping
Valves (Plug, Gate, Ball, Solenoid, Pneumatic, and
Control Type)
Slide Gates
Water Flow Meters and Recorders
Turbidimeters and Recorders
Interior and Exterior Lights
Chlorination Equipment, Scales, and Chlorinators
Electric Hoist and Motorized Trolley
Chemical Feed Equipment
Metal Building and Foundation Design
Overhead "I" Beam Rail System for Hoist
Pumps and Motors, and Fabricated Pipe Headers
Fencing, Gates at Site
Paint Systems with Color Samples
Laboratory and Equipment
Plumbing Fixtures
Floor Covering
Submittal of Shop Drawings shall conform to require-
ments contained in the General Conditions of these
Specifications. For additional requirements of Shop
Drawings of the treatment plant equipment, refer to
Section 04 -11.
13 - 02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
No separate payment for work performed under this
item. Include cost of same in Contract prices bid
for item of which this work is a component part.
13 -1 /1 1 /81
1 •
SECTION 14 - FENCING
t 14 -01 GENERAL
' The Contractor shall furnish all material, equipment
and labor for performing all work required to erect
a fence system complete with all necessary gates,
terminal posts, corner and end post bracing, fit-
tings, appurtenances, and accessories, where shown
on the plans.
' The fences shall be designated as "chain link fence"
and shall conform to the requirements specified
under this section and to the details shown on the
' plans.
The fencing shall be as manufactured by the Anchor
' Post Fence Company or United States Steel Corp., and
shall conform to the following specifications. Ap-
proved equals having different structural shapes,
' which meet the minimum equivalent stress require-
ments may be substituted.
14 -02 CHAIN LINK FENCE
14 - 02.1 General
' Chain link fence shall 'consist of galvanized chain
link fabric attached to metal posts and fastened to
a top rail unless otherwise shown. The height of
' chain link fence to be erected shall be 7'0" The
height of chain link fence is measured from the
ground to the top strand of barbed wire for the
' "non - climbable" protective fence specified or to the
top of the chain link fabric for other types of
fencing.
1 The chain link fence posts and gates shall be equip-
ped with protective accessories consisting of post
caps with extension arms, upon which shall be strung
' the specified number of strands of barbed wire, as
hereinafter specified when "non - climbable" fence is
shown on the plans.
All metal parts of the fence and gates, above and
below ground, shall be hot dip galvanized through-
' out.
1
1 14 -1/5 3/81
1
14 -02.2 Wire Fabric
Wire fabric shall be No. 9 gauge, steel wire, two -
inch (2 ") uniformly woven diamond mesh, hot dip gal-
vanized after weaving, with top and bottom salvages
twisted and barbed. Finished wire shall have a min-
imum tensile strength of 75,000 pounds per square
inch.
The fabric shall be tightly and securely fastened to
the line posts by means of galvanized clips (No. 6
gauge wire) at intervals of twelve (12) inches. The
fabric shall also be attached to the top rail at in-
- tervals of approximately twenty -four (24) inches,
and shall be fastened to the terminal posts with
special clamps and tension strips.
14 -02.3 Gate Posts
Opening Size Weight
Up to 6' -7/8" 0.0. 5.79 lb /ft
Over 6' to 13' 4" 0.0. 9.10 lb /ft
Over 13' to 18' 6 -5/8" O.D. 18.97 lb /ft
Over 18' 8 -5/8" O.D. 24.70 lb /ft
All gate posts shall be of sufficient length to al-
low for a minimum depth of three feet (3') below
ground. Galvanized ornamental post tops shall be
provided on all gate posts where special protective
accessories are specified.
14 -02.4 Line Posts
Line posts shall be two and one - quarter inches
(2 -1/4 ") weighing 4.1 pounds per linear foot or two
and one -half inch (2 -1/2 ") O.D., pipe weighing 3.65
pounds per linear foot and spaced as shown on the
plans, but not more than ten feet no inches (10'0 ")
on center. Galvanized fittings shall be installed
to take the top rail and form a watertight cap for
the posts.
14 -02.5 Corner Posts -
Corner posts shall be two and seven - eights inch
(2 -7/8 ") 0.D. pipe weighing 5.79 pounds per linear
foot or two and one -half inch (2 -1/2 ") square tube
weighing 5.79 pounds per linear foot. All posts
shall be sufficient length to allow for a minimum
depth of three feet no inches (3'0 ") below ground.
Galvanized top fittings shall be installed to take
the top rail and form a watertight cap for the
posts.
14 -2/5 3/81
14 -02.6 Cylindrical Concrete Post Footings
All posts shall be set in cylindrical concrete foot-
ings. For line and corner posts, a hole ten (10)
inches in diameter, greater than three feet no inch-
es (3'0 ") in depth, shall be excavated. For gate
posts, specifically including double gate posts as
specified above, the footings shall be made in pro-
portion to the size and height of the post, with a
minimum diameter of twelve inches (12 "). All foot-
ings shall be properly domed or sloped to shed
water.
14 -02.7 Brace Rail and Top Rail
The bracing rail and top rail shall be one and
five - eights inch (1 -5/8 ") O.D., pipe weighing 2.27
pounds per linear foot or equivalent- weight H sec-
tion.
14 -02.8 Gates
Top rail shall pass through the base of the line
post tops and form a continuous brace from end to
end of each run of fence. Couplings shall be out-
side sleeve type and at least 7 inches long; one
coupling in every five shall contain a heavy spring
to take up expansion and contraction of the top
rail.
Gate frames shall be made of two inch (2 ") pipe,
pipe weight 2.72 pounds per linear foot, joined at
the corner by arc welding forming a solid panel, and
hot dip galvanized. The chain link fabric matching
that of the fence shall be fastened to the frame by
means of adjustable bolts and tension rods. Hinges
shall be heavy, malleable, and drop- forged steel and
shall be of the ball- and - socket type.
The height of a chain link gate is measured from the
ground to the top strand of barbed wire when special
protective fence accessories are specified, and
shall be 7'0" high.
All gate installations shall be provided with all
the necessary hinges permitting the gate to swing
through an arc of 180 degrees; a gate latch provid-
ing a positive lock; for double gates, lift rods
shall be located at normal heights and striking
straps shall be provided to ensure a positive stop
when gates are swung to a closed position; a means
14 -3/5 3/81
for locking by a padlock accessible from both front
and back of the gate; approved gate shoes for lock-
ing with lift rods; and approved stops to ensure a
positive stop when gates are swung to an open posi-
tion. An approved heavy -duty brass or bronze pad-
lock and two (2) keys, keyed alike, and keyed to the
Owner's key system, shall be provided for each
gate.
14 -02.9 Protective Fence Assessories
Where specifically indicated on the Plans, addition-
al "non- climbable" protective fence features shall
be installed; they shall be of the type, or types,
as shown on the drawings or as called for herein.
For chain link fence, all line posts shall be fitted
with post caps complete with expansion area, with
barbed wire attached thereto. The necessary corner
arms shall be provided. The specific type of pro-
tective accessory, or extension arm, shall be as
listed below, or as herein specified.
All extension arms are to be formed with a tongue,
or other approved provisions for securely attaching
the barbed wire. Wire ties or clips shall be No. 6
gauge wire as herein specified.
Gate: For chain link gates, three (3) strands of
barbed •wire shall be securely fastened to the ex-
tended end bars of the gate frames by adjustable
hook bolts.
45- Degree Extension Arm: A combination pressed
steel extension arm, with malleable iron post cap
having an opening for the top rail, shall be clamp-
ed, or otherwise securely attached, to each line
post so as to incline inward (or outward) at an
angle of 45 degrees. The necessary arms for corners
shall also be provided.
Three (3) strands of barbed wire shall be strung
along the top of the fence and securely attached to
the arms, as herein specified.
Barbed Wire: Each strand of barbed wire shall be
composed of two (2) strands of No. 12 -1/2 gauge
wire, twisted with four -point (4) thickset pattern,
with barbs spaced four (4) inches apart, and galva-
nized throughout after fabrication.
14 -4/5 3/81
14 -03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The lump sum price bid for the plant fence shall
include all labor, equipment, materials, and inci-
dentals required to supply and install the fence,
complete in place, per the site plan.
1
14 -5/5 3/81
SECTION 15 - ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION
15 - 01 SCOPE OF WORE
The work covered by these Specifications consists
of furnishing all labor, equipment, appliances,
materials, and performing all operations in connec-
tion with the asphalt paving excavation, related
hauling, rolling, blading and the completion of
subgrade preparation, base material placement,
asphaltic concrete pavement, curb and gutter, and
related drainage facilities complete in accordance
with the Plans, and subject to the terms and condi-
tions of the Contract Documents.
15 -02 GOVERNING TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The work covered by these Specifications shall be
constructed in accordance with the City of Austin
Standard Specifications for Public Works Construc-
tion per the latest revisions.
15 -03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The lump sum price bid for the paving shall include
all labor, equipment, materials, and incidentals
required to construct the pavement, complete as
shown on the Construction Plans and herein speci-
fied.
15 -1 /1 2/81
SECTION 16 - FORK LIFT
16 - GENERAL
The Contractor shall supply one (1) fork lift with a
rated operating capacity of 1300 pounds, tipping
load of 2600 pounds, and hydraulic pump capacity of
11 gpm. Engines shall be 4- cylinder, gasoline, Ford
Model 1498, or approved equal. Fuel tank capacity
shall be nine (9) gallons. Attachments shall in-
clude pallet fork and box scraper. The above de-
scribed fork lift is a Bobcat Model 732, or approved
equal.
16 - 02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The lump sum price bid for the fork lift shall in-
clude the equipment as specified and delivery to the
jobsite. The fork lift is bid as an add alternate
and will be accepted by the Owner if funds are
available, at the option of the Owner.
16 -1 /1 2/81
SECTION 17 - GRAPHICS DISPLAY PANEL
17 -01 GENERAL
The Contractor shall supply a graphics display
panel as shown on the Plans and as described in the
herein Specifications.
A 72 X 60 X 24 NEMA 12 Enclosed Graphics Display
Panel shall be supplied to provide a simplified
flow diagram and equipment arrangement for the pro-
cess of the Water Treatment Plant.
Symbols and flow lines shall be sized and spaced so
that the graphic diagram can be easily understood.
Conventional symbols shall be used wherever pos-
sible. The graphics display shall be arranged so
as to be able to make changes on sight such as
changing flow lines and relocating symbols.
Miniature indicating lights and control switches
shall be installed as an integral part of the gra-
phics display panel as indicated on the Plans.
The colors for the background, flowlines, symbols
and letters shall be selected by the Engineer from
color samples submitted by the graphics manufactur-
er.
The following items shall take their signal as
described below:
17 -01.1 The raw water pump lights shall take its signal
from the controls located at the booster pump sta-
tion which will indicate a signal calling for the
pumps to start.
17 -01.2 There shall be a hand - off - automatic switch for the
raw water pumps to override the automatic controls.
The switch shall be located adjacent to the raw
water pump run lights.
17 -01.3 The raw water meter light shall take its signal
from the recorder, which will indicate a recording
signal.
The raw water flow recorder shall take a signal
from the flow transmitter on the meter at the inlet
to the plant.
17 -01.4 Locate raw water flow recorder and totalizer on
display panel.
17 -1/3 3/81
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
17 -01.5 The flow controller selector switch shall be locat-
ed on the display panel. The flow controller shall
be installed per Section 06 -10.
17 -01.6 The pre - chlorinator light shall take its signal
from the solenoid valve indicating that the valve
is open.
17 -01.7 The alum feed pump lights shall take their signal
from the feed pumps.
17 -01.8 The storage bin light shall take its signal from
the vibratory bottom.
17 -01.9 The dry feeder light shall take its signal from the
dry feeder.
17 -01.10 The make -up water light shall take its signal from
the solenoid valve on the feed line, indicating
that the valve is open.
17 -01.11 Polymer feeder light shall take its signal from the
feed pumps.
17 -01.12 The hydraulic pump lights shall take their signal
from the hydraulic pump control center with the
indication of one, two or three pumps on and low
hydraulic fluid level in storage reservoir.
17 -01.13 The filters will take a high water signal from the
float switches in each of the filter cell units.
17 -01.14 Backwash sequence signal shall come from backwash
control center indicating backwash in progress.
17 -01.15 One audible alarm bell and silence button shall be
provided to sound on high or low water levels in
the filter cells, hydraulic fluid reservoir, the
two standpipes and the clearwell. Alarm shall be
silenced by depressing button and appropriate light
on graphics display panel will remain lit until the
condition is relieved.
17 -01.16 Backwash return pump lights shall take their sig-
nals from the pump motor, indicating that the pump
is on.
17 -01.17 Post chlorinator light shall take its signal from
the solenoid valve indicating that the valve is
open.
17 -2/3 3/81
17 -01.18 The three (3) booster pump lights shall take their
signals from the pump motors. There shall be a
hand - off - automatic switch for the booster pumps.to
override the automatic controls.
17 -01.19 The booster pump °flow recorder shall take a signal
from an auxiliary contact on the booster pump flow
recorder inside the booster pump station building.
17 -01.20 The liquid level recorder for measuring the level
of water in the Rabbit Hill Standpipe shall take a
signal from an auxiliary contact on the liquid
level recorder in the booster pump station build-
ing, see Section 06 -11.
17 -01.21 The liquid level recorder for measuring the level
of water in the Business Highway 81 North Standpipe
shall take a signal from an auxiliary contact on
the liquid level recorder in the booster pump sta-
tion building, see Section 06 -11.
17 -01.22 Graphics display panel shall be a Model GDP -101 as
manufactured by MCC Weimar of Weimar, Texas or ap-
proved equal.
17 -02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The lump sum price bid for the graphic display
panel shall include the equipment transmitters,
relays, conduits, and wiring as required for com-
plete installation.
17 -3/3 3/81
SECTION 18 PRESSURE GROUTING UNDERNEATH PLANT
18 -01 GENERAL
The Contractor shall provide for drilling, cali-
brating and pressure grouting as necessary under-
neath the foundation for the water treatment plant.
The procedure and recommendations of the soil re-
port shall be adhered to for this process.
The Owner shall retain a Soils Engineer to review
the drilling and grouting procedure. The hole
spacing shall be 10 -foot or 20 -foot on center with-
in the area of the plant and control building,
actual spacing shall be determined by the Soils
Engineer. Additional hole drilling may be required
at the direction of the Soils Engineer.
The Contractor shall supply a drilling rig with the
2" drill bit. The holes shall be drilled 5' deep.
from the natural surface in the area of the plant
and control building. The drilling shall be done
under the direction of the Soils Engineer. The
Soils Engineer shall log the drilling activity not-
ing major voids • encountered by the drill rig. The
initial spacing is anticipated to be 20 -foot on
center. Upon the results of this drilling activity
at the 20 -foot spacing the Soils Engineer shall
make a determination as to whether or not addi-
tional drilling at 10 -foot on center would be
necessary or if additional holes would be neces-
sary. Upon completion of the drilling the Contrac-
tor will be directed to pressure grout the cavities
encountered or if it is determined by the Soils
Engineer that there is minimum voids encountered,
the Contractor shall only be required to pressure
grout the test holes.
18 -02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
This item shall be paid for per hole drill per each
and for price per cubic yard of concrete actually
pumped on the job.
The quantities estimated in the bid proposal for
drilling are based on a 10 -foot spacing. As de-
scribed above the initial drilling will be at
20 -foot spacing with additional holes as required
by the Soils Engineer based upon the sub - surface
encountered. The pressure grouting quantities are
18 -1/2 3/81
assuming a rather extreme case of voids in the area
of the plant and control building. These quanti-
ties may be estimated high. The Contractor should
be aware that the quantities included for both
drilling and concrete may be completely eliminated
or may run even higher. The Contractor should base
his bid accordingly.
18 -1/2 3/81
APPENDIX
GEOTECBNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
ROUND ROCK, TEXAS
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
ROUND ROCK, TEXAS
FOR
HAYNIE AND KALLNAN, INC.
ROUND ROCK, TEXAS
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
General 1
Scope of Investigation 1
FIELD INVESTIGATION 3
LABORATORY INVESTIGATION 5
SITE CONDITIONS
Site Geology 7
Subsurface Stratigraphy 7
FOUNDATION DESIGN CRITERIA
General 8
Expansive Characteristics 8
Select Fill Material 8
Plant and Control Building,
Boring Nos. 1 - 6 9
Earthen Holding Tanks,
Boring Nos. 7 - 10 11
Water Storage Tank,
Boring Nos. 11 -12A 11
ILLUSTRATIONS
Location of Borings I
Summary of Classification Tests II
Summary of Unit Weight, Moisture Content and
Unconfined Compression Test Results III
APPENDIX
Explanation of Symbols and Key to Classification
Used on Logs of Borings
Logs of Borings
PAGE
•PLATE
GCOTECHNICAI ENGINEERING DIVISION
INTRODUCTION
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
ROUND ROCK, TEXAS
General. The geotechnical investigation reported herein is an analysis
of the subsurface materials and conditions at the proposed site of a
Water Treatment Plant. The site is located just west of Interstate
Highway 35 near Round Rock, Texas. It is understood that the plant
facilities will consist of a dual clarifier and control building, two
earthen holding tanks, and a 100 -ft- diameter, 16 -ft -high, steel water
storage tank. This investigation was conducted in general accordance
with our proposal letter dated December 12, 1980 and verbally author-
ized by Mr. Haynie on December 16, 1980.
Scope of Investigation. The objectives of this investigation have been
to develop information on soil and foundation conditions at the site
and to use this information in developing criteria for use in the
foundation design process. To accomplish these objectives the various
stages of the investigation were conducted as follows:
1. Subsurface core borings were drilled in order to
(a) explore subsurface stratigraphy at the site,
(b) obtain samples for laboratory testing,
(c) investigate in situ rock characteristics through
THD cone penetrometer tests, and
(d) investigate groundwater conditions present at
the site.
1
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
2. Samples of subsurface materials from the core borings
were analyzed in the laboratory by.
(a) visual examination and classification,
(b) Atterberg limits tests,
(c) minus 200 -mesh sieve tests,
(d) unit dry weight and moisture content tests, and
(e) unconfined compression tests.
3. An engineering analysis was then made using the informa-
tion obtained from the subsurface exploration and labora-
tory investigation to develop recommendations to guide
foundation design and construction.
The various phases of this study, as mentioned above, are presented in
subsequent sections of this report.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
FIELD INVESTIGATION
• TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
Subsurface conditions and stratigraphy at the proposed Water Treatment
Plant Site were explored by fourteen borings drilled at the locations
shown on Plate I in the Appendix. The borings were advanced to depths
ranging from 10.0 to 15.0 feet below the ground surface. The various
depths to which each boring extended and the types of subsurface mate-
rials encountered are noted an the attached Logs of Borings.
The borings were drilled with the aid of a truck - mounted drilling rig.
Undisturbed or representative samples of the cohesive soils were ob-
tained by hydraulically pushing a 3 -in. diameter thin- walled tube sam-
pler into the soil. Thereafter, samples of the primary formation were
obtained by continuous rock coring with an NX -size double -tube core
barrel equipped with an insert bit. All of the samples obtained in
the borings were visually classified and logged in the field during the
investigation. After the samples had been examined and classified,
they were sealed in appropriate packaging for shipment to our labora-
tory for further study.
Existing in situ conditions of the subsurface materials were also ex-
plored by Texas Highway Department (THD) cone penetration tests per-
formed at periodic intervals while the boreholes were being advanced.
The THD cone penetration test consists of a measurement of the resist-
ance to penetration of a 3 -in. diameter steel cone that is driven with
a 170 -1b weight dropped approximately 24 in. The amount of penetration
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
of the cone after an application of 100 blows is recorded on the
attached Logs of Borings.
The borings were advanced to depths ranging from 0.0 to 3.0 feet below
the ground Surface prior to using drilling fluid. Groundwater obser-
vations below these depths were inhibited due to the use of drilling
fluid. Results of the observations to investigate groundwater condi-
tions at the site are shown by the notes on the attached Logs of
Borings.
4
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
LABORATORY INVESTIGATION
All samples and cores of subsurface materials recovered from the bor-
ings were examined and logged in the laboratory by a soil technician.
The laboratory testing program was then designed to evaluate the per-
tinent physical properties of the foundation soils. Due to the nature
of the proposed project, emphasis was directed toward evaluation of
the compressive strength and shrink /swell potential of the underlying
strata.
Atterberg limits tests and minus 200 -mesh sieve tests were performed
to estimate the shrink /swell potenital of the soil and to aid in soil
classification. Laboratory classifications of the subsurface mate-
rials are based upon the "Unified Soil Classification System" as ex-
plained on the attached Key to Classification used on Logs. Results of
the Atterberg limits tests, minus 200 - mesh sieve tests, natural moisture
content and soil classifications are presented on attached Plate II.
Unconfined compression tests were performed on selected specimens in
order to determine the compressive strength of the soil and rock
strata. Water content and unit dry weight determinations were also
• made for soil specimens subjected to unconfined compression tests.
The results of the strength tests are tabulated on Plate III.
The type and number of tests performed in the laboratory for this in-
vestigation are presented on the following page:
5
GCOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
Type of Tests Number of Tests
Unconfined Compression 12
Atterberg Limits 4
Percent Passing 200 -Mesh Sieve 4
Moisture Content 8
Unit Weight 4
6
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
SITE CONDITIONS
Site Geology. According to information developed by the Bureau of
Economic Geology at the University of Texas at Austin, the primary
geologic formation at this site is the Edwards formation. This forma-
tion is of the Lower Cretaceous Geologic Age and consists mainly of
limestone. In the unweathered state, the Edwards formation consists
of gray limestone having honeycomb seams and layers or solution cavi-
ties. Weathering of the primary gray limestone creates a tan lime-
stone stratum having hard limestone layers and interbedded soil -
like layers or pockets. Severe weathering and the addition of or-
ganic matter results in an upper dark brown soil layer that can be
classified at this site, as a high plasticity clay.
Subsurface Stratigraphy. In general, the stratigraphy encountered in
the borings is fairly uniform having approximately 0.5 to 4.0 ft of
dark brown high plasticity clay overlying a weathered limestone or
massive limestone of the Edwards formation. As indicated in Boring
Nos. 1 through 6 and 11, a honeycomb structure exists in the limestone
formation.. This honeycomb structure varies in depth from 7.8 to 15.0
ft below the ground surface but is generally encountered at the 10 ft
depth. The only peculiarities from the general stratification de-
scribed above was found to occur in Boring Nos. 8 and 11 where a black
chert and sand and gravel layer was encountered, respectively. The
depth intervals at which the chert and granular layers were encountered
are 11.8 to 12.0 ft and 5.0 to 6.0 ft, respectively.
GEOTECNNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
FOUNDATION DESIGN CRITERIA
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
General. This geotechnicai investigation encompasses several proposed
structures including a plant and control building, two earthen holding
tanks, and a water storage tank. The subsurface conditions are essen-
tially similar at each structure location. However, each building or
problem area will be discussed separately within this report in order
to cover particular foundation systems or problems associated with the
individual structures.
Expansive Characteristics. The surficial soils at this site are pri-
marily very stiff, high plasticity clays. As indicated by the Atter-
berg limits tests, the shrink /swell or expansive potential of the clays
is relatively high with plasticity indexes ranging from 37 to 47. In
addition, using the Potential Vertical Rise Method developed by McDowell
and a worst case condition of 4 ft of expansive material, a potential
vertical movement of 1.75 in. was computed. This potential movement
is considered to be moderately high and could be of significance with
respect to structures supported on shallow foundations. Therefore,
it is suggested that consideration be given to eliminating the poten-
tial detrimental movements where shallow foundations are proposed by
removal and replacement of the expansive clay stratum with a select,
non - expansive fill material.
Select Fill Material. Fill material used within the building areas
should be a low plasticity material that has been properly compacted
8
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
to prevent settlements of loosely placed material and to insure ade-
quate load.bearing characteristics. The fill material should be com-
pacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by
the procedure of ASTM D698 in lifts not to exceed 6 - in. compacted
thickness. The select material should have primarily granular
characteristics with a PI less than 15 and not more than 40 percent
passing the No. 200 sieve. Crushed limestone products are locally
available and may be considered for use at this site.
Plant and Control Building, Boring Nos. 1 - 6. At present, it is
planned to construct within the Plant Section of the proposed building
two conical shaped clarifiers and filters that will extend to a depth
of about 10 ft below the existing ground surface. Accordingly, the
loads imposed by the clarifiers and filters will be transferred to
the supporting tan limestone stratum through concrete mats. These
mats should be designed in accordance with an allowable bearing pres-
sure of 20,000 lb /sq ft. The given design value includes an applied
safety factor of at least 2.0 and assumes that the supporting lime-
stone formation is competent and continuous.
Although no large cavities were encountered in the borings drilled
for this investigation, the presence of honeycomb layers in the bor-
ings indicates the possibility of cavities. As a result, it is sug-
gested that the competency of the limestone directly beneath the
proposed foundation be investigated by drilling 2- in- diaheter
9
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING OIVISION
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
test holes, or a size hole equivalent to those produced by standard
shot - hole drilling equipment. As indicated on Plate IV, measurements
of the hole diameter should be made with calipers or a probe. The
drilling should be performed at a grid spacing sufficient to assure
the adequacy of the foundation strata and the hole depth should be
equal to 5 ft or twice the foundation width, whichever is less. If
substantial cavities larger than a few inches in diameter or highly
porous rock are encountered during the investigation, then placement
of lean concrete or slush grout in the voids may be necessary.
The Control Section of the proposed building is assumed to be a rela-
tively light structure housing primarily piping, control values, and
monotoring equipment. The exterior loads of the building may be sup-
ported by a perimeter strip -type foundation if the strip is founded at
a depth of at 1.0 ft into the tan weathered limestone and designed in
accordance with an allowable bearing pressure of 6,500 lb /sq ft. The
interior slab of the building may be supported by select well com-
pacted fill (see above section) if designed using an allowable bearing
pressure of 2,500 lb /sq ft. Should loads imposed on the interior slab
exceed the bearing capacity of the fill material, consideration may
be given to the use of isolated shallow footings for support of
heavily - loaded slab sections. The footings should be founded at a
depth of 5 ft below the ground surface and designed for a maximum
bearing pressure of 10,000 lb/so ft.
10
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
It is understood that.a deep splitter box will be used to channel
plumbing from the clarifiers and filters into the control building.
Presently, it is planned to place the base of the splitter box at a
depth of 10 ft below existing ground surface. At this depth, the
box may be designed in accordance with an allowable bearing pressure
of 20,000 lb/so ft.
Earthen Holding Tanks, Boring Nos. 7 -10. The two holding tanks, cen-
trally located at the proposed site, are scheduled to be constructed
such that the tank bases will extend into the primary tan limestone
stratum. Accordingly, consideration may need to be given to lining
the bases and the sides in order to prevent migration of impounded
water. The surficial dark brown clay existing at the site will pro-
vide an excellent liner material and may be used to construct the
sides of the tanks. The material should be compacted at or near opti-
mum moisture content, to a density of at least 95 percent of the maxi-
mum dry density as determined by ASTM D 698 and in lifts not to ex-
ceed 6 in. compacted thickness. The embankment slopes may be con-
structed at a slope of 1- vertical to 3- horizontal but, in order to
prevent erosion, consideration may be given to using flatter slopes.
Alternatively, some type of slope proctection, i.e. sod, asphalt or
bituminous surfacing, or synthetic liners, may be used.
Water Storage Tank, Boring Nos. 11 -12A. The 100 -ft- diameter by 16-
ft -high steel water tank can be supported by either of two foundation
alternatives. The first alternative would include the use of a
11
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
reinforced concrete ringwall supporting the tank shell while the
second would use a steel ring founded on select fill material. A
schematic cross- section of both of these foundation alternatives is
illustrated on Plate V. For either scheme, the high plasticity sur-
ficial clay layers existing at the site should be removed from the
foundation area and a granular, low plasticity fill should be placed
beneath the bottom of the tank. • This fill material should be similar
to that described previously and should be placed in accordance with
the associated compaction recommendations. It is further suggested
that the top 6 in. of fill be oil saturated during construction in
order to reduce potential corrosive action on the bottom of the tank.
If a reinforced concrete ringwall is used to support the tank shell,
the ringwall should be founded approximately 6 in. into the tan weath-
ered limestone and designed in accordance with an allowable bearing
pressure of 6,500 lb /sq ft. The width of the ringwall should be pro-
portioned so that the pressure at the base of the ringwall does not
exceed the soil pressure at the same level beneath the interior of
the tank due to the weight of the stored water and the containment
structure itself.
For the steel ring and compacted fill scheme, a compacted supporting
base'ring of fill should be used instead of a concrete ringwall. The
material used to construct the base ring should be crushed limestone
meeting Texas Highway Department Item 248, type A, grade 2 or better
12
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
requirements. A safe allowable load intensity of 3,500 lb /sq ft may
be used for the crushed limestone provided that the material is com-
pacted to a minimum of 95 percent of ASTM D 698, method D maximum
density with lifts not to exceed 6 in. compacted thickness. Bearing
plates maybe required in order to reduce the applied bearing'stresses
at the tank -fill interface. In addition, the select fill should also
extend inward and outward a minimum of 2.0 ft from the tank edge and
be constructed with interior and exterior slopes of approximately 1-
vertical to 2- horizontal. This will help to achieve proper drainage
of surface water and will also help to prevent undermining of the
foundation and infiltration of water.
Respectfully submitted,
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
Geotechnical � Engineering Division
inee
Mark W. Bierschwale
9
Au -1480
January 27, 1981
William J. Berger, P.E.
Geotechnical Project Engineer
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
13
GEOTECHNICAI. ENGINEERING DIVISION
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
ILLUSTRATIONS
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
E — — — — — mu N — — — NE ow ow N EN — — ANN
B 24
B- T
PLANT
(CLAMP/CRS MO
FILTERS)
18 -4
C TAOL
BU /LOING
4 k-G
NOTE PLANT SITE LOCATED JUST NORTH OF
WESTINGHOUSE PLANT PROPERTY.
BORING LOCATIONS STAKED BY
HAYNIE a KALLMAN, INC.
WATER STORAGE
TANK
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
ROUND ROCX, TEXAS
o loo
® LOCATION OF BORINGS
Scala 1.•1 SCALE AS SHOWN
DATE• /GJANI98/ RATE'
Dfl AWN BY. OW /I
WATER TREADJENT PLANT
ROUND ROCK, TEXAS
SUMMARY OF CLASSIFICATION TESTS
Liquid Plasticity % Passing Natural
Boring Depth Limit Index 200-Mesh M.C.- Classi-
No. ft.. % % % % fication Description a
0
; o
8 1.5- 2.7 71.4 46.6 92.6 31.0 CFI Dark Brown Clay
x Z
T
n z
m 9 1.5- 2.5 65.8 36.9 93.1 27.3 CH Dark Brown Clay
Z um
n
10 1.5- 2.5 68.4 38.5 93.7 29.6 CH Dark Brown Clay z
z
; c a
o O
11 0.0- 1.4 64.5 36.8 81.8 28.5 CH Dark Brown Clay $
o 'o
z n
0
z
ro
n
H
H
• - - - - I MI I = I NM OM I MI MO MI • -
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
ROUND ROCK, TEXAS
SUMMARY OF UNIT WEIGHT, MOISTURE CONTENT
AND UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST RESULTS
Boring Depth U.D.W. M.C. Qu
No. in Feet Lbs. /Cu.Ft. X T /Sq.Ft.
1 10.4 -10.9 208.56
2 8.5- 9.3 424.20
2 11.2 -11.6 256.69
Description
Tan Limestone
Tan Honeycombed Limestone
Tan Honeycombed Limestone
3 7.3- 8.2 374.33 Tan Limestone
3 11.9 -12.3 103.13 Tan Limestone with Siltstone Seams
4 10.0 -10.8 504.20 Tan Limestone
5 12.0 -12.6 286.48 Tan Limestone
6 9.4- 9.9 376.05 Tan Honeycombed Limestone
8 1.5- 2.7 87.8 32.1 1.40 ' Dark Brown Clay
9 1.5- 2.5 89.6 27.3 1.30 Dark Brown Clay
10 1.5- 2.5 85.1 28.4 1.09 Dark Brown Clay
11 0.0- 1.4 86.0 24.5 0.96 Dark Brown Clay
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V / / / / / / / / / //
ROCK
�777/////T
3/8 to 1 /2 -in- DIAMETER PROBE ROD
WITH CHISEL POINT
or
SURFACE RECORDING
CALIPERS
DIAMETER,
PERCUSSION-DRILLED
TEST HOLE
Of
EQUIVALENT
/
/
/
2
/
8
2B or 5' max.
V / / / / / / / / / ///
/ TYPICAL FOOTING
EXCAVATION
TRINITY' ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
ROORO ROCK, IEX,IS
METHOD CF EVALUATING CHARACTER OF ROCK
BELOW FOUNDATION BASE
SCALE:
OATE:8IJOR /991 I PLAID A'
DRAWN BY: OWR
/ /A\ / /.■\ t /".
.smlA,
SKETCH ONLY
NO TRUE SCALE
+WATER STORAGE TANK
WATER STORAGE TANK
ALTERNATIVE #1
SELECT FILL;
TAN WEATHERED LIMESTONE
ALTERNATIVE #2
TAN WEATHERED LIMESTONE
GK. SATURATED FR1
F.
BASE BEARING PLATE
//n\\ '/n
REINFORCED CONCRETE RINGWALL
• • . SELECT FILL '
OIL SATURATED FILL
BASE RING PLATE
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
ROUND ROCY, TEXAS
CROSS - SECTION ALTERNATIVES FOR
STORAGE TANK SUPPORT
SCALE: NONE
OATE•77JANI98I
ORAWN BT' OWN
PLATE: Jr
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
APPENDIX
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
EXPLANATION OF SYMBOLS USED ON LOOS OF BORINGS
5
—10
O J
2
3
cn Ill
0 0
0
J W
m¢
2
3. 5
15
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
Undisturbed Shelby Tube Sample
t Pocket Penetrometer Test
M Disturbed Sample
.. Standard Penetration Test and Sample
+--Wash Boring - No Sample Recovery
+ —NX Core Drilling - Testable Sample
0
W W
ae
O J
V 0
5.0'
5.0'
KEY TO CLASSIFICATION USED ON LOOS
MAJOR OWISIONS
wanly Gnla.< Saw
7 I
o a
3
ui1
1a
i 1
I
d"
1 7.
.33
1 3g
1 s`<
3
is
$ Y
3
3 31
GROUP
505501.3
GPI
GP
GM•
o•' a:
;GJ 0
GC
SM
ML
GL / /
OL I I
I I
I II
Il
MH
r
CH
OH ,�//
DESCRIPTIONS
W•11-3nd.1 SR*, 000.0 -5aa
S IMI , u1? a no IN.a
Pa.ly - GN04 annals, 6nw •5ad
W ataa., WIN of na 1110.
SIR 65.0., aa.a■sand -sR
W.lana
CNN, Ganl., G,a.a -Sad -Oar
warm..
Wall-6na.d 5aadi, Gravelly Sands,
Ulna a. na FlnN.
Pant G1.d.a 51,0., 6rorary Sawa,
WIN cc w Inn
Silty 511,0., 5051-5•1 ■1.Ne..
Cana Sawn, Sad •Car Wawa.
Maraca. 511. 5 Wry M. Sala., Ran
Flea, 54y a Oany I1. 50141 ae
O.y.y SI. nth Sllanl Plalalry
ROMS< OCR .I lea N W.045
PNanah, Glm<dy 0N7., Sandy
Gala, Silty pan, 1.N. oar.
Drama Sin. 5 0,5aa, Wry Oaan
at Law P5155
Lwaa.. SW., M.P.G. or
Oiala.a<an Kn. 50•5I a
S•ry S1a, EN1a< Sara
IroNea< Dan of NO Plaallan,
hi Clan.
anaa Gan al ma .v. l a Wan
Nas5515 aaaNa Sah
pt Not 5 alna RNnly 0,0050 S.M
GEOTECNNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
LOG OF BORING
FOR
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
December 30, 1980 BORING NO. 1
PROJECT LOCATION: Round Rock, Texas TYPE' Core See Plan
DEPTH
FEET
I 10S11AS
I 3ldIVS
N -BLOWS
PER FOOT
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
CONE
DRILLED
03H3A033B
3NO3
N011VA313
J DEPTH SCALE
-
-
-
-----
- \ Dark Brown Clay r
-
Tan Weathered Limestone with Red Clay
Pockets
5
=
-_
—10
-
-
-
THD Penetration,
1 1
I I
'
Tan Limestone 100 Blows= 0.75"
honeycombed, 7.8' -9.2'
thin honeycombed layer
12.1' to 13.2' THD Penetration
5.0'
4.7'
_
-
-
T T�
1
1 1
1
1 1
5.0'
4.8'
- 100% water loss @13.3' 100 Blows -.0.0"
_ 15
-
-
-
-
-
Total Depth of Boring - 15.0 Feet
Note: Boring was advanced from the
ground surface down by the use of drill-
ing fluid thus inhibiting positive
groundwater observations.
-
-
_
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
GEC/TECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
LOG OF BORING
FOR
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
December 31 1980 BORING Na 2
PROJECT LOCATION: Round Rock, Texas TYPE Core !
Plan
_ -a
DEPTH
FEET
10017 AS I
1 SAMPLE
N - BLOWS
PER FOOT
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
0 3111N
3 NO3
CORE
RECOVERED
NO11VA313
'DEPTH SCALE
—
_
—
— 5
—
_
no
--
—, Dark Brown Clay r
_
—
Tan Weathered Limestone
Red Clay Layers T� Penetratioq
ROI
imi
with
100 Blows =2.0"
5.0'
4.8'
�!
Ne
— 10
—
Tan Honeycombed Limestone
--with siltstone seams, 12.0' to 12.5'
#
5.0'
4.0'
J_1
— 15
_
—
—
-
_
Total Depth of Boring = 15.0 Feet
Note: Boring was advanced from the
ground surface down by the'use of drill-
ing fluid thus inhibiting positive
groundwater observations.
—
_
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
LOG OF BORING
FOR
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
January 2, 1981 GORING NO. ►
PROJECT LOCATION: Round Rock, Texas TYPE: Core LOCATION. See Plan
133i
R1d30
SYMBOL
I SAMPLE
/4-BLOWS
PER FOOT
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
CORE
DRILLED
CORE
RECOVERED
NOLLVA313
DEPTH SCALE!
-a
Dark Brown Clay with Sand r -
-
-
-
-
-
\
Tan Limestone with Small
Solution Cavities THD Penetratio '
100 Blows =1.75
honeycombed layer, 8.4' to 10.0'
100% water loss at 8.5' •
5.0'
4.3'
-
-
-
10
-
`
1
Tan Limestone with Siltstone Seams
siltstone layer, 12.4' to 13.2'
5.0'
4.7
-
_
—15
_
_.
-
-
—
_
Total Depth of Boring = 15.0 Feet
Note: Boring was advanced from the
ground surface down by the use of drill-
ing fluid thus inhibiting positive
groundwater observations.
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING OIVISION
LOG OF BORING
FOR
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
December 30, 1980 BORING NO. 4
PROJECT LOCATION: Round Rock, Texas TYPE: Core See Plan
DEPTH
FEET
IOBWAS
31d11YS
N -BLOWS
PER FOOT
MATERIAL OESCRIPTION
CORE
DRILLED
CORE
RECOVERED
HOILYA3 l3
DEPTH SCALE'
_
'— 10
_
15
1 1
-- -
Tan Limestone
TBD Penetration
I
I
-T
100 Blows =2.25
---- honeycombed limestone layer,
9.0' to 10.0'
5.0'
4.0'
I
1
:
1 � .
!
T
5.0'
4.0'
I 1
_
_
_
_
Total Depth of Boring = 15.0 Feet
Note: Boring was advanced from the
ground surface down by the use of drill-
ing fluid thus inhibiting positive
groundwater observations.
•
\
_
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
LOG OF BORING
FOR
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
December 30, 1980 BORING NO. 5
PROJECT LOCATION: Round Rock, Texas TYPE: Core See Plan
1334
H.•30
IOBNAS
I SAMPLE
N -BLOWS
PER FOOT
MATERIAL OESCRIPTION
0311910
31107
CORE
RECOVERED
N011VA313
DEPTH SCALE(
•
5
Dark Brown Limestone
-
-
-
_
_
— 10
-
-
---'
Tan Limestone
THD Penetration
I
III
100 Blows =1.25"
100% water loss at 8.5'
thin honeycombed seam at 9.0'
5.0'
4.8'
_
III
I I
5.0'
`�
4.6'
-_
I
15
-
-
=
Total Depth of Boring = 15.0 Feet
Note: Boring was advanced from the -
ground surface down by the use of drill-
ing fluid thus inhibiting positive
groundwater observations.
•
_
_
-
_
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING OIVISION
LOG OF BORING
FOR
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
DATC December 30, 1980 BORING NO. i
PROJECT LOCATION: Round Rock, Texas TYPE: Core LOCATION. See Plan
133i
111.130
SYMBOL
I SAMPLE
N - BLOWS
PER FOOT
MATERIAL OESCRIPTION
CORE
QRIL LE0
CORE
RECOVERED
N011YA 313
DEPTH SCAL El
i c ¶
'
-- ---
-
- Dark Brown Clay with Sand
-
-
Tan Limestone with Clay Layers
- 5
_
_
-
- 10
-
THD Penetration
Tan Limestone with 100 Blows =3.0"
Calcite Seams and
Nodules
honeycombed limestone layer, 8.6' -10.5'
100% water loss at 11.0'
honeycombed limestone with thin silt-
stone Seams, 13.0' - 14.5'
5.0'
4.9'
_
-
--
_
■■■■■A,.■■■
5 .0'
— 15
_
Total Depth of Boring = 15.0 Feet
Note: Boring was advanced to 0.6 foot
below the ground surface prior to using
drilling fluid and water was not encoun-
tered above that depth.
■
_
_
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
LOG OF BORING
FO R
WATER TREATMENT PLAN
December 29, 1980
PROJECT LOCATION: Round Rock, Texas TYPE: Core lee Plan
DEPTH
FEET
108NAS
SAMPLE J
N -BLOWS
PER FOOT
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
CORE
GRILLED
CORE
RECOVERED
NOI1VA313
I31VDS H1d30
-
I
Dark Brown Clay
*----
-
-
-
—
_
-
-
mi
Tan Weathered Limestone with Brown Clay
Layers
IMI
- 5
_
Tan Limestone
E N
..
—
5.0'
4.8'
MO
m
—10
-
—
-
-
Total Depth of Boring = 10.0 Feet
Note: Boring was advanced to 1.8 feet
"below the ground surface prior to using
drilling fluid and water was not encoun-
tered above that depth.
•
_
-
_,
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
GEOTECNNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
LOG OF BORING
FOR
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
D December 29, 1980 BORING NO. 8
PROJECT LOCATION: Round Rock, Texas TYPE: Core : e Plan
F f
& W
ui
G LL
J
0
s
Y
N
W
J
g
N
SAMPLE
N -BLOWS
PER FOOT
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
CORE
GRILLED
03H3A003N
31103
NOIl7A313
3 1Y3S H1d301
_
_
- -.,
Dark Brown Clay
-- LL =71.4 PI =46.6 (- )200 =92.6%
with limestone gravel, 2.0' -4.0'
-
5
-
-
-
—10
-
_
THD Penetration
100 Blows =1.0"
Tan Weathered Limestone with Red Clay
Pockets and Seams
-black chert seams 11.8' to 12.0'
TAD Penetration
5.0'
_r---
4.4'
3.4'
-
-
-
—_
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
—
s - - --
5.0'
f I f I
1-01,7
,r � ,�T"
—15
_
-
, -
-
—
100 Blows =0.5"
Total Depth of Boring = 15.0 Feet
Note: Boring was advanced to 3.0 feet
below the ground surface prior to using
drilling fluid and water was not encoun-
tered above that depth.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
GEOTECNNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
LOG OF BORING
• FOR
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
December 29 1980 BORING NO 9
PROJECT LOCATION: Round Rock, Texas TYPE: Core See Plan
133A
01.130
100WAS
SAMPLE
N•SLOWS
PER FOOT
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
0311180
3803
CORE
RECOVERED
NOI1VA313
I31VDS H1d30
Dark Brown Clay
LL =65.8 PI =36.9 (— )200 =93.12
_ 5
`
THD Penetration
I I
100 Blows =2.0"
Tan Limestone
5.0'
4.8'
�
—10
—
Total Depth of Boring = 10.0 Feet
Note: Boring was advanced to 2.5 feet
below the ground surface prior to using
drilling fluid and water was not en—
countered above that depth.
\
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
LOG OF BORING
FOR
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
December 29, 1980 BORING NO. 10
PROJECT LOCATION: Round Rock, Texas TYPE: Core LOCATION. See Plan
DEPTH
FEET
IOSNAS
SAMPLE
N•BLOWS
PER FOOT
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
0311910
3 803
CORE
RECOVERED
N OI1 VA 313
I31V3S H1d30
. Dark Brown Clay
\
_
-
-
-
-
Tan Weathered Limestone with Red
Clay Pockets THD Penetration
— 5
-
-
-
100 Blowsm1.75"
Tan Limestone
5.0'
4.7'
-
-
-
!
I
—10
-
-
—
-
`
'
Total Depth of Borings 10.0 Feet
Note: Boring was advanced to 2.5 feet
below the ground surface prior to using
drilling fluid and water was not en-
countered above that depth.
\
-
-
--_
_
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
O£OTECHNICAL £NOIMEENINO OIVISION
LOG OF BORING
FOR
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
December 20, 1980 BORING NO. 11
PROJECT LOCATION: Round Rock, Texas TYPE: Core See Plan
1334
H1430
I 1O011AS
SAMPLE
N•BLOWS
PER FOOT
MATERIAL OESCRIPTION
CORE
DRILLED
CORE
RECOVERED
NOIIYA313
I DEPTH SCAL E�
-
I
- - ".=S
-.
Dark Brown Clay
LL =64.5 PI =36.8 (- )200 =81.8% (-
_
-
_
Tan Honeycombed Limestone with Red Clay
_
5
-
-
Pockets / THD Penetration
—sand & gravel seam, 100 Blows =2.0 " -
5.0' -6.0'
Tan Limestone
5.0'
4.6'
10
-
-
-
-
Total Depth of Boring = 10.0 Feet
Note: Boring was advanced to 1.5 feet
below the ground surface prior to using
drilling fluid and water was not en-
countered above that depth.
•
-
-
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
GEOTECNNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
LOG OF BORING
FO R
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
January 1, 1981 BORING NO. 11A
PROJECT LOCATION: Round Rock, Texas TYPE: Core See Plan
DEPTH
FEET
SYMBOL
SAMPLE
N -BLOWS
PER FOOT
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
CORE
DRILLED
03113AO03B
3800
N011VA3 13
DEPTH SCALE
- Dark Brown Clay r-
-
-
-
-
5
Tan Weathered Limestone with Red Clay
Pockets
THD Penetration
_
_
-
100 Blows' 1.5
Tan Limestone with SiltstoneSeams
THD Penetration
5.0'
5.0'
-
_
10
-
-
-
—
-
-
•
100 Blows =1.25"
Total Depth of Boring m 10.0 Feet
Note: Boring was advanced from the
ground surface down by the use of drill
ing fluid thus inhibiting positive
groundwater observations.
-
-
-
_
-
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
GEOTECNNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
LOG OF BORING
FOR
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
December 30, 1980 BORING Na 12
PROJECT LocATloN: Round Rock, Texas TYPE: Core See Plan
133A
H1d30
lODNIAS
SAMPLE
N - BLOWS
PER FOOT
MATERIAL OESCRIPTION
CORE
DRILLED
I03H3A00311
3H03
N011YA313
DEPTH SCALE(
— ,�
— Dark Brown Clay
—
—
J--
Tan Severely Weathered Limestone
_ 5
—
—
=
\
Tan Weathered Limestone with Red Clay
Pockets
THD Penetration
100 Blows =1.75"
Ta Li
5.0'
4.7'
—
—
_
- 10
-
—
—
—
—
Total Depth of Boring = 10.0 Feet
•
Note: Boring was advanced to 2.0 feet
below the ground surface prior to using
drilling fluid and water was not en—
countered above that depth.
_
—
—,
—
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING DIVISION
FOR
January 2, 1981 LOG OF BORING
WATER TREATMENT PLANT
2A BORING NO. PROJECT
LOCATION: Round Rock,' Texas TYPE: Core See Plan
111334
SYMBOL
SAMPLE
N -BLOWS
PER FOOT
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
CORE
DRILLED
CORE
RECOVERED
ELEVATION
DEPTH SCALE(
—
–\ Dark Brown Clay
_
–
I 11
Tan Weathered Limestone with Brown
Clay Pockets TAD Penetration
I
I I
_
—10
100 Blows=1.5'
Tan Weathered Limestone with Siltstone
Seams
THD Penetration
5.0'
1.8'
–
_
SI'
–
^
-
100 Blows =4.0"
Total Depth of Boring = 10.0 Feet
Note: Boring was. advanced from the
ground surface down by the use of drill—
ing fluid thus inhibiting positive
groundwater observations.
•
•
•
-
^'
j
1.
I
I
1.
I
I
1
I
1
.I
I
I
I
1
TRINITY ENGINEERING TESTING CORPORATION
GCOTCCHNICAI. ENGINEERING DIVISION
Lake Georgetown Project
RESOLUTION NO. 3j
Water Treatment Plant
WHEREAS, the City has duly advertised for bids for the
construction of the water treatment plant as part of the
project to acquire needed water from Lake Georgetown, and
WHEREAS, ! /. / 1/ /677,Jhl
submitted the lowest and best bid, said bid being in the
amount of $a, 6,51 (o90•lb, and
WHEREAS, the Council wishes to accept the bid of
contract for the construction of said improvements, Now There-
fore
TEXAS
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK,
That the bid of
is hereby accepted as the lowest and best bid, and the
Mayor is hereby authorized and directed to execute on behalf
of the City a contract with ' / . /3
for the construction of the water treatment plant.
ATTEST:
RESOLVED this /4 L ' day of May, 1981.
.,u 'J tiJ
, and to enter into a
AO A
LARRY L. TON , Mayor
City of Round Rock, Texas